hide results

    FAQ/Walkthrough by Berserker

    Version: Kev | Updated: 09/09/13 | Search Guide | Bookmark Guide

    ____________________________________
    B E R S E R K E R  P R E S E N T S: \
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
     ____   _____  ____   _  ____   _____  _   _  _____    _____ __     __ _  _
    |  _ \ | ____|/ ___| | ||  _ \ | ____|| \ | ||_   _|  | ____|\ \   / /| || |
    | |_) ||  _|  \___ \ | || | | ||  _|  |  \| |  | |    |  _|   \ \ / / | || |
    |  _ < | |___  ___) || || |_| || |___ | |\  |  | |    | |___   \ V /  | || |___
    |_| \_\|_____||____/ |_||____/ |_____||_| \_|  |_|    |_____|   \_/   |_||____/
    
                 **   T H E   D A R K S I D E  C H R O N I C L E S   **
    
    ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
    ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
    
                         Resident Evil: The Darkside Chronicles
                                    FAQ/Walkthrough
    
                                      Version Kev
                                Last updated: 9/08/13
    
                                Authored by: Berserker
                           Email: berserker_kev(at)yahoo.com
                    Homepage: http://www.berserkersblog.blogspot.com
                   Youtube: http://www.youtube.com/user/BerserkerSTARS
    
               This document Copyright 2010 - 2012 Kevin Hall (Berserker)
           Resident Evil: The Darkside Chronicles Copyright 2009 Capcom Ltd.
    
                                         ---
    
    ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
    ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                  TABLE OF CONTENTS
    *******************************************************************************
    
       Section I:  Introduction  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [IN00]
    
      Section II:  Basics  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [BS00]
    
     Section III:  Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [WT00]
    
          - Scenario: Operation Javier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC01]
    
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ01]
    
          - Scenario: Memory of a Lost City  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC02]
    
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 1  . . . . . . . . . . [LC01]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 2  . . . . . . . . . . [LC02]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 3  . . . . . . . . . . [LC03]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 4  . . . . . . . . . . [LC04]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 5  . . . . . . . . . . [LC05]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 6  . . . . . . . . . . [LC06]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 7  . . . . . . . . . . [LC07]
              -- Memory of a Lost City: Chapter 8  . . . . . . . . . . [LC08]
    
          - Scenario: Operation Javier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC11]
    
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ02]
    
          - Scenario: Game of Oblivion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC03]
    
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO01]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO02]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO03]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO04]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO05]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO06]
              -- Game of Oblivion: Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [GO07]
    
          - Scenario: Operation Javier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [SC21]
    
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ03]
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ04]
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ05]
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ06]
              -- Operation Javier: Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . [OJ07]
    
      Section IV:  Archives  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [AR00]
    
       Section V:  Unlockables & Extras  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [UN00]
    
      Section VI:  Frequently Asked Questions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FA00]
    
     Section VII:  Resident Evil Extra Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EI00]
    
    Section VIII:  Everything Else . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [EE00]
    
          - Copyright  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CO00]
          - Special Thanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [ST00]
          - Version History  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [VH00]
          - Contact Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CI00]
          - About Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [AM00]
          - Donations  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [DO00]
          - Cheat Happens Featured Guides  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [CH00]
          - Future Projects  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FP00]
    
    [IN00]
    ===============================================================================
                            _____    __  _____  __    ___
                            \_   \/\ \ \/__   \/__\  /___\
                             / /\/  \/ /  / /\/ \// //  //
                          /\/ /_/ /\  /  / / / _  \/ \_//
                          \____/\_\ \/   \/  \/ \_/\___/
    
                              I N T R O D U C T I O N
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    Welcome to my Darkside Chronicles guide, fellow RE fan!             - Berserker
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
                              -  J U L Y  1 9 9 8  -
    
    The first known incident of the viral outbreak occurred in the Summer of 1998. 
    It all started on the outskirts of the American Midwestern Town of Raccoon 
    City, in the Arklay Mountains.  The virus eventually spread into the peaceful 
    community and caused a widespread of panic and chaos as the inhabitants of the 
    city were transformed into the walking dead through the mutation effects of the 
    T-virus.
    
                           - S E P T E M B E R  1 9 9 8 -
    
    The T-virus spread throughout the town of Raccoon City turning it's local 
    inhabitants into zombies.  Researcher William Birkin's G-virus was stolen and 
    he injected himself with his own virus before his demise then became a walking 
    carrier of his own creation.
    
    Around that time, Claire Redfield arrived in Raccoon City to search for her 
    lost brother Chris Redfield and Leon S. Kennedy drove toward the R.P.D. 
    building to celebrate his first day on the police force.  Both of them 
    eventually cross paths and team up in order to survive the chaos.  They meet up 
    with William's daughter, Sherry Birkin and special agent Ada Wong.  Leon, 
    Claire and Sherry escape from Raccoon City.  Claire departs to find her brother 
    and Leon and Sherry are later detained by government agents.
    
    Special Agent HUNK retrieves a sample of the G-virus for Umbrella shortly after 
    Leon and Claire escape the police station.  Through Ada Wong, Wesker secures a 
    sample of the G-virus after the incidents that take place and... before the 
    cleansing of Raccoon City.
    
                            -  O C T O B E R  1 9 9 8  -
    
    The President of the United States declared Raccoon City a disaster and ordered 
    a missile to be launched in order to sterilize the city and keep the virus from 
    spreading.  On the morning of October 1, 1998, Raccoon City was literally wiped 
    off the map with a destructive blast.  Umbrella, the worldwide pharmaceutical 
    enterprise lead by Ozwell E. Spencer, was to blame for the release of the T-
    virus upon the unsuspecting public but little evidence lead to Umbrella 
    Corporation's involvement.  Only a select few knew the full truth as to 
    Umbrella's guilt but there was no proof.
    
                            -  D E C E M B E R  1 9 9 8  -
    
    On a secluded island in Europe known as Rockfort Island, Claire Redfield is 
    taken hostage after being found in a Paris Umbrella lab facility while 
    searching for her brother Chris Redfield.  Claire manages to escape while the 
    island is attacked by a renegade force lead by Albert Wesker, who is in search 
    of the T-Veronica virus.  Claire meets up with an inmate known as Steve and the 
    two face the horrors of the T-virus outbreak on the island while dodging the 
    commander of Rockfort Island, Alfred Ashford.
    
    The two manage to escape from the island but their plane is set to autopilot by 
    Alfred and they are lead toward an Antarctic Umbrella facility.  Claire and 
    Steve are detained at the facility and Alfred's sister Alexia is finally 
    unleashed from her dormant state now in full control of the T-Veronica virus 
    that was injected into her body fifteen years ago.  After being rescued by 
    Chris Redfield, Chris and Claire confront Alexia and escape the facility. 
    Wesker manages to secure a sample of the T-Veronica virus shortly before the 
    triggering system wipes away all traces of Alexia and the T-Veronica virus 
    inside of her body.
    
                               -  J U L Y  2 0 0 2  -
    
    Since the incident at Raccoon City several years back, not another incident 
    involving B.O.W.'s has been reported.  The Umbrella Corporation has now been 
    disbanded due to their involvement in the Raccoon City incident.
    
    Leon S. Kennedy and former Special Forces agent Jack Krauser are sent to South 
    America by the US government to locate Javier Hidalgo.  Javier is the boss of a 
    notorious drug cartel known as the "Sacred Snakes". He approached one of the 
    few remaining Umbrella researchers that had escaped from justice and has gone 
    missing ever since then.
    
                     N O T E S  F R O M  T H E  A U T H O R . . .
    
    This guide includes a full walkthrough of the main game that details all hidden 
    items and archive files that may be unlocked in each chapter for each scenario. 
    There is also a full archive list at the very bottom of the guide that list out 
    every entry under the Archives menu with details on how to unlock each one.  If 
    you have any comments, questions, or enjoy what I have done here then send me 
    an email and tell me about it!
    
    -- Berserker
    
    
    [BS00]
    ===============================================================================
                            ___    _    __   _____  ___  __ 
                           / __\  /_\  / _\  \_   \/ __\/ _\
                          /__\// //_\\ \ \    / /\/ /   \ \ 
                         / \/  \/  _  \_\ \/\/ /_/ /___ _\ \
                         \_____/\_/ \_/\__/\____/\____/ \__/
    
                            G E T T I N G   S T A R T E D
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    This section contains all the basic information that one must know in order to 
    face the horrors of the darkside.
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                    CONTROL SETUPS
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ---------------------  WII REMOTE (WII-MOTE) AND NUNCHUK  ---------------------
    >> Remote                                >> Nunchuk
    
    A            = Interact/Collect item     C            = Inventory Menu
    B            = Fire                      Z            = N/A
    1            = N/A                       Analog       = Switch weapons
    2            = N/A
    -            = Inventory Menu
    +            = Use Green Herb
    Home         = Wii Home Menu
    D-pad        = Switch weapons
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    --------------------  ZAPPER/PERFECT SHOT/GUN AND NUNCHUK  --------------------
    >> Zapper                                >> Nunchuk
    
    B            = Fire                      C            = Inventory Menu
    +            = Use Green Herb            Z            = Interact/Collect item
    -            = Inventory Menu            Analog       = Switch weapons
    Home         = Wii Home Menu
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ================
    Targeting Cursor
    ================
    
    The targeting cursor will allow you to get a pinpoint shot on enemies.  The 
    cursor will become more bold when highlighting a destroyable object and the 
    cursor will change to a red dot when it falls over an enemy's weak point.
    
    =========
    Reloading
    =========
    
    To reload the currently equipped weapon, swipe/shake the Wii-mote.  This can be 
    changed over to where the Nunchuk must be swiped/shaken if you prefer Zapper 
    controls.
    
    ================
    Partner's Health
    ================
    
    Each scenario has two characters with a life bar each.  Your partner can take 
    damage at certain portions whenever the partner appears in view and tries to 
    fight enemies along with your controlled character.  The partner can take 
    damage just like your controlled character, so always try to defend your 
    partner as much as possible.  Whenever a partner is grabbed by a zombie, be 
    quick to shoot the zombie off since the partner's health will drain quickly 
    while the zombie attacks the partner.
    
    ==================
    Using a Green Herb
    ==================
    
    There are two ways to use a green herb once one it obtained:
    
    1) Press the - or C button and select the green herb from the inventory menu. 
    Once selected it can be used on the main characters or the partner.
    2) Press the + button and the green herb will automatically be used on the main 
    character during gameplay.
    
    ============
    Gold Pickups
    ============
    
    Gold pickups are spread throughout the environment at times and sometimes gold 
    coins can be found in breakable objects by shooting the object.  It's best to 
    shoot every possible breakable object in site to increase the score and find 
    possible gold coins.  Some gold coins are randomly hidden among breakable 
    objects.  In other words, a player might get a gold coin from an object one 
    game then not get it the next game when the same object is shot.
    
    =======================
    Slashing with the Knife
    =======================
    
    With a Zapper, hold the Z button then shake the nunchuk in order to slash with 
    the knife.  The cursor will become bold and brighter red color and swiping the 
    nunchuk in any direction will perform a slash in that direction.
    
    With the Wii-remote and nunchuk only, hold the A or Z button to make the cursor 
    become bold and brighter red.  While holding the A button, swipe the Wii-mote 
    or nunchuk in any direction to slash with the knife.  Release the A button to 
    reequip the current firearm.
    
    Notice that the on-screen knife slash changed depending on which way you swipe 
    the remote.  This can help since flying enemies will sometimes fly toward 
    different portions of the screen - just slash at whatever portion of the screen 
    an enemy is flying toward to hit them.
    
    =================
    Tossing a Grenade
    =================
    
    Unlike Umbrella Chronicles where a player could simply hold down a button then 
    press another button to toss a grenade, the grenades must now be equipped like 
    a firearm by using the nunchuk analog or Wii-remote directional pad.
    
    Select the grenades by pressing the direction that they are set to then press 
    the fire button to toss one.  Grenades are very important to have for each 
    chapter since they can help a player quickly rack up kills in an area with a 
    bunch of enemies.  In enemy-filled areas that your main characters take a 
    glimpse of real quick, they are extremely vital!
    
    ==================
    On-screen Commands
    ==================
    
    During action sequence cutscenes, input the command displayed on the screen in 
    order to dodge an oncoming attack.  If the command is not entered in an action 
    sequence then the character(s) will suffer damage.
    
    While fighting boss creatures, on-screen commands will pop up as the boss 
    attacks, giving you the option to dodge the attack by inputting the current 
    command.  Be sure to react fast!
    
    While fighting bosses that only require button tap commands, both buttons can 
    be pressed no matter what button icon appears to insure that you always dodge 
    the attack.
    
    ==============
    Critical Shots
    ==============
    
    Aim toward an enemy's weak spot and wait for the targeting cursor to change 
    into a small blinking red light.  Shoot at that time to deliver a one-hit kill 
    to any zombie or severely damage any normal enemy while the handgun is 
    equipped.
    
    -- Weak Spots
    
    Zombie            - Forehead
    Cerberus          - Head
    Ivy               - *Inside mouth
    Ivy +XY           - *Inside mouth
    Hunter II         - Head (face)
    Sweeper           - Head (face)
    Hunter Gamma      - Head (mouth area)
    Lurker            - Head (mouth area)
    Crow              - Head
    Bat               - Head
    Jumping Maneater  - Front of head above fangs, basically the eyes
    Giant Spider      - Front of head above fangs, basically the eyes
    Black Widow       - Front of head above fangs, basically the eyes
    Plague Crawler    = Front portion of head
    Licker            - Head
    Bandersnatch      - Head
    
    * Shoot the front of the head to make an Ivy open its mouth then shoot the 
    inside of the mouth.
    
    -- Tips for Gaining Critical Shots:
    
    - Aim at the zombie's forehead directly between its eyes
    - Shots in any other portion of their face may cause a zombie's head to turn, 
      limiting your chances for a critical hit.
    - A zombie will kneel down and remain still for a few seconds after shooting 
      one in the knee.
    - Whenever a zombie must get up from the ground, it will remain still for a few
      brief seconds before it begins to move toward the screen.
    - While a zombie is nearby or directly in front of the camera, shoot them with 
      rapid fire (about two shots) from the handgun to make them stagger and stand 
      still for a few seconds then quickly switch to a Handgun and aim for its 
      forehead.  The power of your handgun can make this obsolete however.
    - Slash a zombie with the knife whenever it tries to lunge at you then hit it 
      with the Handgun while it remains still for a few brief seconds.
    - IMPORTANT -> Upgrading the firepower of the handgun will make critical 
      headshot harder to obtain in the beginning chapters.  Zombies will be so weak
      to your powerful handgun that they will die within one shot if you happen to 
      miss the critical headshot and hit another area of the body.
    
    =========================================
    Countering a Zombie's Attack with Gunfire
    =========================================
    
    In Resident Evil: The Umbrella Chronicles, a player would mainly use a 
    submachine gun to counter a zombies dash or set up a headshot.  In Darkside 
    Chronicles, blast a zombie about two or three times if it ever dashes toward 
    the characters and this will cause it to stagger backwards.  This is a perfect 
    way to set up a headshot.  This technique needs to be mastered for the final 
    few chapters since zombies get incredibly aggressive in the final few chapters.
    
    ================
    Counterattacking
    ================
    
    Once a zombie grabs a character, wiggle the Nunchuk or Wii-mote to perform a 
    counter attack.  Counter attacks are always a one hit kill on any zombie once a 
    counterattack sequence is entered correctly.  It will even defeat a Crimson 
    once the command is executed.  Counter attacks are character specific.
    
    -- Character Counter Attacks
    
    Leon    - Shove + Roundhouse
    Krauser - Back Hand + Throat Slit
    Claire  - Knife Slash + Kick
    Steve   -
    Chris   - Shoulder Ram + Back Hand
    
    =======
    Ranking
    =======
    
    At the end of each chapter, you will be ranked based on five categories and how 
    well you did in each one.  Here is the list of categories along with a brief 
    description of each:
    
    Score              - Overall scores based on environmental objects shot, 
                         criticals obtained and enemies defeated.
    Clear Time         - Time taken on a chapter.
    Enemies Eliminated - Number of enemies defeated in a chapter.
    Headshots          - Number of zombie critical shots/headshots in a chapter.
    No-continue Clear  - Bonus points if no continue (first aid spray) was used.
    No-damage Clear    - Bonus points if no damage was received.
    
    To go into further detail, Score is the full score from objects shot, number of 
    criticals and if they are chained and the number of enemies defeated.  Clear 
    Time is the total amount of time taken per chapter - basically defeat every 
    enemy quickly so the character(s) will move on.  Enemies Eliminated is the 
    total sum of all enemies defeated (regardless of size) per chapter.  Headshots 
    represent zombie critical shots which can only be obtained from a headshot on 
    any normal zombie.  No-continue Clear is given if no first aid spray is used.  
    No-damage Clear is given if no damage is received in a chapter.
    
    You will receive a letter rank per category at the end of each stage as 
    follows:
    
       S - Excellent
       A - Very Good
       B - Good
       C - Poor
    
    The higher the rank, the more bonus gold will be gained at the end of each 
    chapter. Bonus gold will be given out based on the total summed up rank at the 
    end of each chapter as follows:
    
    Gold may be used to upgrade weapons under the "Customize" menu found on the 
    scenario screen.  You can also view your current rank on each difficulty per 
    stage by clicking on the "Results" menu found on the scenario screen.
    
    Also, you will unlock extra items under the "Archives" menu for each "A" rank 
    that is received on most chapter in Normal mode and each "S" rank that is 
    received in a chapter in Hard mode.
    
    ===============
    Weapon Upgrades
    ===============
    
    In between chapters, weapons may be upgraded from the "Customize" menu up above 
    the scenario list.  Collect points (displayed as stars) in order to upgrade a 
    weapon for a certain amount depending on the weapons current level.  By using 
    the "Customize" option, each weapon's stats can be upgraded.
    
    Stats can be upgraded through the customize menu in the following categories:
    
    Power          - The damage done per shot
    Rate of Fire   - Speed at which the gun can be fired in succession
    Reload Speed   - Time it takes to reload the weapon
    Capacity       - Amount of weapon a weapon can hold before reloading
    Stopping Power - Force the shots inflict on an enemy (will stagger an enemy 
                     back sooner when upgraded)
    
    It is very important that the handgun, submachine gun and shotgun are upgraded 
    as the game progresses.  Keep in mind that upgrading the handgun's power will 
    make critical headshots harder to obtain in earlier chapters if you go back to 
    them since you'll be able to kill zombies faster.
    
    =====================
    Environmental Objects
    =====================
    
    Some objects in the environments can be shot in order to damage nearby enemies 
    such as red barrels and chandeliers.  Red barrels can be extremely useful while 
    taking on a group of enemies.  Chandeliers take a bit more effort (more shots 
    to destroy) to damage an enemy with them but they're still worth a try.  All of 
    these will increase your "Objects Destroyed" rank once they have been 
    destroyed.
    
    =====
    Items
    =====
    
    Throughout the chapters, items will be lying around or possibly hidden in 
    objects.  Some of them will replenish health while others will unlock extras.
    
    Green Herb        - restores half of health in Normal mode
    First Aid Spray   - revives from death one time (basically a continue)
    Archive Item/File - unlocks hidden file that can be viewed under the "Archives" 
                        menu in between chapters
    
    =====================
    Secondary Weapon Ammo
    =====================
    
    In each chapter there is a certain weapon that will appear throughout the 
    chapter no matter what weapon your character currently has equipped.  Unlike 
    Umbrella Chronicles, a player can enter the inventory menu at any time during 
    gameplay by pressing the C or + button and select from an inventory of weapons 
    to assign to the quick equip menu (analog on nunchuk or directional pad on Wii-
    remote).
    
    
    [WT00]
    ===============================================================================
         __    __  _      __         _____        __    ___         ___        
        / / /\ \ \/_\    / /   /\ /\/__   \/\  /\/__\  /___\/\ /\  / _ \ /\  /\
        \ \/  \/ //_\\  / /   / //_/  / /\/ /_/ / \// //  // / \ \/ /_\// /_/ /
         \  /\  /  _  \/ /___/ __ \  / / / __  / _  \/ \_//\ \_/ / /_\\/ __  / 
          \/  \/\_/ \_/\____/\/  \/  \/  \/ /_/\/ \_/\___/  \___/\____/\/ /_/
    
                        F U L L   S C E N A R I O   G U I D E
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    This walkthrough was written while playing on normal mode.
    
    File and Item locations are listed throughout the walkthrough in the exact area 
    where they are obtainable - files are not discussed in the actual writing.  All 
    enemy names are surrounded in brackets ([]) to help emphasize their appearance.
    
    Upgrade your weapons after each chapter if you can.  You need to focus on 
    upgrading the handgun, submachine gun and shotgun weapons most of all.  It's 
    possible to go through a good bit of the game without upgrading a single 
    weapons but once the Game of Oblivion scenario is reached, the chapters can 
    become very difficult if you're not upgrading your weapons.  Game of Oblivion 6 
    can be a great challenge on easy mode with default level weapons.
    
    WARNING: Keep in mind that upgrading the handgun's power will make critical 
    headshots a bit harder to pull off in earlier chapters since you'll be able to 
    kill off zombies quicker and will get less chances to miss a headshot and hit 
    another part of the body.
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    ------------- P R E - R E S I D E N T  E V I L  4  S C E N A R I O ------------
    
                                J U L Y  2 3,  2 0 0 2
    
                  ___                            _    _               
                 / _ \  _ __    ___  _ __  __ _ | |_ (_)  ___   _ __  
                | | | || '_ \  / _ \| '__|/ _` || __|| | / _ \ | '_ \ 
                | |_| || |_) ||  __/| |  | (_| || |_ | || (_) || | | |
                 \___/ | .__/  \___||_|   \__,_| \__||_| \___/ |_| |_|
                       |_|                                            
                              _                _             
    LEON                     | |  __ _ __   __(_)  ___  _ __                   JACK
                          _  | | / _` |\ \ / /| | / _ \| '__|
    KENNEDY              | |_| || (_| | \ V / | ||  __/| |                  KRAUSER
                          \___/  \__,_|  \_/  |_| \___||_|   
    
    
                                                                             [SC01]
    |***************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - A Soothing Lullaby ******************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  1               [OJ01] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                     "Sleep, my love, as the trees above                     |
    |                         protect you from the dark..."                       |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Overture (Easy), Girl (Easy), Villager Zombies 
    (Normal), Javier Zombies (Normal), Jumping Maneater (Normal), Piranha (Normal)
    A Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Leon S. Kennedy, Jack Krauser
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Hilda, Lighter
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Ink Ribbon
    
    Unlockable Weapon: Submachine Gun, Shotgun, Grenade
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 1
    Unlockable Files: Waterside Village, Written Orders, Communications from 
    Krauser (Hard Mode), Guide (Normal Mode)
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == VILLAGE GATES ==
    
    Leon and Krauser will survey the village and speak to each other as they step 
    through the village entrance gates.  Your controlled character will always be 
    on the right side of the group so that you have the viewpoint of the other 
    character as he stands to the left.  So, if you choose Krauser then Leon will 
    be to your left and vice versa.
    
    The characters will hear a radio announcement about some missing girls in the 
    area then they will turn to look at the gate full of missing person posters to 
    the right.  After stepping toward the well, your controlled character will look 
    into the well while turning to the left then a Villager will appear in his 
    view.
    
    Sir, did you lose something?  Oh, my god wouldn't you know that the slow 
    shambling Villager that wreaks of death turns out to be a [ZOMBIE]!?  I sure 
    the hell didn't see that coming, did you?  Control of the gun will finally be 
    given to the player the moment that the zombie attacks.  Aim at his head with 
    the Wii-remote and try to shoot him in the forehead.  While aiming at his 
    forehead, the gun cursor will change to a glowing red dot, signifying that a 
    player is aiming at the zombie's weak point.
    
    When shooting a zombie in the forehead, the player will get a critical 
    headshot. Critical headshots are important for stage ranking at the end of each 
    stage based on the number of criticals obtained and they also give a player 
    extra points.  A player can get a few criticals in a row to boost the score 
    even more.
    
    The zombies in this chapter are all very weak, so a player can only really 
    afford to shoot each zombie a few times with the handgun before it dies.  Try 
    to go for a headshot on all zombies instantly unless the zombie rushes at the 
    characters or tries to attack.  Some will appear far off and will not attack 
    but each kill adds up to total kill ranking, so it's best to kill off as many 
    zombies as possible whether they are a threat or not.
    
    The first zombie will fall and the characters will speak about the zombie and 
    the T-virus.  Use this time to reload - shake the Wii-remote.  The characters 
    will turn to the right as TWO [ZOMBIES] shamble toward them.  Blast them then 
    the characters will turn and face THREE [ZOMBIES] in the distance.  Try to 
    shoot the three zombies quickly since your controlled character will quickly 
    turn to the right and face a [ZOMBIE] to your partner's right before both 
    characters turn and haul ass down the village street behind them.
    
    == MARKETPLACE ==
    
    The characters will be stopped by TWO [ZOMBIES] as they round the left corner.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Waterside Village                                    |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters round the corner after running from the zombies at the  |
    | beginning, there will be a few baskets of fruit on the table to the left.   |
    | Shoot the first fruit basket with yellow fruit inside of it to reveal this  |
    | file.                                                                       |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    There are a few breakable bowls to the left and two pots to the right and left 
    of these two zombies that can shot to reveal possible gold coins.  Gold coins 
    can be found throughout each chapter by shooting breakable objects - these 
    appear in random objects (never the same one per playthrough usually).  You'll 
    want to always try to shoot breakable objects for gold to upgrade weapons at 
    the end of each chapter and to increase your overall score at the end of each 
    chapter.  You'll get 10 points per breakable object shot.
    
    The characters will turn to the left and THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack.  The 
    Zombie in the front of the group will try to attack immediately so have your 
    Wii-remote ready to blast him in the chest in order to cancel his attack.  The 
    other two Zombies can be easily headshot as they shamble in the back of the 
    first zombie.
    
    Blast the pots on the right side of the street ahead to find some --GOLD-- in 
    the third fruit bag.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the ground near 
    the table up ahead.  Use the Z button to pick up the ammo.  The characters will 
    survey the area then turn and look down the street to the left.  Blast any 
    breakable objects along the sides of the street for extra gold coins.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the side of the street near a table after 
    the characters move down the street after fighting a group of three zombies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    While your controlled character steps ahead be prepared to shoot as your 
    character turns around and sees a [ZOMBIE] attacking your partner.  The zombie 
    will be grappling your partner so shoot the zombie off before the partner takes 
    damage.  When the characters turn back around THREE [VILLAGER ZOMBIES] will 
    attack from the street ahead.  One of them runs toward the characters, so be 
    sure to shoot him quickly.  Shoot the fruit bags on the floor to the left for 
    some extra --GOLD--. One of the fruit bags contains a **GRENADE PICKUP**.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Written Orders                                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After or before your partner is attacked, while your controlled character   |
    | looks down the street to the left, shoot the first fruit bag on the floor   |
    | to the left to reveal this file.                                            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade pickup - After your partner is attacked, both characters will turn 
    to face a group of three zombies.  Shoot the fruit bags to the left and a 
    grenade pickup will be inside of one of them - fourth one from the front.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will step past a few dead bodies.  As they look to the right 
    once they step toward an alley up ahead, quickly grab the **GREEN HERB** lying 
    on the counter of the nearby building.  Herbs can be used one of two ways: 
    either open the inventory menu by pressing the - button then select the green 
    herb and press B to use it or press the + button during gameplay to 
    automatically use it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the counter of a stand off to the right as the 
    characters step past some dead bodies along the side of the street while 
    heading toward an alley.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Grab the herb quickly since the characters will soon face the alley to the left 
    again as TWO [ZOMBIES] rush the characters.  Be ready to fire quickly since 
    they will dash fast.  It's possible to still get headshots, but safety from 
    damage should come first.
    
    The characters will quickly turn after the two zombies fall and ANOTHER 
    [ZOMBIE] will attack immediately so be prepared to fire.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will 
    step out from around the stand to the right then, as the characters turn, TWO 
    MORE [ZOMBIES] will step out from around the side of the stand where the green 
    herb was collected.  Try to shoot them for kills as the characters see them.  
    There's not really much time for headshots.
    
    Leon and Krauser will dash into the alley and the partner character will climb 
    onto the boxes right before your character turns to face TWO [ZOMBIES] that 
    will move down the alley behind the characters.  Shoot them quickly since your 
    character will turn back around as the partner hops over the fence and your 
    character will climb onto the boxes and hop over the fence as well.
    
    The characters will eventually turn back and look at the fence while on the 
    other side and TWO [ZOMBIES] will break down the fence and attack.  Blast them 
    then the characters will open the nearby metal door.
    
    TWO [JUMPING MANEATERS] will be lurking off to the right as the characters turn 
    to the right after stepping through the door.  Shoot them in their eye area 
    near the mouth.  They only take a few handgun shots so don't worry about 
    switching to the submachine gun.
    
    The characters will survey the spiders shortly before turning around as THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] attack.  These Javier zombies have hard hats on their heads that can 
    be shot off but the shot will not affect their dashing, so critical headshots 
    are more risky when dealing with these type of zombies.  They dash toward your 
    characters so use some precise shots to blast off their hard hats and shoot 
    them in the forehead or just shoot them in the body a few times to kill them 
    off.  Krauser will notice their snake tattoos signifying Javier after they 
    fall.
    
    == WATERSIDE VILLAGE ==
    
    The characters will step along the bridge wooden path up ahead and survey the 
    houses to the side carefully.  They will look through a window to the left then 
    turn to the right and look through another building window as they something 
    inside move to the right past the window.  Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** lying 
    on the table inside of the right building.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying on the table inside of building off to the right.  The 
    characters will look toward this building after turning to the left and looking 
    through a window.  It can be grabbed while the character look through window of 
    the right building.  This is in the area with the wooden walkway surrounded by 
    houses.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will step toward window.  Pick up the --GOLD-- on the shelf 
    inside as they step toward the window.  As the characters turn to the right ONE 
    [ZOMBIE] will dash toward them and attack.  Be ready to shoot since he moves 
    toward the characters very quickly.  It might be best to switch to the 
    submachine gun and blast him while the characters turn.
    
    Shortly after backing away from the window, the characters will turn and face 
    TWO [ZOMBIES] that shamble toward them from behind.  Your partner will shoot 
    the zombies along with your main character.  ONE [ZOMBIE] will step around the 
    side of the building up ahead and then the characters will look toward the top 
    of the ramp that they just came down and see THREE [ZOMBIES] at the top.
    
    Leon and Krauser will turn and run along the path behind them.  The bridge is 
    out up ahead so the characters will stop and look into the water.  [PIRAHNA] 
    will gather in the water then start to leap out of the water to attempt to bite 
    the characters.  Shoot the fish while they are in the water then knife slash 
    them before they hit your character if they leap out of the water.  Hold down 
    on the Z button and shake the nunchuk to slash with the knife.
    
    The characters will turn back around eventually and face FIVE [ZOMBIES].  The 
    characters will jump through the window of a building to the right.  Quickly 
    pick up the **FIRST AID SPRAY** on the shelf as the characters look to the 
    right while still on the ground after diving into the building.  As the 
    characters look further around the room, pick up the --GOLD-- on one of the 
    back shelves also.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Communications from Krauser 1 (Hard mode)            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters leap through the window of the building to escape the   |
    | zombies outside, blast the chair next to the table that they will stare at  |
    | while they are still on the floor of the building to reveal this file.      |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - After fighting off the fish, the characters will turn 
    toward a group of five zombies then dive through the window of the building to 
    the right.  The characters will look toward a shelf with this first aid spray 
    on it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A [JUMPING MANEATER] will be on the ceiling of the building as the characters 
    look behind them.  After the characters open the door, pick up the **SHOTGUN 
    AMMO** lying against the building up ahead.  The characters will open the doors 
    to the building up ahead then find the guide that they are supposed to meet up 
    with.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying against the side of the building after the characters 
    open the door and exit the building that the first aid spray was in.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == GUIDE HOUSE ==
    
    After the guide's body is pulled under the water by tentacles, ONE [HUNTER 
    GAMMA] will hop out of the water.  Shoot him in the light colored portion of 
    his body around the mouth area and he will be defeated quickly.  The handgun 
    will work perfectly for finishing off Hunter Gammas.  You'll want to switch to 
    the submachine gun at times for Hunter Gammas that are in groups however.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Guide (Normal mode)                                  |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the body of the guide is dragged up under the water in the building   |
    | where the characters meet up with him, shoot the laptop on the table to     |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    When the characters step outside of the building, the player will have a choice 
    of two branching paths. They both arrive at the same destination.
    
    == RIGHT PATH ==
    
    Leon and Krauser will step into the water and move around the right side of the 
    building up ahead.  They will turn while rounding the corner and TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    will rise out of the water and attack.  A critical headshot can be gained on 
    both of them very easily since they stagger slowly toward the characters after 
    rising.
    
    When characters turn back around, ONE [HUNTER GAMMA] will leap out of the water 
    to the side and land on the wooden walkway.  Blast him then pick up the **GREEN 
    HERB** up ahead to the left, near the side of the left building.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying against the left side of the building after the first 
    Hunter Gamma leaps out of the water after killing the two zombies that rise out 
    of the water.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Another [HUNTER GAMMA] will surface from the water off to the right.  Quickly 
    shoot him while he is in the water before he jumps out of the water to attack 
    the characters.  A moan will be heard off to the left shortly before the 
    characters turn to the left as TWO [ZOMBIES] break through the wall of the 
    building to the side.  They are turned at an angle when they first step out so 
    a critical headshot can be rather tough to get on them until they walk toward 
    the characters.
    
    TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] will leap onto the rooftop of the submerged building 
    further ahead then ANOTHER [HUNTER GAMMA] will leap onto the rooftop of the 
    building off to the left as the characters turn to face it.  Shoot the single 
    Hunter Gamma then the characters will turn back around and face the other two 
    again.  The handgun works perfectly once again - there is no reason to switch 
    to the submachine gun.
    
    Leon and Krauser will climb onto the rooftop of the submerged building then 
    step around the side of it.  A [HUNTER GAMMA] will jump out of the water and 
    land on the rooftop, so be prepared to blast it.  The characters will hop off 
    the other end of the rooftop then land on a piece of a wooden walkway then step 
    into the water and enter the tunnel up ahead with the building inside.
    
    == LEFT PATH ==
    
    The characters will move along the wooden walkway then [PIRAHNA] will emerge 
    from the water to their left and right.  Shoot the fish whenever they swim in a 
    straight path toward the characters to keep them from diving out of the water 
    and biting the characters, knife slash as a last resort.  The characters will 
    eventually turn to the right and see a [HUNTER GAMMA] in the water.  Quickly 
    shoot the Hunter Gamma before it attacks the characters.
    
    After hopping down into the water, the characters will arrive at the door of a 
    submerged building.  Shoot the door twice to break it open.  Collect the 
    **GREEN HERB** from off the right shelf as the characters enter the building.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the top portion of the shelf in the partially 
    submerged building while taking the left path when the paths branch after 
    meeting up with the guide.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will emerge from the water as the characters turn to the left 
    after stepping into the center of the room.  The characters will look up toward 
    the ceiling and TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] will appear near two holes in the roof then 
    leap down into the building and attack.  The characters will move toward the 
    door on the opposite side of the building.  Shoot the door to break it open.
    
    Both characters will move along the narrow wooden walkway outside of the 
    building and work their way over to the roof of a submerged building.  A 
    [HUNTER GAMMA] will leap out of the water and land on the building.  Blast him 
    then the characters will move toward the water path that leads to the church.
    
    == CHURCH ==
    
    No matter which was is taken, the characters will walk along the water path 
    that leads to the church in the distance.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** from in 
    front of the church building as the two characters approach it.  The characters 
    will stare toward the church doors then they will quickly turn to the left and 
    a random dodge command will appear on the screen as a creature leaps out of the 
    water and tries to bite the characters.  The dodge command will either be B, Z, 
    or B + Z.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the ground in front of the church building.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After dodging the creature's attack, ONE [HUNTER GAMMA] will leap out of the 
    water and land on the wooden platform near the church.  Shoot it and TWO MORE 
    [HUNTER GAMMAS] will emerge from the water off to the right.  Shoot them while 
    they are in the water before they can leap out and attack.  Whenever a Hunter 
    Gamma quickly dives under the water, it is about to jump, so shoot that one 
    first.  A total of FOUR [HUNTER GAMMAS] will appear in the water next - two 
    from the right and two from the left - and they will hop onto the wooden 
    platform and attack the characters.
    
    A cutscene will play when the characters open the doors to the church after 
    defeating the four Hunter Gammas.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Boss: Hilda
    
    Weak Point: Dark green portion of head (circular portion above mouth)
    Recommended Weapon: Handgun
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Tentacle Strike: Hilda will lean back one of her tentacle arms to the side then 
    whip them forward.  Shoot the dark green portion of her head to cancel this 
    attack before she strikes the characters.
    
    Eventually, the characters will exit the church and Hilda will leap into the 
    water and perform the following attacks:
    
    Lunge: She will swim around in the water and sometimes leap out of the water 
    and lunge straight at the character.  A random dodge command must be entered in 
    order to avoid damage.  The button command will either be B, Z or B + Z.
    
    Needle Shot: Hilda will emerge while in the water then roar.  She will hold the 
    back of her tail up and fire needles at the character.  Shoot the dark green 
    spot on the front of Hilda's head to cancel this attack.
    
    Rock Toss: Hilda will remain submerged and her tentacles will surface from the 
    water then pick up rocks and hold them for a few second before tossing them at 
    the characters.  Shoot the rocks out of the tentacles grip.  The rocks can be 
    shot out of the air if she tosses them also.
    
    Pounce and Bite: When Hilda only has 25% life remaining, she will leap out of 
    the water and knock the characters down.  The characters will face her then she 
    will eventually try to bite the characters.  Blast her in the head with the 
    handgun as she leans her head back.  The handgun will work perfectly if you 
    keep shooting rapidly.
    ---
    
    -- BATTLE IN THE CHURCH
    
    After the cutscene with Manuela, the creature from the full motion video will 
    be standing in front of Leon and Krauser.  The handgun will work well for this 
    fight and so will the shotgun and submachine gun.  As long as the player 
    cancels Hilda's attacks with the submachine gun whenever she leans her head to 
    either side this battle will be very simple.  There is some **SUBMACHINE GUN 
    AMMO** lying to the left of Hilda during this fight.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the floor to the left of Hilda while the 
    characters fight her inside the church.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Aim at the dark green portion of Hilda's head, above its mouth and fire rapidly 
    with the shotgun to take off some severe damage from the creature.  The shotgun 
    is very damaging for this fight on normal mode.  Only switch to the submachine 
    gun to cancel one of her attacks.  MAKE SURE to reload before she attacks.  A 
    player can stand and shoot her with the handgun, but this will make the battle 
    last much longer.
    
    Hilda attacks by holding one of her tentacle arms to the side shortly before 
    striking the characters with her tentacles.  All you have to do is shoot Hilda 
    in the dark green portion of its head while it leans back to cancel the attack. 
    Hilda will hold her head at a slight angle the same direction that she will 
    lean, so just aim upward and slightly in the direction that she leans and fire 
    at her head to cancel the attack.
    
    -- TAKING THE BATTLE OUTSIDE
    
    Eventually the characters will turn around and exit the church.  Hilda will 
    leap into the water.  She will swim around the nearby area and stay surfaced a 
    bit.  Her body can be hit for minimal damage while she is swimming while 
    surfaced.  Shoot at her constantly with the handgun to damage her slightly 
    while she swims.
    
    She may eventually leap out of the water and try to bite the characters as she 
    jumps by them.  In order to avoid taking damage, enter the random dodge command 
    that appears on the screen when she leaps out of the water.
    
    The characters will climb up on top of the church roof from the right and left 
    side of the church if Hilda is not defeated quickly.  She will begin to do two 
    more attacks.  She will emerge from the water and roar shortly before firing 
    needles at the characters with her tail - shoot the dark green portion of her 
    head to cancel the attack.  Sometimes her tentacles will emerge from the water 
    and one of them will have a rock in its grip.  Shoot the rock to make the 
    tentacles drop it before it tosses the rock at characters  The rock can be shot 
    after it is tossed as well.
    
    -- PUTTING AN END TO IT
    
    When Hilda only has about 25% health remaining, she will leap out of the water 
    and knock the characters down.  The characters will face Hilda's head so blast 
    her directly in the head with the handgun when the characters turns toward her 
    head.  You need to keep shooting her to cancel her bite attack.  When she leans 
    her head back a handgun shot will cancel the oncoming bite.  She cannot be 
    killed off by normal gunfire.  The characters will step away from her and face 
    the front of the church while she remains in front of the door.  Shoot the top 
    portion of the church wall where the bell is (above the front door) to knock it 
    over on Hilda and end the battle.  The characters will begin to look up toward 
    the bell if the player does not shoot it quickly enough.  Knocking the top 
    portion of the wall over onto Hilda is the only way to end the battle.
    
    NOTE: If you continue to allow the characters to stand and stare at the top 
    portion of the wall like dumbasses then Hilda will act just as stupid and 
    remain motionless until the top portion of the church is shot.  So, basically, 
    a player can leave the game while the characters stare up toward the top of the 
    church then walk off and get some pretzels then come back and enjoy them before 
    putting an end to Hilda.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    
    ----------------- R E S I D E N T  E V I L  2  S C E N A R I O ----------------
    
    
                           S E P T E M B E R  2 9,  1 9 9 8
    
            __  __                                                __         
           |  \/  |  ___  _ __ ___    ___   _ __  _   _    ___   / _|   __ _ 
           | |\/| | / _ \| '_ ` _ \  / _ \ | '__|| | | |  / _ \ | |_   / _` |
           | |  | ||  __/| | | | | || (_) || |   | |_| | | (_) ||  _| | (_| |
           |_|  |_| \___||_| |_| |_| \___/ |_|    \__, |  \___/ |_|    \__,_|
                                                  |___/                      
                     _                 _      ____  _  _          
                    | |     ___   ___ | |_   / ___|(_)| |_  _   _ 
    LEON            | |    / _ \ / __|| __| | |    | || __|| | | |           CLAIRE
                    | |___| (_) |\__ \| |_  | |___ | || |_ | |_| |
    KENNEDY         |_____|\___/ |___/ \__|  \____||_| \__| \__, |         REDFIELD
                                                            |___/
    
    
    |*************** Resident Evil 2 - The Streets of Raccoon City ***************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  1           [LC01] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                            "Wait, don't shoot!"                             |
    |                                 "Get down!"                                 |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Encounter (Easy), Town Zombie (Normal), Zombie 
    Dogs (Normal), Crow (Normal), Police Zombie (Normal)
    A Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Leon S. Kennedy, Claire Redfield
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Lockpick
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Locker Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 2
    Unlockable Files: Raccoon City September 9, 1998, Evacuation Order, Film B, 
    Robert Kendo
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == FIRST STREET ==
    
    Just like we all remember from Resident Evil 2, Claire and Leon first meet on 
    the streets of Raccoon City then team up and fight through the nightmare on 
    foot without the thought of getting back into Leon's police car so they can 
    quickly head to their destination only to be nearly killed by a maniacal man in 
    a diesel truck that just recently transformed into a T-virus carrier.  Yeah, I 
    know, I know, the Chronicle games are usually off a bit. Surely, we've all come 
    to accept that by now.
    
    Anyway, Claire and Leon start out on the streets of Raccoon City.  When the 
    characters look up, try to shoot the light on the light post up above to gain a 
    possible extra gold coin.  The two characters will decide to head to the police 
    station then turn and walk toward the car in the distance.
    
    Right when the characters turn to the left THREE [ZOMBIES] will be preparing to 
    attack.  The first zombie on the left will dash toward the characters so be 
    sure to shoot him first.  The other two get up off the ground and slowly move 
    toward the characters.  Not long after turning the characters will turn back 
    toward the way they just came from and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will be lurching toward 
    them in the street section behind them.  As the characters turn back around 
    once again, FOUR [ZOMBIES] will be in the back of them, trapping Leon and 
    Claire in the middle of the street.
    
    Thankfully, Claire will notice an alley to the side and lead Leon down the 
    alley.  The door at the end will be locked.  Be prepared to fire as your 
    character turns since a [ZOMBIE] and another [ZOMBIE] will be right behind the 
    character.  The closest zombie will knock your controlled character down.  
    Quickly try to get a headshot on each of the zombies.  The characters will run 
    out of the alley afterward.
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be out on the streets as the characters leave the alley. 
    Toss a grenade at some of the zombie groups in order to rack up kills here or 
    fire rapidly to take down as many as possible.  Don't worry too much about 
    headshots since you have very little time to aim.
    
    The characters will move toward the alley leading to Kendo's Gun Shop over to 
    the right.  FOUR [ZOMBIES] block the way to the gun shop.  Your partner will 
    shoot at the zombies, but don't allow them to get too close to him/her or the 
    partner will suffer damage.  Blast the zombies out of the way.  The characters 
    will turn and face SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] that lurch toward them from the street 
    that they just came from.  Try for headshots on a few then toss a grenade 
    before the characters turn to rack up on kills.
    
    A cry for help will eventually come from inside Kendo's Gun Shop as Leon and 
    Claire turn back around to face the building.  The characters will enter 
    Kendo's Gun Shop shortly afterward.
    
    == KENDO'S GUN SHOP ==
    
    Good god... Mr. Kendo!  A [ZOMBIE] will be feasting on Robert Kendo's body as 
    Claire and Leon enter Kendo's Gun Shop.  Blast that sucker with a handgun 
    before he does any more damage to Mr. Kendo.  You killed, Kendo, you bastard!
    
    Quickly grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** and **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the gun rack 
    behind the counter before the characters move toward Kendo's body.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the gun rack behind the front counter in Kendo's Gun 
    Shop.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - On the gun rack behind the front counter in Kendo's 
    Gun Shop.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will both kneel down and examine Kendo's body.  Eventually, they 
    will look to the left as zombies start to pound on the glass windows.  The FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] will break the windows shortly, so prepare to blast them.  As the 
    characters back away from the broken windows, quickly pick up the **FIRST AID 
    SPRAY** behind the counter to the right.  A radio will begin to make an 
    announcement about the situation as the two characters look toward the area 
    behind the counter.
    
    When the characters turn toward the front counter, shoot the cash register on 
    the front counter - it contains some --GOLD--.  There is a **GRENADE PICKUP** 
    on the ammo rack straight ahead next to the front door.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Raccoon City September 9, 1998                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters enter Kendo's Gun Shop after escaping the first street  |
    | shoot the left suitcase on the counter with the cash register after both    |
    | characters look over Kendo's body.  Facing the suitcases when the           |
    | characters first enter the shop, this is the second suitcase from the left. |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Evacuation Order                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters turn back toward the two display cases on the wall in   |
    | Kendo's Gun Shop after they step near the counter, they will have the front |
    | counter to their left.  Shoot the red display rack inside the display case  |
    | in the back of room and to the left next to the display case that holds     |
    | the grenade pickup to reveal this file.                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - On the ammo rack by the front door in Kendo's Gun Shop.  
    Pick this up after the characters step behind the side counter and the radio 
    makes an announcement.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn to face the broken windows and FIVE [ZOMBIES] will 
    slowly move by the alley outside.  Toss a grenade at them for extra kills.  
    Both characters will step outside the back door and enter the back alley.
    
    == ALLEY BEHIND KENDO'S SHOP ==
    
    Claire and Leon will slowly move toward the corner of the back alley.  A group 
    of zombies will ram into the gates to their right as the two characters move by 
    them.  The zombies can't be shot yet.
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** in the back of the van as the characters move 
    further down the alleyway.  Shoot the box on the left in the back of the van to 
    gain some extra --GOLD--.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying in the van a little ways down from the gate that 
    zombies pound on in the back alley behind Kendo's Gun Shop.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    TWO [ZOMBIE DOGS] will appear on the top of the van then leap down and attack 
    and TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up from the ground afterwards.  Use the handgun to 
    shoot the dogs - aim at their heads.  They don't take many shots much like a 
    zombie.  A sound of the gate door behind them will be heard and the characters 
    will turn as FOUR [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  The zombie in front will move 
    faster than the others, so shoot him quickly then go for headshots on the 
    slower zombies in the back.  The characters will enter the court area behind 
    the gate.
    
    While the characters look over the court area, a body will fall from up above 
    off to the left.  The characters can't shoot it, since it is... not a zombie!? 
    FOUR [ZOMBIES] will suddenly attack as the characters turn back to the right. 
    The characters will take another glance at the fallen body and it will be a 
    zombie now, so we have an excuse to shoot it!
    
    The two zombies on the right in the group of four will try to attack the 
    partner, so be sure to keep an eye on them and blast them if they try to move 
    toward your partner.  The barrels in the back of the group of zombies can be 
    shot a few times with the handgun to make them explode and defeat the whole 
    crowd, but this will obviously ruin possible critical headshots. The characters 
    will take a look around then step through the nearby doorway.
    
    == STAIRWAY CORRIDOR ==
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** off to the right as the characters look toward it 
    when they step through the doorway.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - In front of the window off to the right as the characters step 
    through the doorway of the back alley in the court area behind Kendo's Gun 
    Shop.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    An announcement about the evacuation of Raccoon City will be heard as the 
    characters move up the stairway to the left.  SEVERAL [CROWS] will gather once 
    the characters move to the top walkway then they will attack.  Crows only take 
    one handgun shot to kill, but they are sometimes hard to hit.  The best time to 
    shoot them is right before they attack.  They will hover for a few seconds in 
    the air shortly before they attack, so quickly shoot them then.
    
    Both characters will move down the next set of stairs and turn around then look 
    back toward the crows then they climb onto a dumpster at the bottom.  Try to go 
    for critical headshots on the TWO [ZOMBIES] below the dumpster as the 
    characters look down at them.  After the characters drop off the dumpster, they 
    will move past two dead bodies.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from the 
    opposite side of the right body.  Press the Z button to open the gate up ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After the characters hop off the dumpster, this will 
    be behind the corpse slumped over against the right wall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == STREET IN FRONT OF THE POLICE STATION ==
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will be off to the right as the characters look behind the 
    blockade.  They don't attack and are rather distant but they can be shot for 
    some extra kills.  Eventually, the characters will turn back around after 
    surveying the area and TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up from the ground.  Pick up the 
    **GREEN HERB** to the right of them.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - The characters will survey the area after stepping through the 
    gate that leads to the street in front of the police station then they will 
    turn around and face two zombies.  This green herb will be to the right of the 
    two zombies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn to the left and a [ZOMBIE DOG] will be near them then 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE DOG] will hop over the blockade and prepare to attack.  Your 
    partner will start to make struggling noises and, when your character turns, 
    your partner will be fighting off a [ZOMBIE} so shoot it off your partner 
    before it damages him/her.
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will lurch toward the characters as they turn back toward the 
    cafe then the [ZOMBIE] that bangs on the cafe doors will bust through them and 
    dash toward the characters and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from the ground to 
    the right in the sitting area.
    
    When the characters turn to the left and move ahead, a female [ZOMBIE] will 
    appear further ahead then a [ZOMBIE] will crawl through a window of the bus to 
    the left and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will crawl through another bus window as the 
    characters turn.  A total of TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will crawl through the bus 
    windows eventually.  Try to go for critical headshots on them all.
    
    The characters will move over the barricade up ahead then spot the gate door 
    that leads to the R.P.D. building up ahead.  They will turn and spot THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] behind them then turn back around as the fire truck beside them 
    catches on fire and causes an explosion.  Your controlled character will get 
    knocked down and nearly get knocked out, but the partner will quickly wake your 
    character up.
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] (two on fire) will lurch toward the characters as your 
    character stands back up.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will shamble toward the characters as 
    they turn to the right.  The characters will rush toward the gate that leads to 
    the RPD building then enter the courtyard area.
    
    == IN FRONT OF THE RPD BUILDING ==
    
    A choice of two paths will be given as the characters step into the courtyard 
    area.  Either the Courtyard full of zombies or the Underground (alleyway) 
    below.  The characters can shoot at the zombies in the courtyard while making 
    the decision, but don't take too long or the game will decide a random path for 
    you.
    
    == UNDERGROUND ==
    
    As the characters move down the stairs, they will turn back around and a group 
    of [CROWS] will attack then knock down your controlled character.  As your 
    character turns to the right while on the ground a [ZOMBIE] will be crawling 
    through the nearby vent and will attack eventually, so blast him.
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack as the character gets up.  Grab the **GREEN HERB** on 
    the ground behind the zombies.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Film B                                               |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When given the choice of two paths, choose to go underground.  After your   |
    | controlled character is knocked down, shoot the zombies then the character  |
    | will get up and look to the right as two zombies walk toward the            |
    | characters.  Shoot the first light on the right wall as the characters look |
    | toward the two zombies.  This is the second to last light in the group of   |
    | lights on the right wall.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will walk up the stairs further ahead then make a turn and step 
    in front of the RPD building.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** near the walls of the 
    courtyard in front of the entrance doors. The characters will look toward the 
    front doors of the RPD building.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the ground behind the two zombies that attack after 
    the one in the vent.  This is below the stairs when a choice of branching paths 
    is given.
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near the wall of the courtyard as the characters step in 
    front of the front doors that lead inside the RPD building.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    WHAT!?  No zombie Brad Vickers?  Those Capcom bastards...
    
    == COURTYARD ==
    
    If the zombies are still in the courtyard, they will attack the characters, so 
    start shooting them if you haven't yet.  Did I really need to say that? Haha.
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** near the back right wall of the courtyard.  The 
    characters will step toward the end of the courtyard then turn to the right.  A 
    group of [CROWS] will attack from behind when the characters turn around.  As 
    the characters step past the walls of the courtyard, they will look toward the 
    front doors of the RPD building.  Two [DOGS] will hop out from up ahead and 
    attack as the characters turn to the right.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near the back right wall of courtyard if the characters 
    enter the courtyard area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == IN FRONT OF THE RPD BUILDING ==
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Robert Kendo (Normal mode)                           |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Facing the double door entrance to the police station, shoot the light on   |
    | the right to reveal this file.  This is best shot around the time that the  |
    | zombie dogs attack.                                                         |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    TWO [DOGS] will rush out of the courtyard and attack right after the characters 
    turn to the left.  When the characters turn around after killing the dogs, TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] will step through the open gates.  The characters will turn to the 
    left then TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack.  The characters will turn back toward the 
    two zombies at the gate then turn to the right and TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will 
    attack from the area in front of the courtyard.
    
    When the characters turn back toward the gate TWO [ZOMBIES] will rush the 
    characters so be prepared to fire.  THREE MORE [ZOMBIES] will be shambling into 
    the police station entrance area behind them.  Try to get some critical 
    headshots on the last three.
    
    After finishing off the final three zombies, the characters will turn back 
    toward the police station entrance and the chapter will end shortly.  Claire 
    and Leon are in for a long night, indeed.
    
    |******************** Resident Evil 2 - A Lost Little Girl *******************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  2           [LC02] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |               "What's the matter, Sherry, don't you trust me?"              |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Licker (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Blue Card Key
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Spade Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: Crossbow
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 3
    Unlockable Files: Marvin Branagh, Operation Report 1, Raccoon Police 
    Department, Memo to Leon
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    This chapter is a very short chapter overall, but it's quite fast-paced toward 
    the end.  The second half is like a train ride!
    
    Leon and Claire will meet up with Marvin Branagh after stepping into the police 
    station.  Marvin has been badly injured as is slumped over against the main 
    hall fountain.  Marvin will eventually demand that Claire and Leon search for 
    the other surviving members.  Claire and Leon will leave Marvin behind then 
    enter the room off to the left.
    
    == RECEPTION ==
    
    Be sure to grab the **CROSSBOW AMMO** off to the left after the characters step 
    through the door.  All the objects on the reception counter are breakable, so 
    blast them for extra points.  Shoot the lamp on the desk ahead and grab the 
    --GOLD-- from it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - On the floor next to the tables as the characters enter the 
        Reception room after talking with Marvin.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Marvin Branagh (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the characters step into the Reception Room, shoot the picture        |
    | hanging on the wall in the back of room as the characters move toward the   |
    | corridor on the other side of the room.                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will step around the side of the tables and walk toward the 
    window next to the door at the end of the corridor.  As your partner opens the 
    door, something will rush by the window outside.  Such a nostalgic scare 
    moment!
    
    == BLOODY HALLWAY ==
    
    The beginning portion of the hallway through the door is bathed in blood.  The 
    characters follow the blood trail up ahead and round the corner as Claire 
    continues to worry.  The trail of blood leads up to a ventilation shaft in the 
    ceiling.  The sound of glass will make your controlled character turn and then 
    your character will be knocked down by some creature.
    
    The characters will look around the room and find nothing then suddenly look up 
    as saliva drips from the ceiling.  It's a Licker!  The licker can't be killed 
    right now since the characters need an excuse to run further to the door down 
    the hall.  As the characters turn back around, another Licker will fall from 
    another ventilation shaft in the ceiling.  The characters will quickly turn 
    around and rush through the door nearby.
    
    == BARRICADED HALLWAY ==
    
    Leon and Claire will rush inside the corridor ahead then close the door behind 
    them.  Zombies hands will bust through the first window as the characters try 
    to move by the first boarded-up window - these hands always appear to hit the 
    characters, but you will not suffer damage.  The characters will stare at the 
    two zombies outside as they pass by the first window.  As the characters pass 
    by the hands, a [ZOMBIE]'s hands will bust through the second boarded up window 
    - this zombie can be shot and killed.  More hands will bust through the third 
    window then the characters will haul ass down to the first corner of the hall.
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** as the characters move to the other end of the 
    hall quickly before they turn back around or pick up the shotgun ammo shortly 
    after the characters turn back around and THREE [ZOMBIES] attack.  The zombies 
    will rush the characters, so be prepared to blast the first one on the left for 
    sure since he will be the closest.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - When the characters enter the hall with boarded-up windows, 
    they will move by them and zombies will attack.  Once the characters round the 
    first corner, this will be at the other end of the hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Operation Report 1                                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the characters move past the barricaded windows that the zombie hands |
    | reach through in the Barricaded Hallway, they will be attacked by a group   |
    | of three zombies.  When the characters turn to face the zombies, shoot the  |
    | bottom portion of the barricade on the first boarded up window to the left  |
    | to reveal this file.  This boarded up window is actually the window in the  |
    | middle of the corridor.                                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    While near the doors of the evidence room off to the right, the characters will 
    start to move toward the end of the hall and stop then turn as a [LICKER] steps 
    out from around the corner.  Aim at his head with the handgun and shoot him.  
    Normal Lickers are very easy as long as the head is shot.
    
    The characters will step down the next set of corridors toward the exit door 
    then a [LICKER] will hop onto the wall near the door and attack, so blast that 
    sucker down with a few handgun shots to the head.  The characters will open the 
    next door.
    
    == STAIRWAY CORRIDOR ==
    
    Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** near the dead body, the **GREEN HERB** near 
    the bottom portion of the stairway and the --GOLD-- off the desk near the green 
    herb.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - As the characters enter the hallway with the 
    staircase, this will be near the slumped over body at the bottom of the stairs.
    [ ] Green Herb - As the characters enter the hallway with the staircase, this 
    will be near the bottom portion of the stairs.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    As the characters step toward the dead body, TWO [ZOMBIES] will move toward 
    them from the left then the dead body, now a [ZOMBIE], will slowly get up from 
    near the bottom of the stairs.  Blast them then the characters will hear more 
    moans and turn as THREE [ZOMBIES] lurch toward them from the hallway that they 
    just exited from.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Raccoon City Police Department                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters enter the Stairway Corridor, they will fight off a few  |
    | zombies at the bottom of the stairs.  Shoot the light on the left corner    |
    | wall as the characters move up the first set of stairs.  This is NOT the    |
    | light in between the set of stairs, but the one on the left wall in the     |
    | middle of the first set of stairs.                                          |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will pass by a dead body in the middle of the stairs as they 
    head up the staircase.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Memo to Leon                                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the Stairway Corridor, after the characters climb the stairs, they will  |
    | begin to move down the corridor at the top.  Shoot the first light on the   |
    | left wall as the characters turn to the right to look down the hall.        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Claire and Leon will slowly move toward the opposite end of the hall after they 
    reach the top of the stairs.  Pick up the **FIRST AID SPRAY** at the end of the 
    hall and shoot the first statue bust near the end of the hall then collect the 
    --GOLD-- inside of it as the characters move down the hall.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - At the other end of the second floor hallway after the 
    characters move up the stairs.  This is in an area with statue busts.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters round the left corner at the end.  
    Shoot the statue near the next door and collect the **GRENADE PICKUP** that is 
    inside.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Shoot the large left statue at the end of the second floor 
    hall with the stairway and this will be inside.  This is in an area with statue 
    busts and near two slumped over bodies.  Two zombies will attack as the 
    characters step toward the statue.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will step by the two dead bodies on the floor then stare at the 
    door.  Press the Z button to open the door.  After pressing the Z button, the 
    characters will turn to the right as a [ZOMBIE] tries to attack.   No sneak 
    attacks from you, fool... this player has read Berserker's Darkside Chronicles 
    FAQ and will cap that ass!
    
    == HALLWAY OUTSIDE S.T.A.R.S. OFFICE ==
    
    The characters will enter the room then look down the hall to the left and 
    notice a girl.  The girl will stare toward Leon and Claire then turn around and 
    run.  The characters will chase after her, but their progress will be 
    interrupted as a [LICKER] busts through the window off to the right.  Blast the 
    Licker and the characters will continue to chase after the girl.  A sound of 
    glass shattering will make the characters turn back around as TWO [LICKERS] 
    bust through windows down the corridor that they just came from.  Toss a hand 
    grenade at the Lickers for extra kills since the characters will quickly turn 
    back around and continue to chase the girl.
    
    == BREAK ROOM ==
    
    As the characters open the door to the next room, the girl will be backing out 
    of corridor up ahead as a [ZOMBIE] moves toward her.  Blast the zombie for an 
    extra kill.  The girl will race down the corridor behind her.  Claire and Leon 
    will follow the girl.  Quickly grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** off to the left and 
    the **GREEN HERB** on top of the left locker** as the characters run down the 
    corridor.  The girl will move up under a hole in the boarded-up door at the 
    end.  The partner will break down the door so the characters can follow. (Now 
    why couldn't Claire or Leon had done that in the main game of Resident Evil 2?)
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - On top of a left locker above the shotgun ammo pickup as the 
    character rush down the corridor while following the girl.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - After Sherry backs away from the zombies in the Break Room, 
    she will rush down a corridor and the characters will follow after her.  This 
    pickup will be off to the left as the characters rush down the corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == HALLWAY WITH STAIRCASE ==
    
    Oh ho ho, missy, you don't escape that easy in a future Resident Evil game! 
    Terminatrix Claire is determined to save that ass from the threat of G!
    
    The characters will look off to the left and then the right and finally spot 
    the girl.  She will run down the staircase and the characters will quickly 
    follow, but their progress will be interrupted in a bit as the dead body in the 
    center of the stairs turns into a [ZOMBIE] and rises.  This zombie gets up 
    slowly, but it attacks fast, so be sure to go for a quick headshot here or just 
    blast it to kill it.
    
    The characters will continue down the stairs.  Blast the [ZOMBIE] that lurches 
    toward the girl then try to get headshots on the TWO [ZOMBIES] when the 
    characters turn to the left.  The characters will follow Sherry into the 
    hallway to the side.
    
    == BARRICADED HALLWAY ==
    
    Quickly blast the [ZOMBIE] that grabs the girl as the characters round the 
    corner off to the left at the boarded up window corridor.  The characters will 
    immediately turn to the left and THREE [ZOMBIES] will be moving toward them, 
    but the characters will eventually continue to follow the girl.  The girl will 
    fall to her knees as the characters round the next corner then get up and run 
    into the next room.  The characters will turn to the left as FOUR [ZOMBIES] 
    move toward them from the corridor that they just ran down.  Blast the zombies 
    quickly since the characters will eventually follow the girl through the door 
    at the end of the corridor.
    
    == BLOODY HALLWAY ==
    
    The characters will dash after the girl but a Licker will fall from a ceiling 
    ventilation shaft and your main character will trip over it and fall to the 
    ground.  Shoot the [LICKER] as your controlled character turns and gets back 
    up.  A [ZOMBIE] will bust through the window at the first turn.  This zombie 
    cannot be damaged until he fully stands up, and he will attack directly after 
    he stands, so be very precise and quick and if you're going for headshot or 
    just kill him off with several shots to any portion of the body.
    
    Footsteps of a creature will make the characters turn back around as a [LICKER] 
    steps out from around the corner of the corridor that the characters just came 
    from.  Blast him and the characters will follow the girl into the Reception 
    Room.
    
    == RECEPTION ROOM ==
    
    The characters will step around the side of the corridor in the next room.  
    Quickly blast the statue bust to the side of the double doors at the end of the 
    room and collect the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - When the characters reenter the Reception Room while 
    following the girl, blast the statue bust to the left of the double doors as 
    the characters look toward them to reveal this pickup.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A [LICKER] will bust through the reception window off to the left.  Kill him as 
    the characters back away.  This first Licker has a tendency to attack quickly, 
    so you might want to switch over to the submachine gun or shotgun to defeat 
    him.  ANOTHER [LICKER] will quickly bust through the second window off to the 
    right.  The characters will open the double doors and step back out into the 
    main hall of the RPD building.
    
    == MAIN HALL ==
    
    The characters will check on Marvin, but he appears to be dead.  They will turn 
    as TWO [ZOMBIES] try to attack from behind.  Be quick to kill the zombies since 
    they attack fast.  THREE [ZOMBIES] will be stepping out of the Reception room 
    as the character turn back toward it.  The zombie in the front of the group 
    attacks rather quickly, so be ready to stop him with a few shots.  The two in 
    the back make some easy headshot practice.  The characters will turn back 
    around and examine Marvin's body.
    
    Shortly after the controlled character turns toward the partner, Marvin will 
    get up and attack in his zombie state.  Don't even worry about a headshot, just 
    shoot him.  You can't get a headshot on him anyway since the cursor doesn't 
    blink on his forehead.  I'm sure Leon is sorry, Marvin.  He'll miss those 
    target practice sessions you two could have had together...
    
    |***************** Resident Evil 2 - Meeting with Chief Irons ****************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  3           [LC03] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                          "Everyone's going to die!"                         |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Devil (Easy), G Young Bodies (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: G Adult Body, Unicorn Medal
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Golden Cog
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 4
    Unlockable Files: Marvin Memo, Patrol Report, Brian Irons, The Umbrella 
    Corporation
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == MAIN HALL ==
    
    Claire and Leon start out in the main hall of the RPD building where they're 
    still searching for the little girl they were in pursuit of earlier.  They'll 
    both head toward the door on the right and open it then enter the reception 
    hall.
    
    == RECEPTION HALL ==
    
    The characters will head straight toward the double doors that lead to the 
    police office and enter it.
    
    == POLICE OFFICE ==
    
    This room has tons of breakable objects in it.  Shoot the various objects on 
    the tables and counters to gain extra gold.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Marvin's Memo                                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters first enter the Police Office, shoot the phone on the   |
    | desk off to the left as they look directly ahead to reveal this file.       |
    | Facing the desk, the phone is on the right corner.                          |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will look out the window to the left and see a few [ZOMBIES] 
    lurching by in the hall outside the room then suddenly turn back around as a 
    [ZOMBIE] tries to attack.  Be ready to shoot the single zombie directly after 
    the characters turn since he attacks quite fast.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will rise from 
    behind the desk to the left as the characters turn.
    
    The game will give the player two choices of slightly different paths to get 
    through this room now: "Break Through" or "Detour".  Shoot the pile of books 
    next to the small file cabinet on the right set of desks and collect the 
    --GOLD-- that is revealed.
    
      == BREAK THROUGH PATH ==
    
      Claire and Leon will move to the left and turn as FOUR [ZOMBIES] break 
      through the double doors behind them.  They will turn back around and TWO 
      [ZOMBIES] will attack from near the main office.  The characters will turn 
      back toward the four zombies then turn around and move toward the main 
      office.
    
      == DETOUR PATH ==
    
      Claire and Leon will move toward the other side of the set of desks off to 
      the right and toward the double doors as FOUR [ZOMBIES] break them down.  Try
      to go for critical headshots since they are very slow.  The characters will 
      turn and a [ZOMBIE] will be behind the desks with them and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] 
      will be crawling on the floor behind him.  As the characters look toward the
      other side of the desks, they will see TWO [ZOMBIES] right outside the main 
      office.  Collect the **GRENADE PICKUP** from off the left desk.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - If the Detour Path is chosen, this can be seen on the desk 
    to the left shortly before the characters hop over the desks.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
      The characters will get up on top of the desk then look back toward the 
      [ZOMBIES] behind them and then look toward the TWO [ZOMBIES] near the main 
      office.  The main office zombies will attack, so be ready to shoot them once
      the characters turn back toward them.
    
    **BOTH PATHS MEET HERE**
    
    Pick up the **GRENADE PICKUP**, **GREEN HERB** and **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** 
    inside of the main office as the characters look inside.  TWO [ZOMBIES} will 
    attack as the characters turn around then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE} will get up off the 
    floor as the characters fight the first two.  After stepping into the dark 
    hallway, the characters will open the door and head outside.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Inside the main office of the police office area.  
    The characters will look inside this room no matter which path is chosen once a 
    choice is given.
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Inside the main office of the police office area.  The 
    characters will look inside this room no matter which path is chosen once a 
    choice is given.
    [ ] Green Herb - Inside the main office of the police office area.  The 
    characters will look inside this room no matter which path is chosen once a 
    choice is given.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == OUTSIDE STAIRCASE ==
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** near the dead body and barrels as the characters 
    open the door and head outside.  Shoot some of the [CROWS] grouped around the 
    dead body before they fly off for some extra kills.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying near the metal barrels as the characters open the door 
    at the other end of the Police Office corridor.  There is a dead body with 
    crows gathered around it near this pickup.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A few [ZOMBIES] are lurching around the streets outside the RPD building.  Try 
    to get some critical headshots on them.  You'll need to aim over the fence, so 
    you'll have to basically hit their head anyway.
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** as the characters begin to climb the stairs.  
    Several [CROWS] will start to gather up above and the [ZOMBIES} on the streets 
    below will begin to move near the gate of the building.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying in the middle of the outside staircase as the characters 
    move to the second floor of the RPD building.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn to the right while at the top of the stairs as THREE 
    [CROWS] fly down to attack.
    
    == HALLWAY ==
    
    After scanning the hallway, the characters will move down the right side.  TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] will be around the corner up ahead as the characters turn to the 
    right.  The zombie in the front of this group will dash toward the characters, 
    so be prepared to shoot him as he runs toward the group.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Patrol Report                                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters face off against the two zombies in the second floor    |
    | hallway after rounding the first right corner, shoot the first light on the |
    | ceiling to reveal this file.  The characters will turn down this corridor   |
    | shortly after they see a picture on the left wall.                          |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Something will fall into the hallway up ahead as Claire notices a helicopter 
    outside.  The characters will move further down the hall to check it out.  As 
    they round the corner, the characters will see a strange figure with a bald 
    head kneeled down.  This creature is a T-103 Tyrant sent from Umbrella, but 
    we'll refer to him as "Mr. X" from now on.
    
    Mr. X will rise up off the ground from his kneeling position shortly before the 
    characters turn to the left and see TWO [ZOMBIES] in the corridor behind them. 
    The characters will turn back toward Mr. X then turn back toward the zombies.  
    Let's see, genetically engineered linebacker that will pulverize you with one 
    punch or two slow-moving undead T-carriers that can be easily dodged...?  The 
    characters will make the best choice and quickly move by the two zombies then 
    head back the way they came.
    
    Mr. X won't waste any time in following.  As the characters turn around, Mr. X 
    will slap aside the two zombies in his path and move toward Leon and Claire.  
    Shooting him now really does not good.  His weakness is his head, but he 
    doesn't need to be shot just yet.
    
    Eventually, your controlled characters will fall and a random button prompt 
    command (Z, B, or Z+B) will appear as Mr. X tries to hit your character with a 
    double-handed overhead. Press the buttons that appear to dodge the attack.
    
    The characters will move toward the door at the end of the hall then turn 
    around and watch as Mr. X approaches them.  This moment is when the characters 
    can actually damage him.  Aim for Mr. X's head as he walks toward the 
    characters and shoot him in the head with the handgun.  He will try to hit the 
    characters with a punch if he gets too close.  Shoot him in the head a few 
    times as he prepares the punch in order to cancel the attack.  If he hits your 
    characters once, he will try to punch them again.  He must kneel over from 
    receiving damage from several headshots to end the fight.  The characters will 
    step into the hall beyond the next door afterward.
    
    == HALLWAY WITH FIRE ==
    
    Collect the **SHOTGUN AMMO** at the other end of the hall as the characters 
    move down the corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying against the wall at the other end of the corridor once 
    the characters face off against Mr. X the first time.  This is in the hallway 
    with the burning helicopter.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Before long, the characters will move down the hall then turn back around as 
    Mr. X opens the door in the back of them and begins to walk toward them.  Aim 
    at his head with the handgun and shoot him in the head until he kneels down 
    once again.  He appears closer this time, so be more aggressive with your 
    shots.  Switch to the submachine gun if you need to.  He will attack the 
    characters with punches and overheads if he gets too close.
    
    The characters will move toward the other end of the hall.  They will be 
    stopped by a fire caused by a crashed helicopter.  Mr. X will wake up and 
    continue his pursuit as the characters turn, so shoot him in the head once 
    again to knock him out before he gets too close and starts attacking.  It would 
    really be best to use the submachine gun to damage him during the second fight 
    in the hallway since he is much closer.
    
    Claire and Leon will turn toward the flames again shortly.  They will look 
    toward the ceiling.  Shoot the metal sprinkler on the ceiling to make the 
    sprinkler turn on and extinguish the flames from the crashed helicopter.  If 
    you don't shoot the sprinkler quick enough, Mr. X will get back and attack 
    again.  He'll have to be stunned with headshots once again if he gets back up. 
    Shoot the overhead sprinkler above the flames and the characters will enter the 
    corridor that was previously blocked.
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** from the end of the corridor as the characters begin 
    to move down it.  They will open the door at the end of the hall.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - The characters will have to shoot a sprinkler to extinguish 
    some flames from a crashed helicopter.  This item will be at the end of the 
    hallway that was blocked by the flames.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == CHIEF IRON'S ROOM ==
    
    Shoot the [ZOMBIE] that grabs the little girl as she stands in between the 
    bookcases.  The characters will turn to the left and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack 
    them.  The zombie on the left is very aggressive so shoot him first.  The vase 
    on the small table on the back left portion of the room can be shot to reveal a 
    **FIRST AID SPRAY**.  Be sure to collect this.  You'll have another chance to 
    shoot the vase since the characters will look back toward the vase while 
    scanning the room over for the little girl.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> The Umbrella Corporation                             |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the pair of two zombies attack shortly after the characters enter the |
    | Chief's Room, shoot the phone on the desk when the characters turn toward   |
    | it to reveal this file.  Facing the desk, the phone is on the left side.    |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - When the characters first enter the Chief's Room, Sherry 
    will be attacked by a zombie.  Shoot the zombie off of here then the characters 
    will be attacked by two zombies from the left.  Shoot the vase in the back of 
    them to the left to reveal this item.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The girl will move out from behind the desk in the back of the room and your 
    controlled character will follow.  As the character step behind the bookcases a 
    [ZOMBIE] will step into view in between the bookcases.  The characters will 
    follow the little girl through the doorway in the back of the bookcases.  When 
    the characters enter the corridor, a [ZOMBIE] will be grappling Sherry, so 
    shoot it off.  Quickly pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** to the left and the 
    --GOLD-- to the right of the little girl.  The characters will turn back around 
    and a [ZOMBIE] will step through the doorway of the corridor.  Look to the 
    right and pick up the --GOLD-- on the ground after shooting the zombie.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This is lying to the left of the elevator door where 
    the characters finally meet up with Sherry in the back room of the Chief's 
    Room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will speak with Sherry then take the elevator down to the 
    basement.
    
    == BASEMENT CORRIDOR ==
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** on the floor as the characters step around the first 
    corner to the right.  They will eventually turn and a [LICKER] will hop onto 
    the wall.  The Licker will begin to attack once the characters turn around for 
    the second time.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Brian Irons (Normal mode)                            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters step out of the elevator in the basement corridor, they |
    | will round the corner to the right up ahead.  Shoot the back hanging light  |
    | as they look down the corridor to reveal this file.  Sherry will move under |
    | this light when the Licker attacks.                                         |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - After the characters step out of the elevator in the basement, 
    they will round the first corner and this will be on the floor near the end of 
    the corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    When your controlled character moves around the left corner past Sherry, shoot 
    the FOUR [G YOUNG BODIES] as they slither toward the characters and try to 
    attack.  Slash them with the knife if they cling onto the characters then shoot 
    them with the handgun when they hit the ground.  The characters will move 
    toward the door to the basement and open the door then a cutscene will play.
    
    == BASEMENT ==
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Boss: G Adult Body
    
    Weak Point: Head
    Major Weak Point: Giant Eyeball on left portion of back
    
    ---
    
    Attacks
    
    Big Arm Strike: G Adult holds its left arm back and then hits the characters 
    with its fist.  Aim toward the upper right portion of its body and shoot in 
    order to hit its eyeball on its body to cancel this attack when it is about to 
    hit.  Use the shotgun and time the shot to hit it right as it starts to swing - 
    the spread will hit its eyeball.
    
    Grab and Toss: G Adult grabs the characters and holds them below its head as 
    saliva drips on them.  Shoot its head while it drips saliva to cancel the 
    attack.  If the attack is not cancelled then G Adult will toss the characters 
    and damage them.  This attack is automatic.  The characters can't escape the 
    grab portion so cancel it quickly.
    
    Overhead Grab: G Adult holds up its big arm and tries to grab the characters.  
    A random dodge command will appear while it holds up its arms.  Input the dodge 
    command and the characters will move behind the G Adult where it's major weak 
    point (giant eyeball) is exposed.  If it grabs the characters, it will toss 
    them into the pit in the back of the room and damage them then send down three 
    or five G Young Bodies after them.
    
    G Young Bodies Spawn:  G Adult vomits three G Young Bodies.  The G Young Bodies 
    will slither toward the screen and attack.
    
    G Young Bodies Bite: While the characters are in the pit that they are tossed 
    into, G Young Bodies will hop down and try to bite them in mid-air.
    
    ---
    
    G Adult Body will start the battle by knocking the middle bed toward Claire and 
    Leon, so prepare to quickly input the random dodge command that appears in 
    order to make the characters move out of the way.
    
    -- SHOOT THE HEAD.
    
    G Adult's head is its main weakness until later into the battle.  It will start 
    out by trying to hit the characters with its big left arm.  Whenever it moves 
    its left arm back, aim at the top portion of its chest and fire your handgun or 
    submachine gun or time a shot to right before it swings with the shotgun.  The 
    shot has to hit it's eyeball on its side in order to cancel the attack.  It's 
    very hard to actually tell what you're hitting when you cancel the attack, but 
    you should see a short glimpse of the body eyeball as the attack is cancelled. 
    The shotgun is really the best way to cancel the attack because its spread will 
    hit the eyeball with little effort in aiming - just aim toward the chest near 
    the arm and fire right before it swings.
    
    -- INTO THE PIT WITH YOU!
    
    G Adult will grab the characters after the first attack.  Shoot G Adult 
    directly in the head while it holds the characters.  G Adult will toss the 
    characters into a nearby pit.  As the characters start to recover and examine 
    their surroundings, G Young Bodies will hop down and try to bite the characters 
    once they look up.  These can all be defeated with one handgun shot.  The best 
    way to shoot them is to wait for them fall and blast them one at a time right 
    before they hit your characters.  Don't fire rapidly, just get a rhythm going 
    to where you shoot each one right before it falls on the characters.  It's 
    rather easy once you get the hang of it.  Only three or five will fall.
    
    -- BLAAARRRRRG!
    
    The characters will climb out of the pit and face the G Adult.  The G Adult 
    will begin to vomit G Young Bodies.  It will release three G Young Bodies.  The 
    G Young Bodies will spread apart and move toward the characters.  Try to shoot 
    each of them with one handgun shot before they get too close and leap at the 
    characters.  If they cling on to the characters, use the knife to slash them 
    off.
    
    -- FINDING ITS MAJOR WEAKNESS
    
    G Adult will go back to it normal attack of trying to hit the characters with 
    its left arm.  Eventually it will hold up its right arm.  A random dodge 
    command (Z, B, or Z+B) will appear so that the characters can dodge its 
    overhead grab.  The characters will step behind the G Adult and its major 
    weakness will be in plain view - the eyeball on the side of its body.  Take out 
    the shotgun and fire at the eyeball or shoot the eyeball with any other weapon. 
    Any shots delivered to the chest eyeball will severely damage the G Adult 
    badly.
    
    If the grab connects then the G Adult will grapple the characters and toss them 
    back into the pit, only this time the fall will damage the characters.  It will 
    once again send G Young Bodies into the pit after them.
    
    -- ANOTHER GRAB
    
    G Adult will perform its big arm strike, overhead pound and grab the characters 
    throughout the rest of the battle.  The grab without a button prompt command is 
    unavoidable, so whenever it grabs a character, blast its head as it drips 
    saliva all over the characters and it will release its grip on them.
    
    The only real problem you might have with this battle is canceling its left arm 
    strike.  The body eyeball must be hit as it starts to swing and it's kind of 
    hard to hit at times since the eyeball doesn't come into view until right 
    before the attack connects.  Aim for the right body portion and fire rapidly 
    with the handgun or submachine gun and or fire one shot with the shotgun right 
    before the swing and you'll most likely hit the eyeball in time to cancel the 
    attack.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |******************** Resident Evil 2 - A Mysterious Woman *******************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  4           [LC04] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                                 "Ada, wait!"                                |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: The Woman (Easy), The Fall (Easy), Girl Fight 
    (Easy), Giant Spiders (Normal), Little Spiders (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: First Form G, Manhole Opener
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Knight Plug
    
    Unlockable Weapon: Magnum
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 5
    Unlockable Files: Ben Bertulucci, Ben Bertulucci's Expose, Operation Report 2, 
    Sewer Manager's Diary 1
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == GARAGE ==
    
    Claire and Leon start out in the basement garage of the RPD building.  Pick up 
    the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from off the ground as the two characters look to 
    the left while searching for Sherry.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This is lying on the ground to the left when the 
    characters first start out in the Garage.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After the characters look toward the left car, they will turn back around and 
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack from off to the right.  Your partner will stand 
    near your controlled character and help to blast them.  The characters will 
    turn around and ONE [ZOMBIE] will be crawling out from under a car.  This 
    zombies attacks while on the ground and he attacks rather quickly, so be 
    prepared to blast him fast after the characters turn.
    
    A gunshot will be heard somewhere nearby and two zombie dogs will run to the 
    right as the characters look ahead.  A cutscene will play.
    
    Dear god, Leon's shot from the cutscene has caused a blood droplet to fall on 
    Ms. Perfection's shoe. The characters will talk with the mysterious woman 
    afterward.  Her name is Ada Wong and she's searching for a man named Ben 
    Bertulocci.  Ben supposedly has some information about the incident that has 
    occurred in Raccoon City.
    
    The characters will follow Ada as she walks toward the nearby door.  She will 
    call their attention to sudden danger and the characters will turn as THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] attack.  Try to get a critical headshot on the two zombies in the 
    back of the group since they shuffle slowly.
    
    == CELL CORRIDOR ==
    
    The characters will follow Ada as she moves into the corridor beyond the nearby 
    door and continue to speak with her as she tries to ignore them.  A [LICKER] 
    will jump out from the right corner up ahead and attack.  Be quick to shoot it 
    since it will attack rather quickly - use the submachine gun to fire at it..  
    After another conversation with Ada, cries for help will be heard down the 
    corridor up ahead.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Ben Bertolucci (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters step around the right corner in the Cell Corridor,      |
    | shoot the light above the door to the right as Ben screams, "No! Get away   |
    | from me!" from the cell area ahead to reveal this file.                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    A big hulking creature will walk by after Ben's screams are head.  The 
    characters will hide as it leaves through a nearby door.  The characters will 
    move down the hall afterwards and head to the cell area.  Pick up the --GOLD-- 
    on the small table at the end of the hall as the characters move toward the 
    cell area.
    
    == CELL AREA ==
    
    Collect the **GREEN HERB** near the bed and the --GOLD-- on the bed in the 
    first cell with dead bodies as the characters look into the first cell while 
    stepping into the room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Ben Burtolucci's Expose                              |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters first enter the area with the two cells or as they walk |
    | toward the second cell, shoot the overhead light outside of the second      |
    | cell to reveal this file.  When the characters first enter the cell area,   |
    | this light will be in the very back.                                        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - When the characters enter the area with the cells, they will 
    look inside the first cell while headed toward the back cell.  This item is on 
    the floor beside the bed.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will find Ben's mutilated body in the last cell along with some 
    writing on the wall.  It seems that the sewer will help them reach an escape 
    route.  Ada will leave them and continue with her own goals.  The characters 
    will leave the cell area to gain access to the sewers and find Ada.
    
    They will notice that the two bodies that were in the first cell are now gone 
    as they leave.  Directly after noticing that the bodies are gone, TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    will attack from the corridor outside.  The first on the left will grab your 
    character, so shake the nunchuk to knock it off.  Try to get a critical 
    headshot on the second zombie as it raises up.
    
    == CELL CORRIDOR ==
    
    A [LICKER] will be crawling along the right wall in the corridor then it will 
    hop over to the left wall and attack.  Blast it in the head after it hops over 
    to the left wall.  A second [LICKER] will move along the right wall and attack.
    
    As the characters move toward the door to the kennel in the middle of the 
    corridor, they will turn to the right and THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack.  The 
    first zombie attacks quickly and the third zombie that moves out from the left 
    corner will dash toward the characters.  The dashing zombie needs to be hit 
    quickly to avoid his attack.  The characters will step into the kennel 
    afterwards.
    
    == KENNEL ==
    
    Pick up the **FIRST AID SPRAY** off the small table as the characters look into 
    the room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Operation Report 2                                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters look into the kennel area from the Cell Corridor, shoot |
    | the overhead light to the right to reveal this file.  This light is to the  |
    | right of a first aid spray pickup.  Only half of it can be seen around the  |
    | side of the right corner.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will sprint into the room.  Collect the **SHOTGUN AMMO** and --
    GOLD-- from the shelves off to the left as they round the corner up ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on the small table as the characters look into the 
    kennel after an attack by three zombies in the cell corridor - this is after 
    they leave the cell area and are headed for the sewers.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - On one of the shelves across from the corridor with the 
    cells in the kennel.  There is a gold pickup near this.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Ah, the ole' tense feeling of when the caged zombies dogs will attack.  Haha! 
    Well, they won't attack yet.  A [ZOMBIE] will be grappling your partner as your 
    controlled character turns after looking at the cages, so blast it off the 
    partner.  A [ZOMBIE] will attack as your characters turn back around then THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] will shuffle toward the characters from behind as the characters back 
    toward the cages with the dogs.
    
    The characters will look inside one of the cages at the zombie dog inside. It 
    can't be hit while it remains in the cage, but as the characters back away, the 
    [ZOMBIE DOG] will bust the cage door down and the other [ZOMBIE DOG] will bust 
    its door down as well then they will both attack.  Shoot them in the head with 
    the handgun and they will fall quickly.
    
    After the usual gender talk about females that macho Leon now engages in ever 
    since RE4 (wait... that's in the future...), Leon and Claire will move down the 
    ladder and step into the sewer tunnel below.
    
    == SEWER TUNNEL ==
    
    TWO [GIANT SPIDERS] will be on the two sidewalls as the characters round the 
    first corner.  Shoot them in the mouth area with the submachine gun or blast 
    them with the shotgun and they will fall very quickly.  
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Sewer Manager's Diary 1                              |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the second overhead light in back of the tunnel as the characters     |
    | look down the sewer tunnel after defeating the first pair of Giant Spiders  |
    | to reveal this file.                                                        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will move down the sewer tunnel ahead and then turn as TWO MORE 
    [GIANT SPIDERS] crawl along the walls behind them.  Shoot them quickly since 
    the characters will turn back around and run down the tunnel shortly.
    
    Shoot the [GIANT SPIDER] on the right wall as the characters round the next 
    corner.  SEVERAL [SMALL SPIDERS] are grouped on the right wall and will hop off 
    and attack, so slash the knife at them to hit them as they jump toward the 
    characters.  They can be shot while they are grouped on the wall as well.  A 
    [ZOMBIE] will get up out of the water up ahead and move toward the characters.
    
    After turning back to the tunnel that they came from TWO MORE [GIANT SPIDERS] 
    will be on the sidewalls.  Kill them and the characters will turn back toward 
    the zombie and ANOTHER [GIANT SPIDER} will be on the right wall where the small 
    spiders are.  ONE MORE [ZOMBIE] will get up from the water as the characters 
    finish off the first zombie.
    
    The characters will move toward the stairs up ahead.  A group of SEVERAL [SMALL 
    SPIDERS] will be crawling along the right wall near the stairs, so be ready to 
    knife slash them as they hop onto the characters.  Blast the stragglers as the 
    characters move by them.  The characters will enter the corridor at the top of 
    the stairs.
    
    == SEWER CORRIDOR ==
    
    Collect the **GREEN HERB** from off the ground near the left door as the 
    characters enter the corridor ahead.  After looking toward the door to the 
    left, FOUR [ZOMBIES] will rush out from behind the right corner up ahead.  Your 
    partner will keep them back with knife slashes but shoot them quickly since 
    your partner is not always reliable here.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - This is lying beside the left door in the sewer corridor as 
    the characters exit the sewer tunnel full of spiders.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    As some rustling is heard, a GROUP of [G YOUNG BODIES] will attack as the 
    characters turn back toward the sewer tunnel doorway.  Shortly afterward, the 
    characters will turn as ANOTHER GROUP of [G YOUNG BODIES] attack.  Use the 
    knife to slash them when they hop onto the characters.  Just because you knock 
    them off with a knife slash doesn't always mean that they are dead, so shoot 
    the group with the handgun after knife slashing them off.  If you shoot quickly 
    enough with the handgun, both groups can basically be shot with the handgun as 
    they hop toward the characters.
    
    A sound will be heard from up ahead and the characters will move forward to 
    check it out.  Ada will speak to the characters from the other side of a 
    ventilation duct to the right up ahead.  She will toss them some **MAGNUM 
    AMMO** through the duct, so be sure to collect it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - Ada will toss this through the ventilation duct in the sewer 
    corridor while the characters speak with her as she stand on the other side.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Leon will hide his affection for Ada by mentioning that the group needs to find 
    Sherry shortly before the characters turn to the left as a GROUP of [G YOUNG 
    BODIES] attack.  The characters will step through the nearby door and enter the 
    next room.
    
    == WATER TANK ROOM ==
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Boss: William Birkin - First Form G
    
    Weak Point: Head
    Major Weak Point: Giant eyeball on right shoulder
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Pipe Swing: William will hold his right arm back and then swing forward with a 
    metal pipe.  Shoot the eyeball on his right arm or shoot his head to cancel 
    this attack.  This is his main attack.
    
    Overhead Pipe Swing: William will yell then hold his right arm back to where 
    the shoulder eye cannot be seen then perform an overhead swing.  This attack 
    must be escaped through a dodge command.
    
    ON THE WATER TANK:
    
    Water Tank Strike: William will hit the water tank that the characters stand on 
    twice.  This attack takes no damage.  It can be cancelled by shooting him in 
    the right shoulder eye or in the head right as he swings.
    
    Thrust: William will hold his arm back to where only his head weak point is 
    exposed then thrust his pipe forward.  Shoot his head while he prepares this 
    attack and you'll be shooting his shoulder eye in order to cancel the attack 
    right before the attack connects.
    
    AT THE END OF THE BATTLE:
    
    Grab: William will grapple the characters and hold them up into the air.  Blast 
    his right shoulder eye or head to make him drop the characters.
    
    Pipe Swing: William will stand above the characters while they are hanging onto 
    the side of the bridge then swing his pipe down at them.  Shoot his right 
    shoulder eye or his head right before the attack connects in order to cancel 
    this attack.
    ---
    
    As the characters enter the room, they will be confronted by William Birkin in 
    the first form of his G-virus mutation.  Birkin will be holding a metal pipe 
    and he will take a swing at the characters, but the characters will dodge his 
    attack and move behind him.
    
    -- WILLIAM'S WEAK POINTS
    
    William will eventually turn and face the characters.  He has two weak points. 
    The eyeball on his upper right shoulder and his head can be shot to damage him. 
    Both of these areas can be shot to cancel any of his attacks as well.  It's 
    best to shoot his shoulder eyeball since it's a slightly bigger target.
    
    -- WILLIAM ATTACKS
    
    Eventually, William will hold his right arm back and prepare to swing his metal 
    pipe at the characters.  Shoot either his head or his right shoulder eyeball to 
    cancel this attack.  Sometimes the timing can be a bit tough.  If he hits the 
    characters the first time, he will swing again the other way, so shoot his 
    right arm at that point to cancel his second swing.
    
    William will eventually hold his right arm back so far that his shoulder eye 
    will not be in view before his swing.  Prepare to press the on-screen dodge 
    command (Z, B, Z+B) in order to escape this attack.  The characters will step 
    onto the bridge behind William.  William will turn to face them once again.
    
    -- ON THE BRIDGE
    
    William will perform a few more of his pipes swings so prepare to shoot him in 
    the head or his right shoulder eye to cancel the attacks.  He will eventually 
    swing his pipe as he moves toward the characters then perform a quick overhead 
    swing right as he steps in front of them.  Quickly shoot his chest eyeball or 
    his head to cancel the attack right before the overhead swing.
    
    He will go back to doing his normal pipe swings after moving closer to the 
    characters.  The characters will turn to the right and try to open the door, 
    but it's locked.  No plugs this time, Leon.  As they turn back toward Birkin, 
    he will be preparing an overhead swing, so quickly input the dodge command that 
    appears to dodge his swing.  The characters will hop up onto the nearby water 
    tank.
    
    -- ON THE WATER TANK
    
    William will perform three types of attacks while the characters stand on the 
    water tank.  He will constantly hit the water tank with his metal pipe - this 
    does not take damage.  He will sometimes thrust his metal pipe forward to hit 
    the characters.  The first two attacks can be cancelled by shooting Birkin in 
    his right shoulder eye or his head - it's best to shoot him in the head to 
    cancel his thrust since you'll be hitting him in the eye if aiming at the head 
    right before attack connects.
    
    Birkin will eventually toss his metal pipe at the characters and a dodge 
    command will appear to dodge the attack.  He will quickly reach and grab a 
    piece of the railing to get another metal pipe however.
    
    -- PUTTING AN END TO IT
    
    When Birkin has only 25% life remaining, the characters will hop off the 
    platform and face Birkin.  Birkin will toss his pipe at the characters, so 
    prepare to input the on-screen command in order to dodge it.  He will grab the 
    characters with his right arm and hold them over the side of the bridge.  Blast 
    his right shoulder eye while he holds the characters or shoot him in his head 
    with the shotgun.  All of his life can be drained easily while he holds the 
    characters, but the fight will not end yet.
    
    Birkin will release the characters and they will hang onto the side of the 
    bridge.  Birkin will move toward the side of the bridge then swing at the 
    characters with a metal pipe.  Shoot his head or right shoulder eyeball during 
    mid-swing in order to cancel the attack and knock him away from the edge.  The 
    characters will climb back up onto the bridge.
    
    Birkin will return to his normal pipe swing attacks.  Cancel his attack one 
    time by shooting him in head or right shoulder eye just before the attack 
    connects and this will end the battle.  Birkin will fall over the edge of the 
    bridge.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on some boxes to the right of the entrance 
    doorway.  The characters will face this when they first enter and it can be 
    collected near the beginning.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - This is lying on some boxes along the opposite side of the 
    room from which the characters enter from.  Grab this whenever the characters 
    are about to hop onto one of the water tanks.
    [ ] Green Herb - This is on the other side of the bridge.  It can be seen off 
    to the left while the characters stand on the water tank.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |*********************** Resident Evil 2 - The G-virus ***********************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  5           [LC05] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                                  "G-virus?"                                 |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Paths Cross (Easy), From the Beginning (Easy), 
    Large Roach (Normal), Lurker (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Picture (Sherry's Family), Alligator
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Wolf Medal
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 6
    Unlockable Files: Sewer Manager's Diary 2, Hunk, Sewer Manager's Fax, 
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == SEWER TUNNEL 1 ==
    
    Claire and Leon will have their flashlights on as they walk through the dark 
    sewer tunnel.  The Wii remote controls the flashlight that the characters hold 
    for this portion of the sewers.  The area can get quite dark and the lighting 
    can make the enemies very difficult to see at times and it's hard to tell when 
    an enemy is about to attack because you have little visibility.  Be on your 
    guard and shoot fast when an enemy appears in view.  Don't worry as much about 
    critical headshots on zombies while in this dark area.
    
    NOTE: This is the first true chapter where the difficulty can get rough.  
    Enemies will now dash at the player more often and they will attack quickly, so 
    it's not always wise to use only a handgun for the most part now.  It's good to 
    have a submachine gun ready for this chapter for rapid fire on groups or 
    constant fire on one enemy to dispose of an enemy quickly.
    
    After the characters look toward the tunnel to the left, THREE [ZOMBIES] will 
    move toward them from the area up ahead.  The two in front dash toward the 
    characters, so be ready to fire quickly.  A new frog enemy - a [LURKER] - will 
    emerge from the water off to the left.  Shoot at its head with the handgun or 
    submachine gun to kill it quickly.  These enemies attack very quickly with 
    tongue strikes, so always defeat them quick when they appear.  When fighting 
    them in groups, it's best to kill them with the submachine gun.  They're much 
    like Hunter Gammas that attack with tongues
    
    The characters will continue down the tunnel.  Your controlled character will 
    stand by the next corner then hop out and secure the area, but nothing is down 
    that tunnel.  The characters will continue ahead then hear some sounds from 
    behind them.  When they turn, DOZENS of [GIANT SPIDERS] will be climbing on the 
    wall behind them.  Shoot a few of them for some extra kills.  The characters 
    will turn and run from them.
    
    TWO [LURKERS] will block the path ahead, so the characters will rush down the 
    right tunnel, but they will arrive at a dead end.  When they turn, arm the 
    submachine gun and blast the TWO [LURKERS] that are in the water to avoid 
    taking damage from them.
    
    The characters will turn to the left while exiting the dead end tunnel and see 
    SEVERAL [GIANT SPIDERS] on the sidewalls behind them. They will turn around and 
    move down the tunnel behind them.  Grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** from the side of 
    the waterway on the left and the **GREEN HERB** from the side of the waterway 
    on the right while the characters stand in front of the overhead bridge.  THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] will fall from the bridge.  As they get up, try for some quick 
    critical headshots, but don't try too much, since some of them will dash toward 
    your characters -  killing them quickly is more important.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - As the characters reach the overhead catwalk bridge in the 
    dark tunnel, this will be off to the left of the waterway.  Three zombies will 
    fall from the catwalk bridge.
    [ ] Green Herb - As the characters reach the overhead catwalk bridge in the 
    dark tunnel, this will be off to the right side of the waterway.  Three zombies 
    will fall from the catwalk bridge.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will look up toward the catwalk bridge up above them as they 
    pass underneath it.  [ZOMBIES] can be seen as they walk across the bridge and 
    they can be shot for extra kills.  TWO [GIANT SPIDERS] crawl on the right wall 
    of the tunnel ahead and a [LURKER] will emerge from the water to the left 
    shortly after the spiders are killed.  Pick up the --GOLD-- that can be seen 
    along the side of the waterway up ahead.
    
    The characters will look into a tunnel off to the right and see TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    but their attention will be quickly focused on the TWO [LURKERS] that emerge 
    from the water up ahead as they turn back to the left.  Take out the submachine 
    gun and blast the zombies as the characters turn back to the right then quickly 
    shoot the Lurkers as the characters turn back to the left.  The Lurkers attack 
    very quickly, so you have to be ready for them.  The characters will find a 
    ladder toward the end of the tunnel and climb it.
    
    == AIR DUCT ==
    
    A rotating fan will block the way ahead once the characters step into the air 
    duct above.  The characters will look above and see some [LARGE ROACHES] move 
    through the vent up above.  Slash the knife to kill the roaches as they try to 
    bite the characters.  There are several of them in a group.  The groups can be 
    shot with the handgun also or you can just toss a grenade and really rack up on 
    kills here.  Shoot the rotating fan until it is destroyed to continue further 
    ahead. Your controlled character will get attacked by more [LARGE ROACHES] 
    while the characters climb down the ladder and he/she will get knocked down the 
    ladder and land in the water below.
    
    == SEWER TUNNEL 2 ==
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will shuffle toward the characters as they turn to the left. 
    The characters will turn quickly as THREE MORE [ZOMBIES] attack as the 
    characters turn around.  One of the zombies will rush the characters, so be 
    ready to shoot him quickly when he tries.  After finishing the three zombies, 
    the characters will turn as THREE [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  The characters 
    will look down the tunnel to the left and see SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] as they back 
    further down the tunnel.
    
    Claire and Leon will turn and run down the waterway then step up onto the 
    walkway at the end of the tunnel.  Grab the --GOLD-- in the distance before the 
    characters turn to the left.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** and the 
    **FIRST AID SPRAY** from the back of the corridor as the characters move down 
    the next corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - In the back of the corridor off to the left after the 
    characters run from the hordes of zombies after exiting the first air duct.
    [ ] First Aid Spray - In the back of the corridor off to the left after the 
    characters run from the hordes of zombies after exiting the first air duct.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will enter a dry waterway with several bodies slumped over 
    against the sides as they turn to the right further down the corridor.  Like 
    clockwork the FOUR [ZOMBIES] will rise and then the characters will turn as 
    MORE [ZOMBIES] move toward them from the back.  The characters will quickly 
    move up the ladder to the right but TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from the right as 
    the characters step onto the catwalk up above.  The characters will quickly hop 
    off the other end of the catwalk.
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be behind the characters as they turn.  Toss a hand 
    grenade here for some extra kills since the characters will quickly turn and 
    haul ass down the dark tunnel behind them.  Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** as the 
    characters run down the tunnel.  A [GIANT SPIDER] will drop from the ceiling so 
    be prepared to shoot him with the handgun.  SEVERAL [SMALL SPIDERS] will group 
    near the dead giant spider after it is killed.  The characters will climb the 
    nearby ladder afterwards.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - This will be lying at the end of the dark tunnel full of 
    zombies.  It can be seen as the characters enter the tunnel and it can be 
    grabbed more easily after the characters hop off the overhead catwalk bridge 
    and run toward it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == AIR DUCT 2 ==
    
    Ugh, I cannot stand that clattering sound of insects and I bet Claire feels the 
    same way, since the characters will move by a SWARM of [LARGE ROACHES].  The 
    roaches will eventually attack, so use the knife to slash at them.  They attack 
    once the characters move toward the middle of the tunnel.  The characters will 
    move down the ladder on the opposite side afterwards.  The controlled 
    characters will go first this time.
    
    == SEWER CORRIDOR ==
    
    The characters will open the door off to the left after climbing down the 
    ladder then continue down the tunnel ahead.  [MR. X] will drop from above at 
    the intersection up ahead and block the way.  Don't worry about blasting him 
    just yet since the characters will turn and run then shut the metal door.  Oh 
    ho ho, doors will not stop Mr. X though.  He will knock that sucker to the side 
    then continue to walk toward the characters.
    
    Start blasting him in the head with a weapon before he gets too close.  Once he 
    kneels down, the character will turn and run then open the door at the other 
    end and continue into the lit up area ahead.  THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up out 
    of the water at the intersection further ahead.
    
    After taking a look down the corridor directly ahead, the characters will spot 
    Sherry off to the right as she climbs up onto a walkway near a waterfall.  The 
    characters will rush toward Sherry but a SWARM of [SMALL SPIDERS] will crawl 
    out of pipe along the left wall and attack.  Slash at them with the knife.  A 
    [LURKER] will emerge from the water in front of the waterfall, so be ready to 
    blast him.  The characters will step up onto the walkway then move through the 
    open doors.
    
    == WATER CONTROL ROOM ==
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** from off to the left and the --GOLD-- and **GREEN 
    HERB** from the other side of the bridge to the right as the characters survey 
    the room.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - This is lying off to the left as the characters enter the 
    water control room.
    [ ] Green Herb - This is lying across the bridge to the right as the characters 
    enter the water control room.  There is a gold pickup near it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Arm the submachine gun.  As the characters try to cross the bridge, TWO 
    [LURKERS] will hop onto the bridge and attack.  Blast them and the characters 
    will look up toward a [LURKER] on a high ledge to the right then turn and stare 
    at the water to the right as TWO [LURKERS] emerge from the water.  The two 
    Lurkers in the water attack very fast, so be sure to shoot them both quickly.  
    The characters will cross the bridge and then a woman will hold them at 
    gunpoint from behind.  A cutscene will trigger after the conversation.
    
    == DRAINAGE TUNNEL ==
    
    Be ready to shoot the [ZOMBIE] that grapples Sherry as the characters round the 
    corner to the left.  Collect the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** near the crates to the 
    right.  Your controlled character will turn around after freeing Sherry and a 
    [ZOMBIE] will be grappling your partner, so shoot it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying near the right stack of crates as the 
    characters first catch up with Sherry in the Drainage Tunnel.  Sherry will be 
    grappled by a zombie.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Sherry will scream then run further into the tunnel.  The characters will 
    follow her and catch up with her.  A loud rumbling sound will be heard as 
    something struggles to get through the tunnel further ahead.  A giant alligator 
    will bust through the barred gate that blocks the tunnel up ahead.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Boss: Giant Alligator
    
    Weak Point: Mouth
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Debris Fall: The alligator will violently bang its head against the sidewalls 
    and make debris rain down from the ceiling.  This will not hurt the characters, 
    but it will cause a reduction in visibility.
    
    Bite: The alligator will shake its head and roar then move toward the 
    characters with its mouth open and bite them.  Shoot the inside of his mouth to 
    cancel this attack.  He often performs this attack after making debris fall 
    from the ceiling.
    
    Head Ram: Once he chases the characters back to the beginning of the tunnel, 
    the alligator will back up then dash toward the characters.  A random button 
    dodge command will appear in order to avoid this attack.  The characters will 
    hop onto the alligator's head then run over his back.
    
    Corner Bite: After the characters dash over the alligator's head, they will 
    round the nearby corner then stand back and look toward the area where the 
    alligator is.  He will not follow at first, so the characters will peak around 
    the corner then the alligator will dash toward them with its mouth open and 
    bite them.  Shoot his mouth directly after the characters peak around the 
    corner to stop the attack.  You need to have a submachine gun equipped to fire 
    and react quickly when he charges the characters.
    
    Head Ram and Bite: After the characters are chased back to the area where the 
    alligator first appeared, the alligator will eventually perform his head ram 
    and a dodge command will appear.  When the characters step to the RIGHT side to 
    dodge his attack, the alligator will turn his head toward the characters then 
    open its mouth and try to bite them.  Blast the alligator in the mouth quickly 
    to cancel this attack.
    
    The alligator will perform a head ram throughout the ending portion of the 
    battle but he will only try to bite the characters when they step to the right 
    side of him.  If they step to the left side then he will not even turn his 
    head.
    
    Canister Toss: Once the alligator has a canister in its mouth, it will 
    eventually toss the canister at the characters if the canister remains in its 
    mouth for too long.  Blast the canister as it travels toward the characters to 
    make it explode in mid-air to avoid taking damage.
    ---
    
    -- ROUND 1
    
    The alligator will bang the sides of the wall with his head and cause debris 
    and smoke to fall from the ceiling.  This will reduce the visibility for the 
    player.  This battle can be tough mainly because of the lack of visibility and 
    shaky camera at times.
    
    The alligator will perform his bite attack once the visibility has been lowered 
    after banging his head against the sidewalls, so prepare to shoot the inside of 
    his mouth with the submachine gun as he moves toward the characters with his 
    jaws open and this will cancel the attack.
    
    The alligator will spend the rest of his time roaring and performing his bite 
    attack.  He will usually roar twice then roar again and perform his bite attack 
    immediately afterward.  He will bang his head against the sidewalls every so 
    often then perform his bite attack as the debris starts to clear.
    
    If you have enough shotgun ammo, all you really have to do for the first part 
    of this fight is to simply arm the shotgun then blast the alligator in the 
    mouth every time he opens his mouth.  This will damage him a bunch and it will 
    guarantee that you cancel his possible bite attack.  DO NOT reload more than 
    one or two shotgun shells in front of him or he will likely hit the characters 
    during the reload animation - switch to the submachine gun instead of reloading 
    if you have to.
    
    Once the alligator only has 50% life left, the pipe on the ceiling will begin 
    to spew gas near the valve handle.  Aim your handgun at the ceiling and shoot 
    the valve handle when the characters look up at it.  The pipe will spray out 
    flames and burn the alligator then drain the rest of his life.
    
    -- ROUND 2
    
    The characters will walk toward the burning alligator to examine it.  The 
    flames will extinguish and the alligator will start to move again.  The 
    characters will back off as the alligator chases them back to the beginning of 
    the drainage tunnel.  The alligator will break all the wooden boxes in the 
    area.  Collect the **GREEN HERB** from off to the left after the alligator 
    breaks the boxes.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Sewer Manager's Diary 2                              |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the tunnel, it   |
    | will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file will be   |
    | on the left.                                                                |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Hunk (Normal mode)                                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the tunnel, it   |
    | will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file will be   |
    | on the back right.                                                          |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Sewer Manager's Fax                                  |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the tunnel, it   |
    | will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file will be   |
    | on the front right.                                                         |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Once the alligator breaks the boxes after chasing the 
    characters back to the beginning of the drainage tunnel, this will be lying off 
    to the left while the characters face the alligator.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The alligator will try to bite the characters a few times with his usual bite 
    attacks, so blast him in the mouth to cancel his attacks.  Eventually, the 
    alligator will back up and dash forward then try to ram the characters.  Press 
    the on-screen dodge command in order to escape the attack.  The characters will 
    run over the top of the alligator and move to the other side of him.
    
    The characters will run around the corner then look back.  The alligator will 
    not follow and no sound can be heard from his area, so the characters will move 
    toward the corner and look around.  Be sure to arm the submachine gun since the 
    alligator will immediately move toward the characters with its mouth open and 
    try to bite them when they look around the corner.  Blast him in the mouth with 
    the submachine gun to cancel his bite.
    
    The alligator will go back to his normal bite attack and he will also try to 
    ram the characters with his head now, so prepare to input the dodge command 
    that appears in order to dodge the attack.  Directly after the characters dodge 
    the attack, the alligator will open its mouth and try to bite them, so be 
    prepare to blast his mouth to cancel the attack.
    
    -- TIME TO FINISH THIS!
    
    The characters will eventually notice the canisters along the side of the 
    tunnel.  When the camera zooms in on the canister to the right, shoot the chain 
    that holds the canister in place.  If you fail to shoot the chain once the 
    camera zooms back out, be prepared to shoot the alligator's mouth to dodge his 
    bite attack, then go back to shooting at the canister chain.  The canister will 
    fall to the ground once the chain is broken and the alligator will bite the 
    canister then hold the canister in its mouth.  Shoot the canister in the 
    alligator's mouth to end the battle.
    
    It all sounds easy, but the alligator will sometimes wave its head and try to 
    ram the characters while the canister remains in its mouth.  If the canister is 
    left in the alligator's mouth for too long, the alligator will fling the 
    canister at the characters.  Blast the canister while it flies toward the 
    characters to avoid damage.  You'll need to shoot the chains of the canister on 
    the left to release another canister if the first canister is not shot while it 
    is in the alligator's mouth.  There are a total of six canisters altogether.  
    If the player fails to shoot all six canisters then the alligator's life must 
    be drained through normal gunfire in order to end the battle.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |********************* Resident Evil 2 - Sherry's Sickness *******************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  6           [LC06] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |            "Just another one of Umbrella's failed experiments..."           |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Promise (Easy), Hesitation (Easy), Death Match 
    (Easy), Ivy (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Tyrant T-103, Picture (Ada and Jon)
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Power Room Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 7
    Unlockable Files: Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 1 (Hard Mode), G-virus, 
    Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 2 (Hard Mode), Sherry Birkin, United States 
    Federal Police Department Internal Investigations Report, Ada Wong
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == UNDERGROUND ELEVATOR: BOTTOM ==
    
    After a discussion about the vaccine for Sherry, the characters will turn to 
    the right and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will be approaching them from the corridor to the 
    right.  All of them are rather slow so try for some critical headshots.  Grab 
    the **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the left side of the floor in the back of the zombies.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> G-virus                                              |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters turn to the right to face the group of four zombies at  |
    | the beginning of this chapter, shoot the first light on the ceiling to      |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - When the first group of four zombies attack at the beginning 
    of this chapter, the shotgun ammo will be behind them and to the left.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will eventually turn back around toward the elevator and THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] will be behind them.  The one on the left with the lab coat runs very 
    fast, so shoot him first.  Mr. X will drop from the ceiling off to the 
    characters' left.  The characters will turn as a zombie tries to grab them then 
    run to the nearby sliding door.  Mr. X will shove the zombie aside then follow 
    the characters.
    
    == CENTRAL CATWALK AREA ==
    
    As the characters turn back toward Mr. X, once they reach the middle of the 
    catwalk area, prepare to press a button command to dodge Mr. X as he attempts 
    to shoulder ram the characters.  Pick up the --GOLD-- as the characters move 
    out of the middle area and toward the door to the left then quickly grab the 
    **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from the middle area when the characters turn back 
    around.  Mr. X will appear to the right of the characters and try to hit them 
    overhead with both of his fists.  Quickly input the dodge command that appears 
    and the characters will move back as he damages the railing of the catwalk.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying along the floor in the middle portion of the 
    Central Catwalk Area.  As the characters run through the middle portion of the 
    room while Mr. X chases them, they will turn around and this will be on the 
    floor in the middle portion of the room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Mr. X will step toward the characters after attempting an overhead punch on 
    them.  Blast his head until he kneels.  A cutscene will play as the characters 
    move through the door and step back into the outside elevator area.
    
    == UNDERGROUND ELEVATOR: BOTTOM ==
    
    The characters will rush toward the elevator.  They will turn as Mr. X rounds 
    the corner behind them.  The characters will step inside the elevator and watch 
    Mr. X as the doors close while he approaches.  The elevator will take them to 
    the floor below.
    
    == CONTROL PANEL CORRIDOR ==
    
    As the doors to the elevator open, an [IVY] will be moving toward the 
    characters in the corridor ahead.  The head (or mouth) portion of the Ivy is 
    its weakness so shoot it in the head with the handgun.  It will try to open its 
    mouth and spray poison at the characters, so blast it and don't give it a 
    chance to open its mouth.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 1 (Hard mode)      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the elevator doors open and the single Ivy is facing the characters,   |
    | look on the right wall and shoot the second lower control panel on the      |
    | bottom portion of the right wall to reveal this file.                       |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will stare up at the ceiling and see two [LICKERS] through the 
    grated ceiling.  As the characters pass by underneath the Lickers, one [LICKER] 
    will drop as the characters turn around.  Blast the Licker in the head to kill 
    it.  The characters will turn back around and TWO [LICKERS] will fall from the 
    grated ceiling and attack.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** off to the left after 
    disposing of them.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Sherry Birkin (Normal mode)                          |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the group of two Lickers attack after the characters turn from facing  |
    | the first Licker in the Control Panel Corridor, look to the right and shoot |
    | the barely-visible control panel on the wall to reveal this file. You might |
    | actually have to get hit in order to shoot it since there won't be much of  |
    | a chance to shoot it after the Lickers have been killed.  It's the first    |
    | control panel in view.                                                      |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will move further down the corridor ahead and approach a turn to 
    the right.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> United States Federal Police Department Internal     |
    |   / \                  Investigation Report                                 |
    |                                                                             |
    | While the characters walk toward the corner and prepare to turn to the      |
    | right after confronting two Lickers in the Control Panel Corridor, shoot    |
    | the furthest control panel on the left wall.                                |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will round the right corner and face TWO [IVYS].  Pick up the 
    **FIRST AID SPRAY** at the end of the corridor.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  5 --> Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 2 (Hard mode)      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the two Ivys attack shoot the big control panel on the back wall       |
    | behind them to reveal this file.                                            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - This will be at the end of the Control Panel Corridor 
    after the characters face off against two Ivy's.  This will be after they round 
    a corridor to the left shortly after fighting two Lickers.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will look up at two dead bodies that can be seen through the 
    ceiling grating above then TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up off the floor in front of 
    them.  After a while, the characters will turn and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack 
    from behind - one of them rounds the left corner.  Try not to worry as much 
    about headshots on the zombies that attack from behind.  Try to get headshots 
    when the two characters turn back around to face the other two zombies.  An 
    [IVY] will be in the back of the two zombies once the characters turn back 
    around.
    
    After a brief conversation about Mr. X's whereabouts, the characters' questions 
    will be answered as a loud sound is heard behind them as if something is 
    chasing them.  The characters will run toward the doors up ahead.  Pick up the 
    --GOLD-- to the left of the door and **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** to the right side 
    of the door at the end of the corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This will be lying on the right side of the door at 
    the very of the Control Panel Corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    While the characters run down the corridor, a [LICKER] will fall from the 
    ceiling and halt their progress.  After the Licker is killed, TWO MORE 
    [LICKERS] will fall from the ceiling and attack.  The characters will turn 
    around and TWO MORE [LICKERS] will drop and attack.  Mr. X will walk out from 
    the right hallway up ahead once the Lickers are finished.  The characters will 
    quickly run through the sliding doors and enter the lava room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  6 --> Ada Wong (Normal mode)                               |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Near the exit door of the Control Panel Corridor, a single Licker will      |
    | attack followed by two Lickers.  The characters will turn and two more      |
    | Lickers will drop from the ceiling behind them.  Shoot the furthest control |
    | panel on the right wall to reveal this file.  Don't shoot this while the    |
    | Lickers are in the area.  Wait until they are killed then shoot the control |
    | panel as Mr. X walks into view from the right hallway up ahead.             |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    == FURNACE ROOM ==
    
    --> Boss: Tyrant T-103 (Mr. X)
    
    Weak Point: Head
    
    MAJOR TIP: The main thing to keep in mind for this battle is that you want to 
    only shoot Mr. X to cancel an attack.  Shoot him in the head and this will 
    damage him badly when it cancels his attacks.  Don't try to shoot him in the 
    head while he stands normally without attempting an attack or you're just 
    wasting ammo.
    
    This battle must play out in certain sequences and all sequences must be gone 
    through each time.  The battle cannot end early, so there will be points where 
    Mr. X will not suffer damage even if he is hit in the head.
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Hook: Mr. X leans back his right arm then strikes forward with a punch.  Shoot 
    him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Punch: Mr. X leans back his left arm then strikes forward with a punch.  Shoot 
    him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Kick: Mr. X leans back and kicks forward with his leg.  Enter button command 
    that appears on-screen in order to dodge this attack.  If he hits the 
    characters, he will grab them off the ground and hold them up.  Blast him in 
    the head to make him drop the characters.
    
    He will perform the following attack on the bottom floor and stop his other 
    attacks:
    
    Dashing Punch: Mr. X will prepare a shoulder ram then dash to the side and rush 
    toward the characters then attempt to punch them.  Shoot him in the head to 
    cancel this attack.  You will always hear two steps as he steps to either side 
    and then he will pause briefly.  Shoot him in the head right then to cancel the 
    attack.  You can also time a grenade toss to when he starts to step and toss it 
    then the explosion will cancel this attack.
    
    Dashing Ram: Mr. X will prepare a shoulder ram then dash directly toward the 
    characters and hit them with his shoulder.  Shoot him in the head as he runs to 
    cancel the attack.
    ---
    
    -- SHOWDOWN WITH MR. X
    
    Wouldn't you know that Mr. X would follow behind in his never-ending pursuit? 
    Claire and Leon will rush toward the railing up ahead then look below and see a 
    pit of hot lava below.  They will hop over the railing and step onto the 
    catwalk then turn back and taunt Mr. X.
    
    "Oh ho ho, you don't mess with the trench coat, son!", Mr. X thinks to himself 
    as he leaps over the railing and kneels down then looks up at the characters.  
    Mr. X will approach the characters then try to hit them as he raises back his 
    left arm.  Blast him in the head with sub machine gun to cancel this attack.  
    The characters will rush toward the pillar in the middle of the catwalk area.
    
    They will race to the other side of the central pillar and turn then look 
    behind them as Mr. X follows.  Cancel his punch with shots to the head with the 
    submachine gun and the characters will run away once again then look back.  The 
    characters will look off the side of the nearby railing then look back toward 
    Mr. X.
    
    Mr. X will move toward the characters then try to hit them with another punch, 
    so shoot him in head.  Keep shooting him in the head with the submachine gun to 
    cancel each of his attacks.  You'll have to enter random button input commands 
    to dodge his kicks whenever he leans back.  After dodging a kick, the 
    characters will quickly move behind him and attempt to push him off the side of 
    the railing, but Mr. X will quickly grab the characters and toss them off the 
    side of the railing instead.
    
    -- TAKING THE FIGHT BELOW
    
    The characters will fall and land on the catwalk area just above the lava 
    below.  They will look around for Mr. X, but he is nowhere in sight.  They will 
    walk toward the center pillar and examine the control panel.  As they turn back 
    around, Mr. X will be holding up both of his arms to hit them with an overhead 
    punch, but they move out of the way (automatically) causing Mr. X to smash the 
    control panel.  The characters will turn and look back toward Mr. X and he will 
    turn and stare at them.
    
    A voice will come over the intercom and mention that the self-destruct system 
    has been activated.  Mr. X will stand in place and stare at the characters.  
    The characters will move around the other side of the pillar and look toward 
    the ladder off to the left.  Be sure to grab the **GREEN HERB** near the ladder 
    as the characters look down toward the ladder.
    
    Mr. X will meet the characters at the ladder.  He will try to punch them while 
    they stand near the ladder, so take out the submachine gun and blast him in the 
    head to stop his punches.  The characters will get on the ladder eventually and 
    climb to bottom floor of the blast furnace.
    
    -- GAME OVER
    
    After stepping away from the ladder, the characters will move over to the side 
    and look down into the lava.  No handrails!  The characters will look back and 
    Mr. X will be standing across from them.  Quickly grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** to 
    the right of him.
    
    It's best to use the submachine gun to cancel his attacks just like before.  He 
    will only do two attacks from now on.
    
    For one attack, he'll lean to the side and prepare a ram then he will rush 
    toward the characters.  He will always sway to the right or left and then move 
    back toward the center of the screen right before he hits the characters with a 
    dashing punch.
    
    A good way to time a shot to the head in order to cancel his attack is to keep 
    in mind that you will hear two steps as he steps in either direction while 
    swaying - he will briefly pause on the right or left side after these two steps 
    and that is when you can aim directly at his head and hit him.  You have to 
    listen closely for the two steps then react quickly with a shot to the head.
    
    A player can also toss a grenade to either of the sides that Mr. X steps toward 
    right as he begins to step.  The explosion will cancel his attack.  Tossing a 
    grenade is the safest method to cancel the attack once you have the timing 
    down.
    
    For the other attack, he will lean and prepare a ram then dash straight toward 
    the characters and hit them with his shoulder.  He runs in a straight line 
    directly toward the characters, so aim at his head and shoot him when he does 
    this.  It's hard to tell the difference between this attack and the one where 
    he sways based on the start-up animation, so you'll have to watch to see if he 
    steps to the side or not.
    
    At the end of the battle, he will hold up his arm and then leap into the air.  
    A dodge command will appear on the screen. Press it and the characters will 
    dodge to the side.  The characters will look back at Mr. X.  He will hold up 
    both of his arms and attempt to smash them overhead with his two fists.  Blast 
    his head while he holds up both of his arms.  The fight will end once the 
    overhead attack is cancelled with gunfire.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |******************** Resident Evil 2 - The G-Virus Vaccine ******************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  7           [LC07] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                        "Is this what the G-Virus does?"                     |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Dying Wish (Easy), Evolved Licker (Normal), 
    Giant Moth (Normal), Baby Moth (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Second Form G, Third Form G, Fourth Form G, 
    Main Fuse
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : MO Disc
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Memory of a Lost City" Chapter 8
    Unlockable Files: Phone Call from Sherry to Annette (Hard Mode), Chris' 
    Diary, Underground Research Facility, Laboratory Security Manual, Annette 
    Birkin, G-Virus Antigen
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == FURNACE ROOM ==
    
    Claire and Leon will stand on the top catwalk and look down toward the lava 
    pool below after the frantic battle with Mr. X.  The self destruct warning 
    voice echoes throughout the facility now.  The two decide to go retrieve 
    Sherry's vaccine together.  They move toward the door up ahead then reenter the 
    hall.
    
    == CONTROL PANEL CORRIDOR ==
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will be right behind the door as it opens.  Go for critical 
    headshots on all three since they move slowly.  The characters will round the 
    corner up ahead then move past some dead bodies.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Chris' Diary                                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After exiting the Furnace Room, the characters will step back into the      |
    | Control Panel Corridor.  Once they round the right corner, two dead bodies  |
    | will be lying near the sidewalls.  Shoot the lower left wall control panel  |
    | that is partially behind the left dead body to reveal this file. You might  |
    | have to wait until the characters look down toward the left dead body in    |
    | order to get a better view of the control panel.                            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    As the facility trembles, TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up from the floor and attack. 
    The one on the left will attack quicker than the other.  The characters will 
    turn as TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] get up and SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] step out from around 
    the corner at the end of the hall the characters just came from.  The 
    characters will retreat and move further down the corridor but THREE [ZOMBIES] 
    will halt their progress.  Try for criticals on all three since they move slow.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Underground Research Facility                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters round the left corner after running from the zombies in |
    | the Control Panel Corridor, three zombies will block the way and the        |
    | elevator door can be seen in the distance.  Shoot the first control panel   |
    | on the wall to the right to reveal this file.                               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    After the characters turn back around, TWO [ZOMBIES] will move from behind the 
    right corner and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE} will begin to step out as the characters turn 
    around and run to the elevator door.  The characters will turn back around and 
    see a HORDE of [ZOMBIES] behind them shortly before stepping into the elevator. 
    The characters will ride the elevator back up to the underground elevator 
    corridor.
    
    == UNDERGROUND ELEVATOR: BOTTOM ==
    
    The characters will step out of the elevator then move quickly down the 
    corridor ahead.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Laboratory Security Manual                           |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Quickly shoot the final overhead light at the end of the Underground        |
    | Elevator Corridor as the characters rush down the hallway after exiting the |
    | elevator to reveal this file.                                               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    FOUR [ZOMBIES] will rush out from around the right corner as the characters 
    move to the end of the corridor.  They all move very quickly so get quick 
    criticals on them or just blast them.  The characters will turn to the right 
    and enter the Central Catwalk Area.
    
    == CENTRAL CATWALK AREA ==
    
    ONE [ZOMBIE] will be on the left catwalk and TWO [ZOMBIES] will be lurching 
    down the right catwalk.  As the characters move ahead, they will look up as a 
    [GIANT SPIDER] falls on the catwalk and blocks the way to the central area.  
    Blast the giant spider to move on.  The characters will turn back to face the 
    zombies on the catwalk as they back into the central area.  They will turn to 
    the left as THREE [ZOMBIES] prepare to attack.  The zombie off to the right 
    attacks quickly, so be prepared to blast him fast then go for critical 
    headshots on the two zombies in the back.
    
    Your partner will be shooting at THREE [ZOMBIES] as your main character turns 
    around.  The front zombie will start to dash toward the characters, but the 
    characters will quickly move out the right doorway and rush toward the door. A 
    cutscene will play.
    
    == WEST AREA CORRIDOR ==
    
    Claire and Leon will start out in the west area corridor where they found 
    Annette after the cutscene.  They will quickly open the door ahead of them.
    
    == OUTSIDE WALKWAY ==
    
    After the characters stare down at the dead body off to the left, TWO [IVYS] 
    will attack from off to the right as the characters turn.  Blast them in their 
    mouths with the handgun or submachine gun to quickly kill them.  Pick up the 
    **CROSSBOW AMMO** in the back of them.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - Lying off to the right as the characters step out onto the 
    Outside Walkway after the cutscene with Annette.  Two Ivys will attack in front 
    of this pickup.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will notice the giant plant that grows along the wall as they 
    walk toward the ladder off to the right.  As they move down the ladder, a 
    crawling zombie will take a swipe at your controlled character when he/she 
    looks to the right while climbing down, but the attack will miss.  Pick up the 
    **MAGNUM AMMO** from off the stacked metal crates as the characters move toward 
    the door on the walkway below.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - Lying on top of the stacked metal crates on the middle 
    walkway that the characters climb down to while on the walkway area with the 
    big plant nearby.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will climb down the next ladder off to the side.  Blast the 
    [IVY] as your controlled character looks down at the bottom walkway.  Collect 
    the --GOLD-- off the metal crate and the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** off the crate 
    near the gold.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on a metal crate near a gold pickup on the 
    bottom walkway with the giant plant on the wall nearby.  The characters will 
    look down at this pickup while climbing down the bottom ladder.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == EMERGENCY CORRIDOR ==
    
    After entering the corridor, the characters will move around the left corner up 
    ahead.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will rush toward the characters but they will eventually 
    stop and walk, so blast them in the head for criticals.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Annette Birkin (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the top light on the right wall as the first two zombies attack in    |
    | the Emergency Corridor that the characters step into after climbing down    |
    | the outer walkway ladders.                                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will step into the room up ahead.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** 
    from off to the right and the **SHOTGUN AMMO** from near the back control panel 
    as the characters survey the dead bodies in the room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  5 --> G-Virus Antigen                                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the control panel (computer) to the left of the shutter door in the   |
    | Emergency Corridor to reveal this file.                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near a dead body by the right wall in the Emergency 
    Corridor room.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying near the back control panel in the Emergency Corridor 
    room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A few shrieks will cause the characters to look toward the ceiling up above as 
    TWO [GIANT SPIDERS] fall from near the control panel on the other side of the 
    room.  Blast them with the submachine gun or shotgun.  The characters will take 
    a look back at the room full of dead bodies before stepping into the next 
    corridor.  Surprisingly, the characters will be able to walk to the corridor 
    without any problems and enter the next room.
    
    == SURVEILLANCE ROOM ==
    
    Grab the --GOLD-- along the counter below the monitors as the characters walk 
    over to the group of monitors in the middle of the room.  They will look up 
    toward a monitor that shows the corridor that they just came from.  A creature 
    will start to move into view as it hops on the walls and makes its way toward 
    the camera.  This is an evolved Licker.  It's heading toward the characters' 
    location right now!
    
    Oh yes, it's time for some gunplay!  Take out that shotgun my friend, since an 
    evolved Licker will look down at the characters from the vent to the left and 
    another evolved Licker will fall from the ceiling vent to the right.  The one 
    on the right side will eventually try to slash the characters but they will 
    quickly move toward the item box by the next door.  Blast the TWO [EVOLVED 
    LICKERS] with the shotgun as they approach the characters.  Make sure that you 
    kill them quick since they will attack with little hesitation.  The characters 
    will quickly step into the corridor to the side.
    
    == NESTING CORRIDOR ==
    
    Well, it looks as if something has made residence in this corridor.  All of the 
    walls are covered with a webbing and egg sacs lie strapped to the ceiling.
    
    The characters will eventually look up toward the ceiling as SEVERAL [BABY 
    MOTHS] cluster in a group and begin to drop from the ceiling.  Blast the baby 
    moths with the handgun and then continue to blast them as they drop to the 
    floor.  At the intersection up ahead, the characters will be startled as they 
    see a giant moth clinging to the wall up ahead, shortly before they look up at 
    the ceiling and see a GROUP of [BABY MOTHS] crawling along the ceiling.  Shoot 
    the baby moths while they are on the ceiling and continue to blast them as they 
    drop.
    
    Take out the shotgun and shoot the [GIANT MOTH] as it moves off the wall and 
    hovers in the air in front of the characters.  The characters will look to the 
    right as more [BABY MOTHS] gather along the ceiling.  Blast them a bit before 
    the characters turn toward the door to the side.
    
    == P-4 LEVEL LAB ==
    
    Collect the **FIRST AID SPRAY from off the right counter and then blast the 
    third locker door on the left then pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** inside of the 
    locker.  Don't worry too much if you miss the shotgun ammo since it will be in 
    full view when the characters leave this room.  The characters will walk into 
    the next room then enter the vaccine room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  6 --> Phone Call From Sherry to Annette (Hard mode)        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters look through the doorway of the Vaccine Room in the P-4   |
    | Level Lab area, shoot the mixer on the right table inside the room to       |
    | reveal this file.  The mixer has a plastic cylinder on top of it.           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Collect the --GOLD-- on the counter to the right as the characters step into 
    the room then shoot the stack of books on the right side of the left counter to 
    reveal a **GRENADE PICKUP** and grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** off the left 
    counter as your controlled character looks back toward the other room while the 
    partner prepares the vaccine.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - This will be lying on the right counter as the characters 
    enter the locker room of the P-4 Level Lab.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Blast the third locker door on the left as the characters 
    enter the locker room of the P-4 Level Lab and this will inside.  This can also 
    be retrieved as the characters leave the lab.
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Blast the stack of books (by the mixer) on the right end 
    of the left counter to reveal this item.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - As your controlled character looks back toward the 
    other room while in the vaccine room, collect this off the nearby counter 
    (character's right).
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The controlled character will look back toward the partner then THREE [ZOMBIES] 
    will enter the vaccine room as the character turns.  The zombie in front moves 
    fast, so blast him quickly then go for headshots on the other two.  An [EVOLVED 
    LICKER] will hop through the window of the back room, so blast him with the 
    shotgun.  After preparing the vaccine, the characters will turn and leave the 
    room.
    
    == NESTING CORRIDOR ==
    
    Take out the shotgun and blast the TWO [MOTHS] that attack as the characters 
    reenter the corridor.  Take out the handgun and blast the GROUP of [BABY MOTHS] 
    as the characters exit the next hallway.
    
    == SURVEILLANCE ROOM ==
    
    After stepping past the item box, the characters will look up on the right wall 
    and see an evolved Licker on the wall.  The characters will take a few steps 
    past it and then another evolved Licker will hop down to the left of them.  
    They will move ahead and TWO [IVYS] will block their path.  Gee, god!  The 
    characters will quickly step past the left side of the Ivys then haul ass to 
    the door on the other side of the Surveillance Room.
    
    == EMERGENCY CORRIDOR ==
    
    The characters will rush down the corridor then turn around as an evolved 
    Licker falls from the ceiling vent.  The characters will run into the room 
    ahead and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will be blocking the way.  When the characters turn 
    back around the [EVOLVED LICKER] will be crawling out of the corridor so blast 
    it with the shotgun.  Try to get some critical headshots on the four zombies as 
    the characters turn around. 
    
    An evolved Licker will crawl down the right side of the next hall as the 
    characters prepare to enter.  They will move to the end and prepare to 
    cautiously look around the right corner, but an evolved Licker will fall from 
    the hall behind them.  The characters will look down the left hall and see two 
    evolved Lickers then look back at the one behind them.  Use the shotgun to 
    blast the single [EVOLVED LICKER] when characters turn toward it then prepare 
    to kill the other TWO [EVOLVED LICKERS] as the characters turn back to the 
    left.  The characters will step back onto the Outside Walkway.
    
    == OUTSIDE WALKWAY ==
    
    The characters will begin to climb the first ladder but some [BABY MOTHS] will 
    begin to drop on them and knock them down.  A giant moth will attack the 
    characters then knock them both off the side of the railing.  After recovering 
    from the fall, the characters will look back up toward the walkway that they 
    fell from as the moth hovers above.  When they turn to the right THREE [IVYS] 
    will attack.  Use the submachine gun to blast them to kill them quickly here 
    and avoid taking damage.  Grab the **GREEN HERB** lying near the stacked metal 
    crates off to the right.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near the stacked metal crates once the characters turn 
    to the left and fight the three Ivys after getting knocked off the bottom 
    walkway of the outside walkway.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After climbing the nearby ladder, the characters will survey the area for the 
    giant moth while back up on the walkway, but it is nowhere in sight.  The 
    characters will climb up the next ladder.  They will walk to the side then turn 
    and look up toward a GROUP of [BABY MOTHS] on the bottom of the top walkway.  
    The baby moths will drop and attack, so blast them with the handgun or toss a 
    grenade at them.
    
    Once the next ladder is climbed, the characters will turn and see two giant 
    moths on the nearby wall.  They will try to run, but an Ivy opens the door that 
    they run to, so the characters will turn back around and face the two [GIANT 
    MOTHS] (use the shotgun) then take care of the [IVY] afterwards.  The 
    characters will reenter the West Area Corridor.
    
    == WEST AREA CORRIDOR ==
    
    The characters will walk over to the door that leads to the Central Catwalk 
    Area and step through the doorway as it slide open.
    
    == CENTRAL CATWALK AREA ==
    
    After entering the middle area, the characters will walk over to the right side 
    of the middle chamber.  A pipe will be thrown and it will narrowly miss the 
    characters and hit the main fuse box in the middle chamber.  A giant claw will 
    grasp the side of the doorway and William Birkin in his second mutated form 
    will crouch down and enter the middle chamber.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> William Birkin (Second Form G)
    
    Weak Point: Head, Right Shoulder Eye, Eye on Back of Body
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Claw Slash: William will hold his right arm back and swipe forward with his 
    claw hand.  If this hits then he will sometimes hold his arm up in the air on 
    his left side then slash once again as he brings his hand back into position.  
    Shoot his head or his left shoulder eye to cancel this attack.  Shoot the eye 
    on his backside to avoid the second claw slash if the first one hits.
    
    Claw Thrust: William will hold his right arm all the way back and showcase the 
    eye on his backside shortly before thrusting forward with his right claw arm.  
    Shoot the eye on his back side to cancel this attack.
    
    Claw Dive: After the characters rush to the locked door, they will turn and 
    William will leap toward them with his claw stretched out ready to stab them. 
    Blast the right shoulder eye on his right arm to cancel this attack.
    ---
    
    Hey, weren't we supposed to fight you back at the platform elevator?  Oh 
    well...
    
    The second mutated form of Birkin is much like his first form overall except he 
    doesn't carry a pipe now.  He still maintains the same weakness.  Blast either 
    his head (the creature head, not William's head on the body) or his right 
    shoulder eye to cancel his attacks.  Use the submachine gun to blast William 
    and only blast him to cancel his attacks.
    
    He has a claw swipe attack where he will hold his right claw arm to the side 
    then slash forward and he has another attack where he will hold his right claw 
    arm behind him and showcase his back shortly before thrusting forward with his 
    claw.  Shoot the eye on his right claw arm or shoot his head to cancel the claw 
    swipe and shoot the eyeball on his backside to cancel his thrust attack.  If he 
    hits the characters with his claw swipe then sometimes you will have to shoot 
    the eye on his backside to cancel the next claw swipe afterward - he does not 
    perform a second swipe all the time however.
    
    The characters will step toward the other side of the room while fighting 
    Birkin eventually.  Once half of his life has been drained, they will rush 
    toward the door on the other side of the walkway, but it is jammed.  The 
    characters will look back toward William and he will stand in front of the 
    doorway then jump into the air and dive down at the characters with his claw 
    arm.  Shoot the eye on his right shoulder to cancel this attack.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    William will fall eventually and the characters will look back and stare at his 
    body.  When they turn back toward the middle chamber an [EVOLVED LICKER] will 
    fall down from the wall above the doorway and attack, so be prepared to blast 
    it with the shotgun.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from near the doorway 
    then grab the **GREEN HERB** from the right doorway as the characters reenter 
    the middle chamber.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This will be in the chamber near the doorway as the 
    characters look back into the middle chamber after finishing off the second 
    form of William.
    [ ] Green Herb - This will be in the chamber near the right doorway as the 
    characters enter the middle chamber after finishing off the second form of 
    William.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will discuss rebooting the system as they step back into the 
    middle chamber but a creatures voice will make them look back toward William's 
    body as he quickly mutates into his third form.  William will get up and growl 
    then face the characters.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> William Birkin (Third Form G)
    
    Weak Point: Head, Top Right Shoulder Eye, Eye on Back of Body
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Claw Swipe: William will lean back and expose his back eye then strike forward 
    with a slash from his top left claw arm.  Blast the eye on the back of his body 
    to cancel this attack.
    
    Double Claw Thrust: William's top claw hands cover his body as he points his 
    side arms forward and hops forward.  Blast his legs to cancel this attack.
    
    SECOND SHOWDOWN ATTACKS:
    
    Kick: William prepares a roundhouse then tries to kick the characters.  Enter 
    the on-screen button command that appears to avoid this attack.  William will 
    showcase the eye on his backside after this attack.
    
    Grab and Impale: William will pick up the characters and hold them in the air 
    shortly before impaling them with his bottom claws.  Blast his head or right 
    shoulder eye to make him drop the characters.
    
    THIRD SHOWDOWN ATTACKS:
    
    Backflip and Slash: William will back flip away from the characters then leap 
    forward and slash at them.  Blast his head to cancel this attack.
    
    SPECIAL CASE ATTACKS:
    
    Claw Dive 1: When the characters first run back into the chamber, they will 
    move toward the left doorway.  William will appear above them then fall once 
    they move through the doorway and try to stab them.  Blast his head as he falls 
    to knock him back.  This is a VERY quick attack!
    
    Claw Dive 2: This has the same animation as claw dive 1, but William will 
    perform this after the characters enter the chamber for the second time then 
    try to rush through another doorway.
    
    Catwalk Dive: As the characters try to cross the walkway after examining the 
    first locked door, William will appear below the catwalk for a VERY brief 
    second then ram through the catwalk.  Press the on-screen dodge command to 
    avoid this attack.
    ---
    
    Hmm, I could have sworn that we fought you outside of an emergency elevator, 
    Mr. Third Form G Birkin... completely separate from your second form...?
    
    The characters will stand in the doorway and William will attack from outside. 
    He will only perform two attacks at the moment.  Either he will hold his top 
    left arm back and showcase his backside before slashing or he will hold both of 
    his top claws in front of him then rush forward and attempt to stab the 
    characters with his lower claw arms.  Shoot the eye on his backside before his 
    claw swipe to cancel the attack and shoot his legs to cancel the forward double 
    arm thrust.
    
    This is one battle where you don't really want to stand and constantly cancel 
    attacks in order to damage William.  He attacks slowly at times, so it's best 
    just to shoot him in his upper right shoulder eye or his head to damage him and 
    drain his life faster.  Once 25% of his health has been drained, the characters 
    will turn and run toward the doorway to their left.
    
    -- TRYING TO ESCAPE (Showdown 2)
    
    Right as they pass through the door, William will appear above them and he will 
    fall and try to stab them on his way down.  Quickly aim at his head and shoot 
    him to knock him out of the air.  The attack is VERY fast!  The characters will 
    run away once again and head to the door off to the left.  It's locked!
    
    The characters will move across the catwalk to the right.  Prepare to enter a 
    dodge command as William plows through the walkway below the characters and 
    lands on the walkway above as the characters back away.  William will roar and 
    the characters will rush back into the middle chamber then move out the doorway 
    across from them.  Prepare to enter another dodge command as William falls from 
    above and tries to stab the characters.
    
    The characters will rush toward the door then turn and face William.  He will 
    perform the same attacks as before, only this time he will do two new attacks. 
    He will hold up his right leg then try to kick the characters.  Enter the on-
    screen dodge command to avoid this and you'll get a perfect view of the eye on 
    the back of his chest afterwards so you can blast it.  He will pick up the 
    characters with his top claw arms and try to stab them with his bottom claw 
    arms.  Blast either his top right shoulder eye or his head to cancel this 
    attack.  Like before, do not simply blast him to cancel his attacks.  Shoot him 
    in the top right shoulder eye or his head to drain his life.
    
    -- NO ESCAPE (Showdown 3)
    
    Once 50% of his life remains, the characters will run across the right catwalk, 
    but William will leap into the air and land in front of them.  He will hop into 
    the air and perform a kick which can be dodged by pressing the on-screen 
    command that appears.  The characters will move underneath and his back eye 
    will be exposed for a few moments, so blast it.  He will do all the same 
    attacks as before now but he will add one new attack.  He will sometimes back 
    flip then hop toward the characters and try to slash them.  Blast his head to 
    cancel this attack.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    William will fall over the edge of the railing once his life has been fully 
    drained.  The characters will stare off the side of the railing.  They will 
    eventually walk toward the nearby door... until a growl from below is heard.  
    William will crawl back up the wall in his fourth mutated form.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> William Birkin (Fourth Form G)
    
    Weak Point: Head (top portion of head), Top Right Shoulder Eye, Top Left 
    Shoulder Eye, Eye on Back Left Leg
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Wall Lunge: William will sit on wall then suddenly leap toward the characters 
    and try to stab them.  Press the on-screen button command to avoid this attack.
    
    Wall Dive: After the Wall Lunge, William will climb up the next wall then fall 
    down toward the characters and try to stab them on the way down.  Shoot him in 
    his head to knock him out of the air.  You basically have to hit the top of his 
    mouth since the head isn't exposed all the way.  Use the submachine gun and 
    fire at his head while he is still on the wall then, when he jumps, you'll 
    likely knock him out of the air.
    
    Wall Jump: After the Wall Dive, William will be attached to the wall below the 
    middle chamber.  He will leap up toward the characters and try to stab them.  
    Press the on-screen button command to dodge this attack.
    
    Grab and Bite: When the characters try to reenter the middle chamber after 
    William moves out of sight, he will appear on the wall above them and grab them 
    with his front arms then try to bite them.  Shoot his head to make him drop the 
    characters.
    
    Acid Spit: While William hangs off the side of the catwalk with both arms, he 
    will foam at the mouth then spit acid at the characters.
    
    Claw Swipe: While William hangs off the side of the catwalk with both arms, he 
    will hold his left arm back and try to hit the characters with his claw.  Blast 
    him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Claw Swipe: While William hangs off the side of the catwalk with one arm and 
    your controlled character hangs near him, he will hold back his right arm and 
    try to slash the character.  Shoot the eye on the top right portion of his 
    right shoulder or his head to cancel this attack.
    ---
    
    Wow.  Three forms of G Birkin shoved into one battle.  That's a new low, 
    Capcom!
    
    William will leap over to the central shaft wall after he climbs back up the 
    wall on the left side.  He will face the characters then leap at them and try 
    to stab them with both of his front arms.  Press the on-screen dodge command to 
    avoid this attack and William will fall through the catwalk floor.  The 
    characters will look back as William crawls along the wall again.
    
    William will climb up the wall to the characters' left.  He will climb to the 
    very top then fall off the wall and dive toward the characters.  Quickly shoot 
    the top portion of his head to knock him out of the air to avoid this attack.  
    This can be a very hard attack to cancel since you basically have to shoot the 
    top mouth portion of head - it's really best to aim the submachine gun at his 
    head and start firing while he is still on the wall and you'll have a better 
    chance of knocking him out of the air when he falls.  The characters will look 
    around below and find William attached to the side of the middle chamber below. 
    He will jump at the characters and try to stab them.  Press the on-screen 
    button command to avoid this attack.
    
    -- WHERE DID HE GO?
    
    William will be somewhere out of sight as the characters scan the room for him. 
    They will walk back toward the middle chamber.  William will appear above the 
    doorway and grab the characters with his two front arms then hold them and try 
    to bite them.  Take out the shotgun and blast his head to take some major 
    damage and make him drop the characters.
    
    William will leap down onto the catwalk after the characters turn from falling 
    and he will break the catwalk then hold onto the side.  He will enter a new 
    attack phase now.  He will foam at the mouth then spit up acid at the 
    characters.  Shoot him in head to cancel this attack.  He will also hold back 
    his left arm and try to slash at the characters.  Shoot his head to cancel this 
    attack also.  Canceling the first attack will most likely knock him further 
    down the catwalk.  Basically, blast him in the head at this point to enter the 
    next phase of his attacks.
    
    -- STILL HANGING IN THERE
    
    He will fall further off the catwalk and hang on by one arm.  Your controlled 
    character will fall off the side of the catwalk as William bangs his hand on 
    the catwalk above and your character will hang onto the catwalk beside him.  He 
    will only perform one attack from now on.  He will lean back his right arm and 
    try to hit your character.  Simply aim at his top left shoulder eye or his head 
    and blast it with rapid fire to cancel the attack.  Blast him in any of his 
    weak points at this point to knock him off the catwalk and finish the fight!
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |*********************** Resident Evil 2 - The G Train ***********************|
    |                   M E M O R Y  O F  A  L O S T  C I T Y  8           [LC08] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                              "Here, use this!"                              |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Leon
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: G Train (Easy), Survivors (Easy), Fifth Form G 
    (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Super Tyrant, Master Key
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Platform Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: Rocket Launcher
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 2
    Unlockable Files: William Birkin
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == UNDERGROUND ELEVATOR: BOTTOM ==
    
    As the self-destruct warning continues over the intercom, the characters will 
    start this chapter in the underground elevator corridor.  When the characters 
    turn, TWO [IVYS] will attack from the nearby corridor.  Pick up the **GREEN 
    HERB** from the back portion of the corridor near the elevator doors.  The 
    characters will look back toward the platform elevator then turn to the right 
    and look toward the door that leads to the Central Walkway Area.  Quickly grab 
    the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from in front of the door.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - In front of the elevator in the very back of the long corridor 
    in the Underground Elevator Corridor.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - After killing the Ivys, the characters will turn and 
    look back toward the platform elevator.  When they turn to the right and look 
    toward the door, this will be lying in front of the door near the right wall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> William Birkin (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | While the characters move down the corridor that leads to the elevator in   |
    | the Underground Elevator Corridor, shoot the second to last light on the    |
    | ceiling to reveal this file.                                                |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will move down the corridor that leads to the elevator.  They 
    will turn as TWO [EVOLVED LICKERS] crawl out from the corners of the corridor 
    behind them.  Take out the shotgun and blast them after the characters tell 
    Sherry to run toward the elevator.  More evolved Lickers will step around the 
    corner and Sherry will yell to Claire and Leon to get into the elevator.  The 
    characters will rush to the elevator doors then turn and watch them close as 
    THREE [EVOLVED LICKERS] move toward the elevator.  The elevator doors will shut 
    and the characters will be taken to the lower level train area.
    
    == UNDERGROUND TRAIN AREA ==
    
    The characters will notice the train up ahead as they exit the elevator.  Grab 
    the **SHOTGUN AMMO** off to the right as the characters look toward the gate 
    doorway.  All will seem to be going smoothly until the characters look to the 
    left and spot a giant... Tyrant!?  It's Mr. X in his Tyrant form!
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying near the bottom of the staircase as the characters 
    look to the right when they first enter the train area from the elevator.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Super Tyrant (Mr. X)
    
    Weak Point: Head, Top Left (his right) Red Side of Upper Chest
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Claw Slash: Mr. X will hold back his left arm and begin to growl shortly before 
    slashing forward with his claw arm.  Shoot him in the head or upper left 
    portion of the chest to cancel this attack.
    
    Claw Thrust: Mr. X will growl and hold his right arm back then thrust his claw 
    forward.  Blast him in the head or the upper left portion of the chest to 
    cancel this attack.
    
    Double Claw Thrust: Mr. X will growl and hold back both arms then thrusts 
    forward with each claw hand.  Blast him in the head or the upper left portion 
    of the chest to cancel this attack.
    
    Running Claw Slash: After the characters run from Mr. X while on the train 
    cart, they will turn back around and Mr. X will dash toward them and try to hit 
    them with his claw arm.  Blast him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Claw Dive: When the characters rush back to the side of the train near the 
    elevator doors, they will look on top of the train as Mr. X hops on it.  He 
    will run along the train then hop into the air and fall down toward the 
    characters and try to stab them.  Blast him in his head while he falls to 
    cancel this attack.
    
    Ram: When the characters move up on the bridge for the second time, they will 
    turn as Mr. X rushes toward them and tries to ram them.  Press the on-screen 
    button command to dodge this attack.
    
    Train Cart Push: After the characters hop down from the middle bridge after 
    dodging Mr. X's ram, they will turn as Mr. X hops down near the train cart by 
    them.  Mr. X will grab the train cart and push it toward the characters.  Press 
    the on-screen command as it appears to dodge the train cart.
    
    Claw Stab: After dodging the train cart, the characters will stay on the nearby 
    walkway and remain crouched.  When they turn, Mr. X will hold up one of his 
    claw arms and try to stab them.  Blast him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Jumping Claw Impale: While the characters face Mr. X while he is on the 
    walkway, he will dash toward them then hop into the air and try to stab them on 
    the way down.  Press the on-screen dodge command and he will get his claw stuck 
    in the concrete of the walkway as the characters step to the side.
    
    Rocket Toss: If the characters fire a rocket too late (after Mr. X stands) 
    while he is on the final walkway, Mr. X will grab the rocket out of the air and 
    toss it back toward the characters.  Blast the rocket out of the air to avoid 
    taking damage.
    ---
    
    -- RUNNING FROM MR. X
    
    Claire will tell Sherry to get on the train as the characters back up while Mr. 
    X approaches.  The characters will back up through the gate doors behind them. 
    Once the characters move through the gate, Mr. X will eventually growl as he 
    holds his left arm back.  He's about to slash the characters, so quickly take 
    out the submachine gun or shotgun and blast him in the head or the upper left 
    portion of his chest.  His head and the reddish upper portion of the left (his 
    right) side of the chest are his two weak points.  Concentrate on canceling his 
    attacks for now.
    
    The characters will eventually turn and move up the stairs.  Grab the --GOLD-- 
    in the right corner as they reach the top then quickly pick up the **SUBMACHINE 
    GUN AMMO** on the bridge walkway that hangs over the train area shortly after 
    the characters turn as Mr. X hops up the stairs.  The shaky camera makes it a 
    bit hard to collect items in this area since the characters are usually dashing 
    frantically very often.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - At the other end of the overhead bridge that hangs 
    over the train area.  This will be in view as the characters escape from Mr. X 
    shortly after climbing the stairs.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Mr. X will hop in front of the characters and block the path ahead once they 
    reach the middle portion of the bridge.  Blast him once again with the shotgun 
    when he starts to growl to cancel his claw slash attacks.  The characters will 
    hop onto the top of the nearby train then run along the top of it.  Quickly 
    grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** from the end of the train cart as the characters 
    dash ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - This is at the end of the train cart that the characters 
    hop on after Mr. X blocks the way to the other side of the bridge.  This can be 
    collected before the characters hop onto the train.  It will be in view as the 
    characters turn back toward Mr. X when he hops up the stairs.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    -- NOWHERE TO RUN
    
    The characters will turn as Mr. X runs toward them while on the train.  He will 
    run toward them and try to slash them with his claw arm.  Quickly blast him in 
    the head with the submachine gun to cancel this attack.  It's VERY quick!  The 
    characters will hop off the train then look for Mr. X.  He will step out from 
    the side of the train to the right as they turn.  The characters will run 
    around the left side of the train and look up toward the top of the train cart 
    as Mr. X leaps on top of it.
    
    Mr. X will run along the top of the train cart as the characters back up.  He 
    will eventually leap into the air and dive down toward the characters with his 
    claw stretched out to stab them.  Blast him in his head while he falls to 
    cancel this attack.  You only have a few seconds to shoot his head before 
    impact so use the submachine gun - it's a very fast attack, much like Birkin 
    Third Form G's claw dive.
    
    The characters will move up the stairs and run to the middle of the bridge 
    again.  Mr. X will follow.  The characters will turn as Mr. X dashes toward 
    them.  He will try to ram them, so press the on-screen button command that 
    appears to dodge his ram.  The characters will step to the side then turn 
    around and hop off the railing to the tracks below.  They will turn and face 
    the train cart nearby.
    
    Mr. X will hop down near the train cart then push it toward the characters.  
    Press the on-screen button command to dodge the train cart.  Grab the --GOLD-- 
    in the right corner shortly after the characters dodge the train cart.  The 
    characters will remain crouched then turn around as Mr. X prepares to stab them 
    with his claw.  Quickly blast him in the head to cancel his claw stab.
    
    The characters will hop onto the train tracks and run along them then look back 
    as Mr. X follows.  They will step up to the walkway on the left then turn 
    around.  As Mr. X hops onto the walkway.  This is where the final showdown with 
    Mr. X occurs.
    
    -- YOU LOSE, BIG GUY!
    
    Mr. X will dash toward the characters and hop into the air and try to stab 
    them.  A button dodge command will appear shortly before he jumps so press it 
    to dodge the attack.  He will get his right claw hand stuck in the concrete 
    walkway.  Use this time to take out the shotgun or submachine gun and blast him 
    in the head to damage him badly.  He will eventually pull his claw out of the 
    concrete.
    
    He will look at the characters and growl at them after he recovers then he will 
    perform a claw thrust forward and try to hit them.  Blast him in the head or 
    the upper left side of the chest to cancel the claw thrust.  While he stands in 
    front of the characters, he will do one of three attacks after growling.  He 
    will either perform a claw thrust with his left arm, right arm, or both arms. 
    You'll have to shoot either his head or the upper left portion of the chest in 
    order to cancel these attacks.
    
    Once his life is fully drained, he will hop to the back of the walkway. He will 
    begin to growl and regenerate his life.  There is nothing that a player can do 
    to stop this the first time.  A voice from a familiar female person will yell 
    out and the person will toss **ROCKET LAUNCHER AMMO** down toward the 
    characters.  They will turn and it will be in view, so grab it quickly.
    
    NOTE: The rocket launcher must be equipped to a quick inventory slot, so pause 
    the game by pressing either "-" or "C" and equip the rocket launcher to a 
    directional pad slot on the side of the screen.
    
    Mr. X will hop over to the left walkway then hop again and leap toward the 
    characters then try to slice them.  Press the on-screen dodge command to escape 
    this attack.  He will stand in front of the characters and perform his usual 
    thrust attacks afterwards, so blast him in the head or the upper left portion 
    of the chest to weaken him and cancel his attacks.
    
    Whenever he leaps toward the back of the walkway QUICKLY switch to the rocket 
    launcher and fire a rocket at him to end the battle.  If you fire a rocket too 
    late then he will catch the rocket and toss the rocket back at the characters - 
    shoot the rocket out of the air to avoid damage.
    
    This battle can carry on for quite a while if you keep missing with the rocket 
    launcher.  He will continue to regenerate as he stand in the background.  He 
    must be hit with a rocket while he crouches shortly after landing to end the 
    battle.  If all rocket launcher is ammo is used up, some more will always 
    appear on the walkway.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    The characters will board the train after the battle.
    
    While aboard the train, the characters will talk a bit then turn toward the 
    door that leads to the back cart.  The train will shake as if something has 
    latched on to it.  The characters will walk toward the back train cart.  Grab 
    the **GREEN HERB**, --GOLD-- and **SHOTGUN AMMO** off to the sides as the 
    characters step to the back of the train.  As the characters step toward the 
    doors, a cutscene will activate.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying in the train cart that the characters pass through on 
    their way to the back of the train.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying in the train cart that the characters pass through on 
    their way to the back of the train.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> William Birkin (Fifth Form G)
    
    Weak Point: Two Eyes on Upper Body, Gas Tank on Right Side of Body (can only be 
    destroyed once)
    
    ---
    Attacks:
    
    Tentacle Stab: One of Williams's tentacles will move through a side window of 
    the train.  It will point toward the characters and then move back and rush 
    forward to stab the characters.  Shoot the front of the tentacle to make it 
    move back out the window.  A tentacle can be driven back outside of the train 
    as soon as it appears.
    
    Debris Toss: One of William's tentacles will tear off a piece of the train and 
    toss it at the characters.  Press the on-screen button command in order to 
    dodge this attack.
    
    Bite: A smaller mouth appendage will move out of William's big mouth and try to 
    bite the characters.  Blast the mouth with gunfire to make it move back inside 
    of his big mouth.
    
    Claw Stab: One of the claws on either side of William will rise into the air 
    then move forward and try to stab the characters.  Blast the claw while it 
    remains in the air to cancel the attack.
    
    Tentacle Grab: One of William's tentacles will grab the characters then hold 
    them up and try to smash them into the ground.  Blast one of William's eyes on 
    his body to make him drop the characters.
    
    Body Vomit: William will puke up a body that will crawl toward the characters 
    and try to attack them.  Blast the body to kill it.
    
    Acid Spit: William's mouth will quiver a bit then he will spit acid toward the 
    characters.  Blast the mouth to cancel the attack.
    ---
    
    -- FINAL BATTLE WITH WILLIAM
    
    The self destruct time on the train will activate because of its contamination 
    of the G-virus due to William.  A timer will start at 5 minutes.
    
    From the start, William only has one type of attack.  His tentacles that have 
    three claws and an eyeball in the middle will move through one of the side 
    windows of the train cart and try to stab the characters.  Simply shoot the 
    front portion of the tentacles a few times to make them move back outside - the 
    handgun should work just fine.
    
    Eventually, the characters will begin to move toward William.  He will pick up 
    pieces of the train every so often and toss the pieces at the characters.  
    Press the on-screen button command in order to dodge the train pieces.
    
    -- STEPPING CLOSER
    
    As the characters move close, William will start to perform other attacks.  
    Keep a very close eye on his side claws since they will sometimes rise in the 
    air and try to stab the characters.  Quickly shoot at a claw if it rises into 
    the air.  He will sometimes grab the characters with one of his tentacles.  
    Blast the eyes on his body to make him drop the characters.
    
    Whenever he vomits a body, blast the body to kill it.  If an extra mouth 
    appendage moves out of his main mouth then shoot the mouth appendage before it 
    bites the characters to make it move back inside.
    
    Blast the eyes on the upper portion of William's body with the shotgun or the 
    submachine gun to drain his life.  Eventually the characters will notice a gas 
    tank on the right side of the William.  Shoot the gas tank to damage him a bit.
    
    -- GET OFF MY TRAIN!
    
    Once all of William's health has been drained, the characters will notice the 
    coupler that holds the train cart that William is on.  Take out the submachine 
    gun and fire at the coupler.  William will grab onto the coupler with two of 
    his tentacles.  You'll need to shoot the tentacles that protect the coupler 
    then blast the coupler to separate the train carts.
    
    You don't want to focus entirely on the coupler and forget about William's 
    attacks however.  William will still attack with his side claws and he will 
    also spit acid at the characters sometimes.  If his mouth ever quivers a bit 
    then fire at it before he spits acid at the characters to cancel the attack.
    
    Once the coupler is destroyed, wave by to William as his cart is left behind as 
    the facility explodes.  Hasta' luego, G-man!
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    ------------- P R E - R E S I D E N T  E V I L  4  S C E N A R I O ------------
    
                                J U L Y  2 3,  2 0 0 2
    
                  ___                            _    _               
                 / _ \  _ __    ___  _ __  __ _ | |_ (_)  ___   _ __  
                | | | || '_ \  / _ \| '__|/ _` || __|| | / _ \ | '_ \ 
                | |_| || |_) ||  __/| |  | (_| || |_ | || (_) || | | |
                 \___/ | .__/  \___||_|   \__,_| \__||_| \___/ |_| |_|
                       |_|                                            
                              _                _             
    LEON                     | |  __ _ __   __(_)  ___  _ __                   JACK
                          _  | | / _` |\ \ / /| | / _ \| '__|
    KENNEDY              | |_| || (_| | \ V / | ||  __/| |                  KRAUSER
                          \___/  \__,_|  \_/  |_| \___||_|   
    
                                                                             [SC11]
    
    |**************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Remnants of T-Veronica ***************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  2               [OJ02] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      "A great river will watch you as                       |
    |                           you dream until dawn..."                          |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Infiltration (Easy), Torrent (Easy), Hunter 
    Gamma (Normal), Dam Worker Zombies (Normal), Anubis (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Valve Handle
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Factory Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 1
    Unlockable Files: Manuela Hidalgo, Note (Manuela's Realization), Javier Dam
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == DAM TUNNEL ==
    
    Pick up the **FIRST AID SPRAY** up ahead as the characters move further down 
    the tunnel.  The characters will walk toward some water up ahead.  Look to the 
    right and you'll see something shining as they walk closer to the water - it's 
    some **SHOTGUN AMMO**, so grab it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on the tunnel floor at the very starting.  You 
    literally can't miss it.  If you do, you need more than this walkthrough to 
    help you through this game, I'm afraid.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - As the characters approach the water at the end of the 
    beginning tunnel, this will be off to the right.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Eventually, a group of [PIRANHA} will swim toward the characters and attack.  
    Try to shoot them as they hop out of the water.  The characters will turn 
    toward a [ZOMBIE} that tries to attack, so be prepared to blast it.  More 
    [PIRANHA} will begin to group in the water off to the left, so the characters 
    will rush across the walkway and try to leave the water area.
    
    A sound of some creature will get their attention and they turn back to the 
    left to check it out.  A thin chameleon-like creature will hop onto the wall 
    behind them then eventually hop down and attack the characters - this is an 
    [ANUBIS].  Blast the Anubis with the shotgun or the submachine gun a few 
    seconds after it lands.  These creatures attack very quickly with a jumping 
    slash, so always try to shoot them fast when they appear.
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will emerge in the water and climb up onto the walkway.  The 
    characters will eventually turn and move into the corridor behind them.  They 
    will look back out at the water area as zombies move toward the iron door as it 
    closes.  The characters will have a brief conversation with Manuela.  TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] will rush in and attack from behind once the conversation begins to 
    stop.  One of the zombies will grab your partner, so blast it off of him.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Manuela Hidalgo (Normal mode)                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the third light off to the left after the characters turn the first   |
    | right corner after speaking with Manuela in the corridor area after the     |
    | water area.  Two zombies will attack right before the characters move down  |
    | the corridor.  This light is nearly above a dead body that is slumped over  |
    | against the left wall.  The light is lit up.                                |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Pick up the **GRENADE LAUNCHER AMMO** in the middle of the corridor ahead.  The 
    characters will stare down at a dead body that is slumped against the left 
    wall.  The characters will turn around then THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack as they 
    turn back around.  Go for headshots since they're all pretty slow.  The dead 
    body back down the hall will become a [ZOMBIE] as the characters turn back 
    around.  Grab the --GOLD-- on the corner of the floor as the characters move 
    ahead.  The characters will rush through the door at the end of the corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - After two zombies attack in the corridor after the 
    water area, the characters will move down the corridor ahead and this will be 
    on the floor next to a dead body that is slumped against the left wall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == STAIRWAY ==
    
    Leon and Krauser will enter a room with stairs.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** 
    near the bottom of the stairs.  An [ANUBIS] will fall from the area above and 
    attack from off to the left eventually, so be prepared to blast it.  Pick up 
    the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** as the characters move up the first set of stairs. 
    Another Anubis will hop on the wall to the side of the stairs and the 
    characters will begin to rush up the rest of the stairs.  The characters will 
    make it to the very top and slam the door as the Anubis tries to follow.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - At the bottom of the staircase in the room that the characters 
    rush to after exiting the corridor near the water area.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This will be lying on the platform above the first 
    set of stairs in the stairway area.  Be sure to grab it quick since the 
    characters will quickly turn from it and run from the Anubis that attacks when 
    they step on the platform.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == CORRIDOR ==
    
    FIVE [ZOMBIES] will be waiting down the corridor of the next room as the 
    characters enter.  Some of the zombies rush at the characters pretty fast and 
    will attack the partner, so shoot them quickly.  As the characters move 
    cautiously down the corridor, the door to the left will bust open and TWO 
    [HUNTER GAMMAS] will move out of the room to the left and attack.  Blast them 
    with the submachine gun or shotgun.
    
    Grab the --GOLD-- down the right corridor as the characters pass by.  The 
    characters will look out onto a walkway with TWO [ZOMBIES] on it through the 
    door that the hunter gammas busted open.  Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** on the 
    outside walkway while passing by.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - This will be on the walkway as the characters look through 
    the open door that the two Hunter Gammas bust open.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Note (Manuela's Realization)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the corridor where the Hunter Gammas bust through a door off to the      |
    | left, the characters will pass by the door and look to the outside walkway  |
    | and see two zombies and a grenade pickup along that walkway. The characters |
    | will turn and look down a long hallway with a door at the end. Shoot the    |
    | light above the door to reveal this file.                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will turn and face a long hallway then walk down it and turn 
    left.  They will cautiously open the next door off to the side.  Manuela will 
    call the characters attention to TWO [JUMPING MANEATERS] as they crawl from out 
    of the side corridor near the door.  The characters will turn around after 
    killing them then TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] will attack.  The characters will run 
    through the open door shortly after the Hunter Gammas appears.
    
    == STAIRWAY CORRIDOR ==
    
    After running into the room, equip the submachine gun since the characters will 
    turn as a total of FOUR [HUNTER GAMMAS] race through the door behind them.  
    Blast them all and the characters will move up the stairs.  More [HUNTER 
    GAMMAS] will run through the door as the characters look back down the stairs, 
    but the characters will step into the corridor at the top and face FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] that block their way.  As the characters move down the corridor after 
    fighting the zombies, a [HUNTER GAMMA] will attack right as the characters turn 
    back around, so have the submachine gun ready to knock him out of his jumping 
    attack.  ANOTHER [HUNTER GAMMA] will hop out from around the left corner.
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** as the characters look down the left corridor with 
    the door at the end up ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - After the characters face off against four zombies, they will 
    turn around and face two Hunter Gammas in the stairway corridor.  The 
    characters will look off to the left and see this item and a door as they move 
    ahead.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Javier Dam                                           |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the characters fight four zombies in the stairway corridor, they will |
    | turn and fight two Hunter Gammas.  They will pass down the corridor then    |
    | turn to the left and see a green herb in front of door.  As they turn the   |
    | right corner a light will be on the wall.  Shoot the light to reveal this   |
    | file.  It will be on the right wall as they pass by it.  Hit it quick!      |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will move down the corridor to the right.  Manuela will tell the 
    characters to move down the right corridor up ahead but SIX [ZOMBIES] will 
    suddenly step into view and block the way.  Blast a few of them in the head 
    with the handgun as the characters turn to the left and continue down the next 
    corridor.  A [JUMPING MANEATER] will crawl along the ceiling, so prepare to 
    blast it.  The characters will turn back around and a [ZOMBIE] will attack 
    immediately and some more [ZOMBIES] will step around the left corner in the 
    back of them.  The characters will turn back around and run through the door 
    ahead of them.
    
    == STAIRWAY 2 ==
    
    Grab the --GOLD-- on the top stairway as the characters look to the right after 
    entering the area.  They will survey the area below and see SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] 
    moving around the lower areas.  They will look toward a walkway with TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] and some **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on it.  The characters will enter an 
    elevator off to the side and take it to the top floor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This will be lying on a walkway off to the right as 
    the characters look off the stairway after escaping a horde of zombies in a 
    corridor.  They will look off the stairway railing and see several zombies 
    below then look toward a walkway and see this along with two zombies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == WATERWAY ==
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the walkway across from the characters as they 
    enter the waterway area and take a look around.  The characters will cross the 
    catwalk hanging over the running water.  [PIRANHA] will attack the characters 
    as they step over the catwalk.  Manuela will fall into the rushing water and 
    slide down the ramp then your characters will fall in after her.  An [ANUBIS] 
    will try to attack as the characters slides down the waterway, so prepare to 
    blast it with the submachine gun.  A **GREEN HERB ** will be visible on the 
    walkway to the left as the character slide down the waterway.  This item can 
    also be grabbed from the opposite walkway later.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - This will be visible on the left walkway as your controlled 
    character slides down the waterway after Manuela.  An Anubis will attack before 
    this comes into view.  This item can also be grabbed from the opposite walkway 
    later.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The controlled character will grab onto a ladder and look off to the left as 
    [PIRANHA] hop out of the water and attack.  The character will soon pull up to 
    the walkway above and join the partner once again.  As the characters turn to 
    the left, a [JUMPING MANEATER] will attack then ANOTHER [JUMPING MANEATER] will 
    be up the stairs to the right.  Blast them both.
    
    The characters will move up the stairs.  A [ZOMBIE] will attack your partner 
    from behind once your characters walk near the door above, so prepare to shoot 
    the zombies off.  As your character turns back around, ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will 
    rush at Manuela then a [JUMPING MANEATER] will fall from the ceiling and 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up off the floor.  Manuela will be scared off then 
    she will dash into the nearby room.  The characters will follow her as the 
    zombies are defeated.
    
    == GEAR ROOM ==
    
    Leon and Krauser will enter a room full of dead bodies, but Manuela is not in 
    sight.  A total of FOUR [ZOMBIES] will attack as the dead bodies begin to rise 
    eventually.  One of the zombies in the back will be your first run-in with a 
    spitter zombie.  Much like in Umbrella Chronicles, they will stand back and 
    spit vomit toward the characters.  Their vomit can be shot out of the air.
    
    After calling out to Manuela, the characters will hear her singing, then they 
    will move past the rotating gear to the left and she will move out from behind 
    the gears. Manuela will be grasping her right bandaged arm while she moves out. 
    Javier will speak to Manuela over the intercom after the characters have a 
    brief conversation.  Manuela will run off behind the gear again.
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will get off the floor and move toward the characters as they 
    try to follow Manuela.  Fight them off and the characters will turn as FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] attack them from off to the left.  The characters will move through 
    the doorway off to the right and catch up with Manuela.  A cutscene will 
    activate that will serve as an introduction to the next scenario.  Time to 
    return to Rockfort Island!
    
    ----------------- C O D E  V E R O N I C A  S C E N A R I O -------------------
    
                            D E C E M B E R  2 7,  1 9 9 8
    
                       ____                                    __ 
                      / ___|  __ _  _ __ ___    ___     ___   / _|
                     | |  _  / _` || '_ ` _ \  / _ \   / _ \ | |_ 
                     | |_| || (_| || | | | | ||  __/  | (_) ||  _|
                      \____| \__,_||_| |_| |_| \___|   \___/ |_|  
                       ___   _      _  _         _               
    CLAIRE            / _ \ | |__  | |(_)__   __(_)  ___   _ __               STEVE
                     | | | || '_ \ | || |\ \ / /| | / _ \ | '_ \ 
    REDFIELD         | |_| || |_) || || | \ V / | || (_) || | | |          BURNSIDE
                      \___/ |_.__/ |_||_|  \_/  |_| \___/ |_| |_|
    
    
    |********* Resident Evil: Code Veronica - Captive on Rockfort Island *********|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  1                [GO01] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                  "Your identification number is WKD4496."                   |
    |                         "Welcome to your new home."                         |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Lonely Island (Easy), Face to Face (Easy), 
    Mistrust (Easy), Steve Burnside (Normal), Claire Redfield (Rockfort) (Normal), 
    Graveyard Zombie (Normal), Prisoner Zombie (Normal), Guard Zombie (Normal), Bat 
    (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Family Picture
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Special Alloy Emblem
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 2
    Unlockable Files: Prisoner's Diary, Rockfort Island, Alexia's Song (Hard mode 
    only)
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == OUTSIDE THE PRISON GATES ==
    
    Claire and Steve will survey the area and discuss the current situation.  A 
    [ZOMBIE] will shuffle toward them from the graveyard eventually.  MORE 
    [ZOMBIES] will begin to appear behind the gates of the graveyard then a 
    [ZOMBIE] will emerge from the ground near the characters.  That zombie and 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will walk toward the characters.  The characters will turn to 
    the right as a [ZOMBIE] attacks them almost immediately.  A [ZOMBIE] will 
    emerge from the ground behind the zombie that attacks and the characters will 
    begin to back up.
    
    The characters will turn to the left and face TWO [ZOMBIES} then one [ZOMBIE] 
    will emerge from the ground and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will exit the graveyard for a 
    total of four zombies.  You can get some easy headshots with these last four.  
    Grab the --GOLD-- on the wooden railing of the walkway near the building as the 
    characters move through the doorway in the back of them.
    
    == OUTSIDE THE PRISON BUNKS ==
    
    The partner will shut the door then the characters will look down the path to 
    the side of the building and see a dead body in the distance.  Claire will 
    point out that she needs to find a computer to get into contact with Chris.  
    The characters will move by the dead body then begin to move up the steps 
    outside the nearby building.  The characters will look back at a hole along the 
    side of the building as a [ZOMBIE] reaches for the characters from underneath. 
    After the zombie is killed, something will drag it under the building and 
    mutilate the body.  The partner will open the door and the controlled character 
    will step into the mess hall.
    
    == MESS HALL ==
    
    Grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** off the top shelf in the back of the mess hall.  
    The characters will survey the room then move toward the fenced control room to 
    the left.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - This will be on top of the back shelf as the characters 
    enter the mess hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will open the door to the control room.  Grab the **SHOTGUN 
    AMMO** and **GRENADE PICKUP** from the lockers then collect the **SUBMACHINE 
    GUN** on top of the computer.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying in a locker in the control room of the mess hall.
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Lying in a locker in the control room of the mess hall.
    [ ] Submachine Gun - Lying on top of the computer in the control room of the 
    mess hall.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A sound of something pounding on a nearby window will distract the characters 
    and they will leave the control room then walk over to the door on the left up 
    ahead.  Press the Z button to open the door.
    
    == BUNKS ==
    
    The characters will survey the bunk buds as they pass by them.  Some of the 
    bunk beds have dead prisoner bodies on them.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Prisoner's Diary                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters enter the area with the bunk beds, look ahead and shoot   |
    | the pillow of the last bottom bed on the left to reveal this file.  There   |
    | is a body lying on the bed that is hanging halfway off of it.               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** on the floor as the characters turn to the left at 
    the end of the room.  A zombie will begin to bang on the window behind them and 
    get their attention.  A [ZOMBIE] will lurch out from the bunk area and the 
    characters will run into the back urinal area.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - On the floor to the left as the characters reach the end of 
    the bunk bed room.  They will turn to the left shortly before a zombie knocks 
    on the window to the right.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    As the characters turn back around, a [ZOMBIE] will move around the corner then 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will dash toward the characters from behind the first zombie. 
    Sounds of struggling will be heard as your controlled character turns around 
    and sees a [ZOMBIE] grappling your partner.  Blast the zombie off the partner 
    and the characters will step out of the urinal area and reenter the corridor 
    with bunk beds.
    
    A [ZOMBIE] will bust through the window behind the characters.  They will turn 
    around then turn back around as TWO [ZOMBIES] enter the bunk area from the mess 
    hall - these two will dash toward the characters quickly, so prepare to blast 
    them.  The characters will turn back toward the other zombie and back into the 
    mess hall again.
    
    == MESS HALL ==
    
    As the characters reenter the mess hall, a [ZOMBIE] will attack from the right 
    immediately, so prepare to blast him.  ONE [SPITTER ZOMBIE] will move through 
    the outside doorway and a [ZOMBIE] will get up from the tables in the center of 
    the room then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from the characters' right side.  
    The characters will hop over the table to the right and head to the small 
    corridor with the dead body on the back right side of the room.
    
    The three zombies near the tables will move toward the characters.  The one 
    that enters from the doorway will spit vomit as the characters turn to the 
    right, so be sure to kill him quickly.  ONE [ZOMBIE] will crawl out from 
    underneath the tables to join the rest.  The characters will eventually turn 
    around as a [ZOMBIE] rises behind them.  This zombie turns out to be Mickey - 
    one of Steve's friends.  Ok...
    
    The characters will turn back around and a [ZOMBIE] will attack immediately 
    after they turn then another [ZOMBIE] will step around the right corner.  One 
    of them was Antonio...  I hereby dub the unnamed zombie "Yuno" after a German 
    friend of mine.
    
    The characters will cautiously move toward the control room door and step 
    inside.  A cutscene will activate once the characters step toward the computer.
    
    Claire and Leon will begin to step back through the doorway of the control room 
    after the cutscene.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will bust through the door off to the right 
    in the control room and attack as the characters attempt to leave.  The 
    characters will turn around as zombies bang on the fenced wall near the 
    computer then your controlled characters will turn as a [ZOMBIE] grapples your 
    partner, so be prepared to blast it off.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Rockfort Island                                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the cutscene in the control room of the mess hall, your partner will  |
    | eventually get grabbed by a zombie as your controlled characters turns      |
    | around.  Quickly shoot the bulletin board off to the left behind the        |
    | zombie to reveal this file.                                                 |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    You have a choice of where to move here.  You can go out the back door by 
    pressing the Z button when the button command appears while highlighting the 
    door, or you can wait and allow the characters to reenter the mess hall (aka. 
    don't press the button).
    
      == BACK DOOR PATH ==
    
      A [ZOMBIE] will attack from the doorway that leads to the mess hall as a few 
      [ZOMBIES] roam the inside of the mess hall.  The characters will fall off 
      the broken walkway outside then turn on their flashlights.  Pick up the 
      **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** next to the dead body once the characters move around 
      the side of the building.
    
      -------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
      [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying near the dead body that is along the path 
      beside the building if the characters choose to move outside the back door.
      -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
      The characters will cautiously stare at the dead body as they move by it then 
      they will turn around as a [ZOMBIE DOG] rushes out from one of the holes 
      underneath the building to the side.  Blast him and another [ZOMBIE DOG] will 
      eventually move out from underneath the house.  The dead body will turn into 
      a [ZOMBIE] then stand up and move toward the characters.
    
      A single [ZOMBIE] will shuffle up ahead then the characters will turn and 
      round the right corner up ahead and be greeted by THREE [ZOMBIES].  The two 
      in front are very aggressive.
    
      == MESS HALL PATH ==
    
      The camera will scroll toward each of them as THREE [ZOMBIES] attack from off
      to the left.  The camera will zoom in again as TWO [ZOMBIES] attack from off 
      to the right near the exit door.  ONE [ZOMBIE] will step through the open 
      back door as the characters turn back while leaving.  They will step back 
      outside once again.
    
      TWO [ZOMBIES] will move toward the characters from the back path as they 
      leave. When they pass through the gate up ahead, a zombie dog will jump at 
      them from the right and startle the characters then TWO [ZOMBIE DOGS] will 
      attack afterwards.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will be shuffling near the wooden walkway 
      as the characters prepare to turn to the left and open the door that leads 
      back to the area outside the prison gates.
    
      THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack from the left as the characters step off the 
      wooden walkway.  The two front zombies attack fast.  When the characters turn
      back around a [ZOMBIE DOG] will rush out from under the left hole under the 
      building and attack then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE DOG] will rush out from the left 
      hole in the wall and attack.  As a zombie groans after the dogs are killed, 
      the characters will turn to the right as a [ZOMBIE] steps out from the mess 
      hall door.
    
      The characters will rush toward the exit door to this area then turn to the 
      left as TWO [ZOMBIES] walk toward them.  When the characters turn back to the
      left, TWO [ZOMBIES] will shuffle in the background.  The characters will exit
      the area and step through the door back out to the area outside the prison 
      gates.
    
    == OUTSIDE THE PRISON GATES ==
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will be surrounding the various areas nearby.  THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters turn toward the prison gate to the 
    right.  Grab the --GOLD-- off the back barrels.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will step 
    through the doorway of the prison area as the characters turn.  Be careful 
    since the characters will turn to the right afterward as a [ZOMBIE] rushes 
    straight toward them.  THREE more [ZOMBIES] will be behind the one that attacks 
    - one of them crawls out of the ground.  A [ZOMBIE] will appear from off to the 
    left as the characters move toward the prison gate also.  Your controlled 
    character will open the gate then both characters will step through.
    
    == BRIDGE ==
    
    A wrecked jeep with dead bodies surrounding it blocks the bridge ahead.  The 
    characters will move toward the jeep and notice a woman in a purple dress at 
    the top of the distant staircase.  She will begin to sing a creepy lullaby.
    
    After Claire mentions that they should chase after this woman, TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    will get up as the characters turn back toward the prison gate.  As the 
    characters back up a body will fall from up above.  Pick up the **SHOTGUN 
    AMMO** from off the ground as the characters look down at the dead body.  They 
    will turn back toward the jeep and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from behind.  When 
    the characters turn back around the body that fell from above will rise back up 
    and become a [ZOMBIE] then join the other two in moving toward the characters.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Once the body falls from the guard tower after the 
    characters turn to face the first two zombies on the bridge, grab this item 
    from the ground as the characters look down toward the fallen body.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Claire and Steve will move along the metal walkway to the left that extends 
    beside the bridge.  They will hear some screeches then turn and look around.  
    Pick up the --GOLD-- inside of the jeep as they look toward it.  A SWARM of 
    [BATS] will fly out from underneath the hole in the bridge then attack the 
    characters.  Slash at them with the knife to keep them from attacking the 
    characters.  These enemies hover in the air in front of the characters briefly 
    before they fly in and attack.
    
    The characters will eventually run toward the other side of the walkway then 
    step onto the bridge.  The bats will knock down your controlled character 
    shortly before leaving.  The characters will look toward the jeep in the middle 
    of the bridge and TWO [ZOMBIE DOGS] will leap over it and attack.  Now is the 
    perfect time to grab the gold in the jeep if you haven't gotten it yet.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Alexia's Song (Hard Mode)                            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the cutscene where Alexia sings while at the top of the stairs, shoot |
    | the ceiling light furthest away from the gate in the small tunnel in front  |
    | of the gate that the characters just moved through.  This light can ONLY be |
    | shot after the cutscene where Alexia sings.  It's easy to miss the light    |
    | while near it since the characters rarely look up at it.                    |
    |                                                                             |
    | It can be pinpointed and shot any time while the characters step past the   |
    | jeep. While the characters stare at the jeep and prepare to shoot the jeep, |
    | this light can be shot at that time too - the screen will zoom in a bit     |
    | allowing for better aim eventually.  Blast it with the rocket launcher or   |
    | linear launcher if needed and the explosion will stand a better chance at   |
    | hitting it.                                                                 |
    |                                                                             |
    | The light that must be shot is NOT the spotlight on the guard tower. The    |
    | light that must be shot is the furthest ceiling light away from the gate in |
    | the small tunnel area below the guard tower.                                |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The bats will eventually come back and attack the characters shortly after more 
    screeching is heard in the distance.  Slash with the knife to keep the bats 
    from damaging the characters.  Shoot the jeep when the characters look toward 
    it to subdue the bat swarm.  The characters will run up the stairs behind them 
    then the chapter will end.
    
    |******** Resident Evil: Code Veronica - Meeting with Alfred Ashford *********|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  2                [GO02] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |    "The revival of the Ashford family depends on your success, brother."    |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Mad (Easy)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Ceramic Vase
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : ID Card
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 3
    Unlockable Files: Alfred Ashford, Message to the New Family, Confession Letter, 
    The Ashford Family
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == PATH TO THE RESIDENCE ==
    
    Claire and Steve have just reached the top of the stairs and are looking for 
    the woman in the purple dress that they saw singing the lullaby earlier, 
    however she is nowhere in sight.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** near the 
    dead body to the right as the characters look toward it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying near the dead body off to the right at the 
    beginning of the chapter along the path to the residence.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After the characters survey the dead bodies around the area, the group of bats 
    from before will fly by and get their attention.  The characters will turn 
    around after watching the bats and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will be behind them.  Try to 
    get some quick headshots or just shoot the zombies normally for extra kills 
    since the characters will turn back around and dash toward the stairs up ahead.
    
    The bats will swoop down and attack so slash at them with the knife or use the 
    handgun to shoot the ones that hover in the air before they attack.  The 
    characters will turn back around eventually as FOUR [ZOMBIES] move toward them. 
    You'll have more of a chance for headshots against this group than the last but 
    the characters will still eventually turn and run up the stairs then open the 
    gate.
    
    == OUTSIDE THE RESIDENCE ==
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will be off to the immediate left when the characters turn.  The 
    one on the right will dash toward the characters, so prepare to blast him to 
    stop his attack.  Pick up the --GOLD-- on the pedestal as the characters walk 
    toward the steps that lead up to the residence.  TWO [ZOMBIE DOGS] will appear 
    in the distance and TWO MORE [ZOMBIE DOGS] will appear off to the left as the 
    characters turn in that direction.  The characters won't waste anytime in 
    scrambling toward the residence door.  They frantically run toward that door to 
    get the hell inside, actually.
    
    == FRONT LOBBY ==
    
    Collect the **GREEN HERB** off of the front desk as the characters step through 
    the front doors.  There is also some --GOLD-- behind the front desk.  It's a 
    bit hard to see the gold pickup at the moment, but the characters will walk 
    behind the desk soon.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Alfred Ashford (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | There is a small vase on a table in the front lobby that must be shot to    |
    | reveal this file.  The vase is lying against the wall behind the front      |
    | desk. It can be seen much more easily as the characters move toward the     |
    | locked door off to the left behind the front desk.  It's pretty hard to hit |
    | since it's so small and thin.                                               |
    |                                                                             |
    | This vase can be shot during the fight with Alfred also. While the          |
    | characters take cover behind the first pillar at the beginning of the       |
    | fight, you can see the vase against the wall.                               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the front desk as the characters first enter the 
    front lobby of the residence.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** off the floor as the characters look behind 
    the front desk.  After examining the door and finding out that it is locked, 
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from off to the right as the characters turn.  
    Quickly shoot them as they dash toward the characters.  Pick up the **CROSSBOW 
    AMMO** near the dead body in front of the entrance as the character move around 
    the side pillars.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will block the characters' path toward the 
    stairs as they head that way.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the floor behind the front desk.  The 
    characters will look to the right when they walk by the desk. Quickly grab the 
    ammo right then.
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - On the floor next to a body near the bottom of the stairs 
    in front of the lobby entrance.  This can be collected as the characters move 
    away from the locked door and head for the stairs.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Footsteps will be heard as some person runs along the second floor above.  The 
    characters will move up the stairs to check out the noise.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Message to the New Family                            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | This can be done in several areas since the upper middle area is constantly |
    | visible.  Shoot the hanging light to the left of the picture of Alexia on   |
    | the second floor walkway in the front lobby to reveal this file.            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The partner will notice the big picture on middle wall of the second floor.  It 
    is a picture of Alexia Ashford, who died 15 years ago, yet... she resembles the 
    same person that was singing the lullaby earlier.  Creepy.  The characters will 
    examine the picture and talk about it for a while as they stare up it.  Some 
    crazy laughter will call their attention toward the door up the stairs off to 
    the right.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Confession Letter                                    |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters look off to the right or as they climb the steps to the |
    | right after examining the picture of Alexia on the second floor, shoot the  |
    | second painting on the right wall at the top of the steps to reveal this    |
    | file.  Facing the right wall, the painting is to the left.                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will walk up the stairs.  Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** off to the 
    right once they move past the railing.  They will stand and look toward the 
    dead bodies on the floor then open up the door to the room on the right.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - This is lying on the floor up the stairs and to the right 
    of the picture of Alexia on the second floor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == MUSIC ROOM ==
    
    Wow, so much to collect!  Grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the sofa, the **GREEN 
    HERB** on the table, the --GOLD-- on the right sofa and the **FIRST AID SPRAY** 
    off the music box against the wall to the left.  The characters will notice a 
    music box on the left wall then notice that the coffee on the table is still 
    warm as if someone was just in the room.  A film reel will start to play as the 
    characters look on.  Ah yes, the ole' dragonfly abuse clip!  The characters 
    will step back out into the hall afterwards.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> The Ashford Family                                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the only light on the left wall of the Music Box Room to reveal this  |
    | file.  The light will be off to the right and in perfect view while the     |
    | characters watch the film reel of Alexia and Alfred as they torture a       |
    | dragonfly.                                                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the table as the characters enter the second floor 
    room.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying on the left sofa as the characters enter the second 
    floor room.
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on the music box off to the left as the characters 
    enter the second floor room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == FRONT LOBBY ==
    
    Once the characters step back through the door, TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack from 
    off to the right.  The characters will walk down the stairs and move toward the 
    front entrance then a cutscene will play.
    
    After the cutscene, the characters will take cover from Alfred as he tries to 
    fire at them with his sniper rifle after the cutscene.  This battle is kind of 
    like a boss fight, but not really a true boss fight.  It doesn't last that long 
    at all and it plays out in a short sequence.
    
    The characters will start to duck behind the current pillar as Alfred fires at 
    them.  They will look out from behind the pillar toward the second floor but 
    Alfred will not be in sight, so they will quickly run behind the left pillar.
    
    After they look out from behind the pillar again, prepare to press the on-
    screen button command that appears in order to dodge Alfred's sniper shot as he 
    steps out in view from behind the second floor railing.  The characters will 
    take cover behind the front desk.  When they look up toward the second floor 
    again, Alfred will move back and forth between the railing and the wall.  He 
    will eventually stand in front of the railing and aim his rifle at the 
    characters.  Shoot him with the handgun at that time.
    
    The characters will rush toward the stairs, but Alfred will try to shoot them 
    so they will take cover behind the front of the front desk.  As they look up, 
    shoot at Alfred while he is at the top of the stairs.  He will block the shots 
    with his rifle then step back behind the pillar at the top of the stairs then 
    dash toward the door above.  His footsteps will fade away as the characters 
    rush up the stairs.  No one calls Steve a rat, you bastard - come back here!
    
    Alfred will be nowhere in sight.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will be behind the characters 
    when they turn away from the steps.  Blast the first as he dashes then be wary 
    of the spitter zombies in the back.  Blast his vomit then try to go for a 
    headshot on him.  Alfred will talk to the characters over the intercom as they 
    stand on the second floor staircase.  He will tell them to go to the Training 
    Facility for their next challenge.  The characters will move down the stairs 
    and exit the building.
    
    == OUTSIDE THE RESIDENCE ==
    
    As the characters open the doors, THREE [ZOMBIES] will be lurching toward them 
    at the bottom of the steps ahead.  The characters will hop over the railing to 
    the left and run to the gate on the left side.  They will turn back around and 
    look at the TWO [ZOMBIES] behind them then turn back toward the gate as TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] stumble toward them.  Go for headshots on the two in front of the 
    gate.  A HORDE OF [ZOMBIES] will be in front of the residence as the characters 
    turn back toward the building.  They will run through the doorway and down the 
    steps.
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** near the wooden box as the characters look to the 
    left after moving down the stairs.  The characters will look over to the right 
    and spot some type of creature that stares at them from a ledge above.  The 
    creature will hop down then run along the residence path toward them.  TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters turn back around.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - As the characters look off to the left after moving down the 
    steps after passing through the gate shortly after leaving the residence, this 
    will be near a wooden crate.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The creature from before will stand on the wall above the gate as the 
    characters turn then it will leap down onto the path below the stairs and face 
    the characters.  It can't be damaged when it first lands, but almost 
    immediately after it screams blast this [HUNTER II] with the shotgun.  TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] will move toward the doorway above the steps after the Hunter falls. 
    The characters will turn and run along the path ahead.
    
    FOUR [ZOMBIES] will block the character's path toward the end.  ONE [ZOMBIE] 
    will get up from the ground to the right after the first four are defeated and 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will move around the left corner.  The characters will turn 
    back around and TWO [ZOMBIES] will dash at them from behind.  Be prepared to 
    shoot while turning.  As the characters turn back around TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] 
    will attack.  The characters will look onto the wall to the right and a [HUNTER 
    II] will be staring at them from above then it will hop down in front of them 
    and attack, so have the shotgun ready to blast it.  The characters will run 
    toward the door that leads to the training field then the chapter will end.
    
    |*********** Resident Evil: Code Veronica - The Training Facility ************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  3                [GO03] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                   "Your knight in shining armor is here!"                   |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Father and Son (Easy), Trainee Zombie 
    (Normal), Black Widow (Normal), Father Zombie (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Gulp Worm, Door Knob
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : King Ant Object
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 4
    Unlockable Files: Secretary's Notes, Veronica Ashford, Message Written on a 
    Wall in the Training Facility
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == OUTSIDE THE TRAINING FACILITY ==
    
    Claire and Steve will survey the area outside of the Training Facility, 
    thinking that Alfred might be nearby somewhere.  The characters will eventually 
    look toward the double doors of the Training Facility then step inside.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Secretary's Notes                                    |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the light above the double doors that lead inside of the Training     |
    | Facility to reveal this file.                                               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    == FRONT LOBBY ==
    
    Grab the **GREEN HERB** on the seat to the left as the characters enter the 
    front lobby.  Alfred will speak to the characters over the intercom before long 
    then the characters will move to the back corridor.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Veronica Ashford                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the control panel on the wall in the back of the dark front lobby of  |
    | the Training Facility.  It's off to the right on the back wall as three     |
    | Black Widow spiders attack the characters.                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the seat to the left as the characters open the 
    double doors to the front lobby of the Training Facility.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The lights in the front lobby will all go out and the characters will be left 
    in the dark as they look down the right corridor.  The characters will look 
    around the room then one of the pay phones on the sidewall will ring.
    
    The characters will eventually turn back around as FOUR [BLACK WIDOW] spiders 
    attack.  Two of them will be on the ceiling, one will be in the floor and one 
    will move out of the corridor.  You can toss a grenade to help out here, but 
    shooting them with the submachine gun or shotgun will work just fine.
    
    As the characters move down the corridor to the right, THREE [ZOMBIES] will 
    attack them from behind as they turn.  The two bodies near the door down the 
    hall will turn into TWO [ZOMBIES] and they will stagger toward the characters. 
    FOUR [ZOMBIES] will chase the characters from behind as the characters will 
    turn and quickly open the door then move outside.
    
    == OUTSIDE STAIRWAY ==
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** off to the right as the characters look toward the 
    metal barrels to the right.  The characters will move toward the stairs then a 
    laser will get their attention as Alfred tries to shoot them from the top of 
    the stairs.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying against some metal barrels to the right as the 
    characters step to the outside stairway from the front lobby.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will take cover behind the stack of metal crates.  As the 
    characters look out from behind the stack of crates, point up toward the 
    railing up above and wait for Alfred to rise up and aim.  He will raise up from 
    behind random areas of the railing.  Only his head and shoulders will be 
    visible as he prepares to shoot with his sniper rifle.  Quickly shoot him 
    before he shoots the characters.  You have to be really quickly with both your 
    aiming and the shot since he will fire very quickly.  You might want to use the 
    submachine gun.
    
    After he is hit once, the characters will duck back behind the crates.  They 
    will move over toward the bottom of the stairs then look up toward the railing. 
    Once again, shoot Alfred when he rises up from behind the railing.  Be quick! 
    After one shot, he will go back to hiding then suddenly toss a grenade down at 
    the characters.  Quickly press the on-screen button command in order to dodge 
    the grenade explosion after it lands.
    
    Alfred will run off to the right as the characters run up the stairs after him. 
    He will escape through the nearby door.  Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** inside the 
    groove in the railing as the characters turn to the right.  The characters will 
    open the nearby door on the right side of the walkway.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Lying in the groove on the railing off to the right once 
    the characters reach the top walkway of the outside stairway after Alfred runs 
    away.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == HALLWAY WITH SODA MACHINE ==
    
    As the characters step into the hall, TWO [ZOMBIES] will move toward them from 
    up ahead.  Grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** off the top of the soda machine in the 
    back of the hall then take the --GOLD-- from the bottom of the soda machine.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on top of the soda machine in the hallway.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Glass will break in the back of the characters as a [HUNTER II] jumps into the 
    hallway.  Take out the shotgun or the grenade launcher or submachine gun and 
    blast the Hunter.  When the characters turn back around, ANOTHER [HUNTER II] 
    will step out from around the right corner in the room ahead.  They will turn 
    back around as TWO [HUNTER II's] move toward them from the back hallway.  The 
    characters will run toward the door then haul ass into the next room.
    
    == STAIRWAY ==
    
    Grab the **GREEN HERB** from off to the left near the railing as the characters 
    examine the room.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** and the **GRENADE 
    LAUNCHER AMMO** on the bottom floor near some dead bodies as the characters 
    look off the walkway.  Alfred will speak to the characters over the intercom 
    shortly.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near the railing of the top walkway off to the left 
    after the characters enter the next room after escaping the Hunters.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the bottom floor of the stairway area as the 
    characters survey the bottom floor from the top walkway.
    [ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Lying on the bottom floor of the stairway area as 
    the characters survey the bottom floor from the top walkway.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Grab the --GOLD-- on the left set of barrels as the characters move down the 
    stairs.  While stepping near the door, the characters will hear a moan from 
    behind and TWO [ZOMBIES] will get up and move toward them.  Claire and Steve 
    will turn back toward the door then look up toward the top railing as a new 
    creature hops down and prepares to attack them.  This is a [BANDERSNATCH]. It 
    will attack by slapping the characters with its right arm.  Blast it with a 
    shotgun a few times to kill it.  Haha, not a problem for ole' Stevo!  The 
    characters will move toward the door and open it.
    
    == PLATFORM ELEVATOR ==
    
    The characters will step toward the elevator.  Soon a [BANDERSNATCH] will leap 
    through a high window off to the right.  Blast it with the shotgun.  Alfred 
    will talk to the characters over the intercom and Steve will boast back at him. 
    The elevator platform will take the characters to the bottom floor.  The 
    characters will step through the door with eye markings on it.
    
    == KILL HOUSE ENTRANCE ==
    
    The characters will see the entrance to Kill House as they step into the room. 
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** off to the left as the characters look toward the 
    left side of the building.  Alfred will begin to speak to the characters over 
    the intercom as they survey the room.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on a metal barrel off to the left as the characters 
    examine the area in front of Kill House.  The characters will look toward this 
    as Alfred speaks to them.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will step through the entrance doorway to Kill House.  Notice 
    the target up on the wall to the right up ahead.  It will move out in front of 
    the characters shortly.  The [TARGET] has a bulls-eye on the top right of it.  
    Shoot the bulls-eye to keep the target from shooting the characters.  Once the 
    bulls-eye is shot, the target will move back toward the wall.  If the red skull 
    on the target is shot, then the target will automatically shoot.  The big blue 
    portion of each target is only a distraction - hitting it does nothing.  You 
    have to be quick and aim quick then fire at the bulls-eye to cancel each 
    target's attack.
    
    After stopping the target, the characters will cautiously step through each of 
    the next two doorways while in a shooting stance.  The characters will move 
    down the right corridor after going through the second door then a [TARGET] 
    will move out of the wall and attack.  Shoot the bulls-eye on the head portion 
    of the target.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will be moving out of the doorway to the right as 
    the characters enter the room down the hall then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up 
    off the floor to the left.
    
    Pick up the **MAGNUM AMMO** as the characters step into the next room. A 
    [TARGET] will appear at the window as the characters move through the doorway 
    off to the side.  The bulls-eye is on the top right portion of the target. The 
    characters will rush to the end of the hall then have a choice of two paths.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - Lying in the room that is past the first three zombies that 
    the characters fight in Kill House.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    FIRST BRANCHING PATH
    
    == RIGHT PATH ==
    
    The characters will turn back around as a zombie bangs on a window behind them. 
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will walk toward the characters off to the left in the corridor 
    outside.  The [ZOMBIE] outside the window will bust through the window and fall 
    to the floor then get up and attack.  The characters will back toward the right 
    doorway then run down the corridor and make a left through the doorway at the 
    end.
    
    A [TARGET] will appear to the left as the characters turn to face it as it 
    beeps.  The bulls-eye is on the bottom left of this target.  Directly 
    afterward, the characters will turn to the right doorway and as a [TARGET] 
    appears.  This one's bulls-eye is on the top left.
    
    == LEFT PATH ==
    
    The characters will look through the right doorway as they step toward the left 
    doorway.  They will eventually turn toward the left doorway and TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    will attack.  A [ZOMBIE] will bust through the window through the doorway 
    behind the characters.  After stepping into the left room, TWO [ZOMBIES] will 
    attack the characters.
    
    The characters will step into the next room then turn to the left.  They will 
    turn around and move through the doorway in the back of them as they start to 
    feel lost.
    
    **PATHS MEET HERE**
    
    The characters will make their way to a ladder in a room up ahead.  While 
    walking up to the ladder, they will jump to the side as two barrels fall down 
    from above.  Alfred will speak to the characters over the intercom.
    
    The characters will move through the doorway at the top then look through the 
    doorway to the left.  They will rush to the end of the next hall then turn and 
    face the doorway to the left and look down the corridor.  Arm a submachine gun 
    quickly since the characters will turn around as a [TARGET] appear in the 
    window behind them.  This one has three bulls-eyes on its top portion so spray 
    rapid fire with the submachine gun on the top portion of the target to hit all 
    three bulls-eyes.
    
    As Steve starts to yell more at Alfred the characters will turn and face TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] that will move down the hall at them.  Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** 
    off to the right as the characters enter the room down the corridor while 
    Alfred speaks to them.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying along the wall in the room down the hall to the right 
    after the characters defeat two zombies that block the way shortly after a 
    target with three bulls-eyes appears in a nearby window.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Now the characters will have a choice of two paths once again.
    
    == RIGHT PATH ==
    
    The characters will rush through the room and the corridor to the right then 
    look out the doorway at the end.
    
    == LEFT PATH ==
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will step into view from around the left corner of the right 
    doorway.  Try to get headshots on both of them as the characters move toward 
    the left doorway.  When the characters turn around, TWO [ZOMBIES] will rush at 
    them from behind as Alfred speaks over the intercom.  The zombie on the right 
    will dash at the characters first then the zombie on the left will dash at the 
    characters, so be prepared to fire at their bodies with the handgun to stop 
    their dashing.
    
    The partner will shoot a zombie behind the controlled character as the 
    character turns back around.  The characters will move to the next doorway. 
    After stepping into the next room, they will look toward the right doorway then 
    turn to the left and rush to the end of the next corridor then look out the 
    doorway to the right.
    
    **BOTH PATHS MEET HERE**
    
    The characters will move down a ladder then turn around and face TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    that rush down the corridor at them.  After seeing a "You Dead" phrase on the 
    ceiling, the characters will turn to the right and move through the doorway.  
    They will turn to the left and see the exit door at the end with a "Goal!!" 
    phrase above it.
    
    As the characters approach the door, a [TARGET] with bulls-eyes on the bottom 
    middle portion, bottom right and top right will move in front of the ceiling so 
    be prepared to shoot the bulls-eyes on it.  Pick up the **ROCKET LAUNCHER 
    AMMO** lying on the crate to the right as the characters exit Kill House.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Rocket Launcher - Lying on top of a crate to the right as the characters 
    exit Kill House.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == OUTSIDE KILL HOUSE ==
    
    While the characters move toward the boxes, a [ZOMBIE] will QUICKLY attack from 
    around the right crate.  ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will crawl over a crate to the left 
    and the characters will back away as a [ZOMBIE] attacks from off to the left. 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will step into view off to the right.  Try to go for headshots 
    after the characters back away from them.
    
    When the characters reach the elevator door, TWO [ZOMBIE DOGS] will attack from 
    off to the left then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE DOG] will eventually hop into the area and 
    join them.  After Steve yells out to Alfred much like Kratos bitching at gods 
    in God of War, the characters will push aside the elevator shutter and step 
    inside the elevator then ride it to the top floor.
    
    == CORRIDOR OUTSIDE ELEVATOR ==
    
    Be prepared to blast the [ZOMBIE] that gets up as the characters open the 
    elevator shutter.  It attacks much quicker than one would expect.  ANOTHER 
    [ZOMBIE] will step around the left corner afterwards.  The characters will step 
    toward the door off to the left then look back at the dead zombies.  TWO [BLACK 
    WIDOWS] will attack near the door as the characters turn back around.
    
    ANOTHER [BLACK WIDOW] will be in front of the elevator doors as the characters 
    turn back to the left.  Grab the **GREEN HERB** in front of the elevator doors. 
    Steve will yell a bit then the characters will leave the corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - In front of the elevator doors as the characters turn to the 
    left to face a third Black Widow spider in the corridor outside the elevator.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == AREA WITH JEEP ==
    
    As the characters look off the walkway to the right, quickly grab the 
    **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** lying on the metal barrel below.  A FEW [ZOMBIES] can 
    be seen below as the characters move along the walkway and look down.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Message Written on the Wall in the Training Facility |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters look off the top wooden walkway and stare down toward the |
    | jeep in the area with the jeep, shoot the green case on the table next to   |
    | the jeep to reveal this file.  It can be shot after the characters fall     |
    | from the walkway also.  You can shoot it while the characters face off      |
    | against the final wave of four zombies if you shoot to the immediate left   |
    | while fighting them.                                                        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Eventually the characters will reach a portion of the wooden walkway that will 
    fall out from underneath them and they will land on the bottom floor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on a metal barrel near the exit door of the 
    bottom floor in the area with the jeep.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will get up and face THREE [ZOMBIES].  Your main enemy in this 
    area is the camera however.  The camera will shake quite a bit while the 
    zombies move toward the characters.  The characters will run toward the jeep, 
    so you'll have a better chance at hitting the zombies.  The characters will 
    eventually turn and face THREE [ZOMBIES].  The one on the left is a spitter 
    zombie.
    
    The characters will look up toward TWO [ZOMBIES] that roam the overhead walkway 
    as they walk ahead then they will turn to the left.  Grab the --GOLD-- on the 
    back crate.  A [ZOMBIE] will fall and hit the ground behind them and so will 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE].  The characters will turn once again and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will 
    attack.
    
    After walking toward the exit door, if you're playing Claire, then she will get 
    grabbed from behind by a [ZOMBIE] but if you're playing Steve then Claire will 
    get grabbed as Steve turns.  While playing Steve, you'll need to shoot the 
    zombie off Claire.  While playing Claire, Steve will hesitate then shoot the 
    zombie off of Claire.  A cutscene will occur afterwards.
    
    The characters will exit the area with the jeep after the cutscene.
    
    == TANK AREA ==
    
    Alfred will talk to the characters over the intercom once they step through the 
    doors.  Grab the **GREEN HERB** on the stack of crates to the left after the 
    characters look toward the doors.  Rumbling will eventually be heard as 
    something moves toward the characters.  Something will burrow under the ground 
    and head right by the characters.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on top of the stack of crates to the left while the 
    characters talk to Alfred as they stand in front of the tank.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Gulp Worm
    
    Weak Point: Inside of Mouth
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Bite: Gulp Worm opens its mouth wide while standing up then lashes forward and 
    tries to bite the characters.  Shoot him in the mouth to cancel this attack.  
    He will do this while he is above ground and sometimes, he will quickly move 
    out from underground then perform this attack.
    
    Explosive Barrel Toss: As Gulp Worm surfaces near the tank, it will grab an 
    explosive barrel in its mouth then hurl it toward the characters.  Shoot the 
    explosive barrel while it is in his mouth to damage the Gulp Worm or blast the 
    explosive barrel in the air as it is thrown to avoid taking damage.
    
    Falling Bite: Gulp Worm will hop into the air as it surfaces then fall down 
    toward the characters and try to bite them.  Fire at its mouth as it falls to 
    cancel the attack.
    
    ---
    
    -- GULP WORM EMERGES
    
    The Gulp Worm will emerge from the ground in front of the characters as they 
    continue to watch in shock.  Blast it in the mouth with the submachine gun or 
    shotgun as it opens its mouth.  It's health will fall fast from the slightest 
    rapid fire, but it will not die from lowered health the first few times.  This 
    boss will not die until a few scripted events have occurred.
    
    Gulp Worm's main attack is to bite the characters while above ground.  It will 
    open its mouth wide then quickly move forward and bite.  Blast it in the mouth 
    to cancel this attack.  It will do this above ground and sometimes it will 
    burrow under ground then quickly surface and perform the attack.
    
    Gulp Worm will move back under the ground once its life has been drained to 
    25%.  The characters will walk forward then they will eventually turn as the 
    Gulp Worm starts to burrow around them.  It will emerge from the ground once 
    again then roar and move back under the ground then burrow some more.
    
    The burrowing will stop and it will remain out of sight for a while then 
    suddenly surface from behind the nearby concrete wall and jump at the 
    characters.  Your controlled character will automatically leap out of the way. 
    The Gulp Worm will try to bite after surfacing then it will burrow back under 
    the ground and move toward the tank.
    
    -- GULP WORM PLAYS "CATCH"
    
    It will surface near the tank then grab an explosive barrel in its mouth then 
    toss it toward the characters. Shoot the explosive barrel while the Gulp Worm 
    holds it in its mouth to damage him a bit.  If not, then blast the explosive 
    barrel as it flies toward the characters to avoid taking damage.  Shoot the 
    Gulp Worm in the mouth like before to quickly drain its health.  It will still 
    not die just yet.  It will burrow back under the ground.
    
    -- GULP WORM TRIES TO BITE AGAIN
    
    It will burrow toward the characters then surface behind them and roar.  It 
    will try for a few bite attacks once again.  Blast it in the mouth to drain its 
    health and make it burrow back up under the ground once again.
    
    Gulp Work will surface and resurface then try to bite the characters some more. 
    Shoot it only to cancel its attack.  Steve will eventually say, "How the hell 
    did he train that thing!"  The Gulp Worm will eventually surface then hop into 
    the air and fall down toward the characters then try to bite them.  Shoot it in 
    the mouth as it falls to cancel this attack.
    
    -- NO RODRIGO MEALS FOR YOU!
    
    Eventually, Claire will say:
    
    "It's gone under again.  Where is it?"
    
    The Gulp Worm will surface shortly afterward and try to bite the characters 
    some more.  Blast the Gulp Worm to drain its health this time and it will fall 
    for good.  Blast it with the shotgun.  Each blast will cause the worm to raise 
    its front end upward.  It won't even attack if you keep blasting it 
    periodically.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |************ Resident Evil: Code Veronica - The Ashford Mansion *************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  4                [GO04] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |             "'Welcome to my parlor' said the spider to the fly!"            |
    |                          "How do you wish to die?"                          |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: The Truth (Easy), Hunter II (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Queen Ant Object
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Music Box Record
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 5
    Unlockable Files: Secret Passage Note, Newspaper Clipping, Music Box
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == OUTSIDE THE RESIDENCE ==
    
    Claire and Steve have just gotten back from the Training Field and are now 
    headed back toward the residence.  They will move up the stairs toward the path 
    in front of the residence then walk toward the front doors.  The partner will 
    call out to your main character then point up at the ceiling that stretches 
    above the entrance doors.
    
    As your controlled character looks up, a SWARM OF [BATS] will be hanging from 
    the ceiling and they will dive down as your character dodges to the side.  
    Blast them with the handgun and knife slash them if they ever start to group up 
    too much.  Toss some grenades at the bats when the characters back toward the 
    door to rack up on kills.  The characters will eventually open the front doors 
    and run into the front lobby of the residence.
    
    == FRONT LOBBY ==
    
    Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** on the left side of the front counter as the 
    characters dash into the center of the lobby.  THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack from 
    off to the right eventually as the characters turn toward the bottom of the 
    stairs.  Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the floor to the right when the 
    characters turn toward them.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Lying on the left side of the front desk in the front 
    lobby of the residence as the characters enter.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the floor to the right of the first three 
    zombies that attack.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will hear a gunshot from upstairs.  They will move toward the 
    staircase, but a [HUNTER II] will leap in front of them.  Blast the Hunter with 
    the shotgun.  FIVE [ZOMBIES] will attack from behind as the characters turn.  
    One of them will crawl over the front counter while attempting to reach the 
    characters.  The characters will begin to climb the stairs and look back down 
    at the zombies below.
    
    After climbing the stairs, the characters will hear a Hunter near the set of 
    stairs to the right then slowly move around the corner.  Be sure to have the 
    submachine gun ready as the characters watch the Hunter jump past them then 
    turn to face it since the [HUNTER II] will jump straight toward them from 
    behind.  Blast it out of the air to avoid damage.
    
    == MUSIC BOX ROOM ==
    
    Grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the right sofa and the **FIRST AID SPRAY** on the 
    table as the characters enter the room.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - On the right sofa as the characters enter the Music Box 
    Room.
    [ ] First Aid Spray - On the center table as the characters enter the Music Box 
    Room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn toward the large music box on the right side of the 
    room.  A puzzle will activate as the music box turns on.  All you have to do is 
    shoot the enemies that block the boy's path to the girl on each level.  Start 
    out by shooting the piranha on the first level then shoot the knight at the end 
    of the second level and then shoot the bear that blocks the boy and girl on the 
    top level.  Don't shoot the boy or the girl or the characters will have to 
    start from the beginning.
    
    Once the boy and girl meet, the music box will slide to the right and reveal a 
    hidden passage behind the wall.  Once the characters walk toward the doorway, 
    grab the --GOLD-- in the left corner as your controlled character looks to the 
    left.  The characters will move into the corridor behind the doorway.  A sound 
    of glass breaking in the room behind them will make them turn back around.  A 
    [BANDERSNATCH] will move through the doorway, so take out the shotgun and blast 
    him.  The characters will open the door at the end of the corridor after the 
    Bandersnatch is defeated.
    
    == BRIDGE ==
    
    The characters will run along the bridge up ahead.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will stand in 
    their path up ahead then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will get up as the first two fall. 
    The back zombies on the left has some goggles on that protect his head, so 
    you'll have to blast off the goggles then blast his head for a critical 
    headshot.  It's much like the hard hat zombies in Operation Javier.  These 
    zombies also have dynamite strapped to their chest that can be shot to 
    instantly kill them along with the zombies that surround them in an explosion.
    
    The characters will eventually turn as a [BANDERSNATCH] stands behind them.  
    The Bandersnatch will hop onto the roof hanging over the bridge.  It will 
    eventually fall in front of the characters as they turn, so prepare to blast it 
    with the shotgun.  ANOTHER [BANDERSNATCH] will hop in front of the characters 
    as they near the end of the bridge.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Secret Passage Note                                  |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters step toward the end of the bridge, a Bandersnatch will    |
    | leap in front of them.  Notice the six stone lion heads on the right and    |
    | left walls behind the Bandersnatch.  Shoot the first lion head on the left  |
    | side to reveal this file.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    == PATH TO THE ASHFORD MANSION ==
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** as the characters reach the top of the stairs at the 
    end of the bridge.  A stone statue will be facing the characters as they climb 
    the second set of stairs.  Pick up the --GOLD-- inside of one of the grooves in 
    the stone wall up ahead as the characters reach the top of the stairs.  A 
    familiar voice will speak to the characters as they survey the area.  He will 
    refer to Claire as "Chris' little sister".
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying to the left along the stairs that lead upward at the end 
    of the bridge.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will get distracted by a moan and they will turn and stare at a 
    dead body as they move around the right corner of the area.  Be ready to blast 
    the [ZOMBIE] that attacks right after the characters step around the corner.  
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will step around the side and join him.  The characters will walk 
    toward a dead body slumped against the wall up ahead and the [ZOMBIE] will 
    quickly lunge at them, so be ready to blast it.  The characters will turn back 
    around and THREE [ZOMBIES] will move toward them.
    
    A group of THREE [ZOMBIES] will be spotted by the characters near the stairs 
    that they previously move up, so the characters will rush up the next set of 
    stairs then look back down as THREE [ZOMBIES] move toward the bottom of the 
    stairs.  The characters will head toward the doors of the mansion and open them 
    after a brief conversation and surveying of the Ashford estate mansion.
    
    == FRONT ROOM ==
    
    After surveying the room, the characters will look up toward the large doll 
    hanging up above.  A [BANDERSNATCH] will drop down to the right from up above 
    and attack the characters so take out the shotgun and blast it.  ANOTHER 
    [BANDERSNATCH] will drop from near the staircase and attack.  The characters 
    will rush up the stairs and ANOTHER [BANDERSNATCH] will hop in front of them 
    from the bottom floor.
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** on the table on the top floor past the railing as 
    the characters look toward it after surveying the bottom floor.  TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    will attack as the characters turn to the left.  The front zombie with goggles 
    moves fast, so be prepared to shoot him to avoid his attack.  The characters 
    will stare down at a Bandersnatch on the bottom floor then quickly run up the 
    next set of stairs.  The [BANDERSNATCH] from the bottom floor will hop to the 
    top floor and block their path then a second [BANDERSNATCH] will hop up to the 
    top floor after the first is killed.  The characters will move toward the door 
    at the top then open it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on a small table on the top floor in the front room of 
    the Ashford Estate.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == BEDROOM CORRIDOR ==
    
    After the characters step into the corridor and turn to the left then look down 
    the corridor, they will turn and THREE [ZOMBIES] will move toward them from 
    behind.  Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the left sofa as the characters 
    turn to look down the left hall when Alfred begins to speak.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Newspaper Clipping                                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters look down the left corridor after stepping through the  |
    | door on the top floor of the Ashford Estate, shoot the stack of books next  |
    | to the candle on the table against the left wall.  The characters will give |
    | you plenty of time to do this after the three zombies attack from the right |
    | side of the corridor.                                                       |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the sofa along the left side of the hall as 
    the characters look down the corridor while Alfred speaks with Alexia.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will duck below the window while moving by it as Alexia and 
    Alfred speak in the nearby bedroom.  They will move around the side of the 
    corner then open the door to Alexia's room.
    
    == ALEXIA'S ROOM ==
    
    The characters will dash inside of Alexia's room and secure the area.  Alexia 
    and Alfred are nowhere in sight though.  Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** propped 
    up against the desk in the back of the room.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Propped up against the back desk as the characters step 
    inside of Alexia's room from the outside corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A hidden passage is hidden somewhere in this room.  The characters will scan 
    the area for the hidden passage as the record plays to the right.  Shoot the 
    record to break it.  The characters will stare over at the record player often.
    
    In order to reveal the hidden passage, point the cursor at the record in the 
    record player and blast it with the handgun.  The camera will zoom in to the 
    record player per shot fired.  Keep shooting at the record as the camera zooms 
    in and out and the eyes of the indented statue on the walls in front of the 
    characters will glow red eventually.  Shoot the glowing eyes of the statue.  
    The top of the bed to the left will slide down and reveal a ladder.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Music Box (Hard mode)                                |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters look toward the music box while searching for the       |
    | hidden passage in Alexia's Room, shoot the record in the music box to       |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    == TOY ROOM ==
    
    The characters will climb up to a room with a carousel in the middle.  Grab the 
    **GREEN HERB** on the dresser with the blue teddy bear on it.  As the lights 
    turn on and the carousel activates, grab the --GOLD-- in the right case on the 
    right side of the room.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on a dresser with a blue teddy bear on it off to the 
    right as the characters look around the carousel room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Soon a laser will be seen coming from the other side of carousel as it points 
    against your partner.  Your partner will aim and look toward the carousel and 
    Alexia will be standing near the middle of the carousel.  She will speak with 
    the characters then move behind the central portion of the carousel.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Alexia Ashford
    
    Weak Point: Any portion of her body
    
    This fight is much like the fights with Alfred.  You'll need to shot Alexia 
    when she moves out from behind the central pillar of the carousel.  She will 
    always move out briefly first then step back behind the carousel shortly before 
    she steps out to shoot.  Sometimes one of the carousel horses will block her 
    briefly but you can always hit her after they move by.  The majority of the 
    time, she will step out briefly then step back behind the pillar shortly before 
    stepping out to fire.
    
    Shoot at her with the submachine gun every time that she steps out to aim her 
    rifle at the characters.  The rapid fire will keep you from getting hit and hit 
    her much easier than the handgun.  This isn't really much of a boss battle like 
    the battles with Alfred.  In fact, Alexia is much easier to fight than Alfred 
    since she will always moves out from the back pillar and she will have to 
    reveal herself nearly in full view just to shoot the characters unlike Alfred 
    when he fought the characters.  After shooting her three times, the battle will 
    end.
    
    The only hard factor about this battle is that Alexia takes off quite a bit of 
    health with her rifle if she manages to hit the characters.  Don't give her the 
    chance to shoot and you'll beat her easily.  She takes quite a while to get 
    into position, so you'll likely shoot her before she shoots the characters.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |************* Resident Evil: Code Veronica - Escaping Rockfort **************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  5                [GO05] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |      "There was a friendly, but naive King who wed a very nasty Queen.      |
    |                The King was loved, but the Queen was feared."               |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Pursuit (Easy), Bandersnatch (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Tyrant (T-103 Mass Produced Type), Airport Key
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Control Lever
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 6
    Unlockable Files: Butler's Letter, HUNK's Report, Alexander Ashford
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    NOTE 1: This chapter is very fast-paced.  Try to avoid reloading your shotgun 
    as much as possible until all enemies in the area are finished off.  If a 
    player gets caught reloading while an enemy is on the screen, prepare to suffer 
    some damage.
    
    NOTE 2: BE SURE to have the grenade launcher with about 15 rounds of ammo for 
    it.  The final boss fight in this chapter is SO much easier with a grenade 
    launcher.  The boss is still beatable without a grenade launcher, but he's MUCH 
    more annoying without one.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == BEDROOM CORRIDOR ==
    
    We rejoin Claire and Steve after they have just exited Alfred's room.  Alfred 
    will talk to them over the intercom eventually then the self-destruct system 
    for the island will be triggered.  As the characters round the right corner up 
    ahead, TWO [ZOMBIES] will walk toward them.  Blast them out of your way then 
    the characters will continue further down the corridor as some [ZOMBIES] move 
    out from near the corridor in front of Alexia's room at the end of the hall.  
    The characters will open the door to the left and step back out into the front 
    room.
    
    == FRONT ROOM ==
    
    The characters will haul ass down the first set of stairs.  Their progress will 
    be interrupted as a [HUNTER II] hops onto the walkway.  Blast the Hunter with 
    the shotgun and another [HUNTER II] will leap onto the walkway.  A [HUNTER II] 
    will dash down the top walkway and the characters will turn to view it then 
    quickly rush down the walkway ahead.  Once again, their progress will be 
    interrupted as a [HUNTER II] hops onto the walkway in front of them.  They will 
    turn after blasting the Hunter and the [HUNTER II] that was seen earlier will 
    be behind them, so be ready to blast him.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Butler's Letter                                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the last stone gargoyle at the end of the walkway where the Hunter II |
    | attacks right before moving down the last set of stairs in the Front Room   |
    | of the Ashford Estate to reveal this file.  It's best to shoot this when    |
    | the first two Hunter II's attack.  It will be on the back wall to the left. |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will look down at the bottom floor.  Grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** 
    from the left side of the bottom floor, the **GREEN HERB** along the left 
    pedestal in front of the entrance doors and the --GOLD-- lying along the table 
    on the right side.  There are plenty of bodies on the bottom floor that the 
    characters will notice on the way down.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying against a dresser on the left side of the bottom floor 
    of the front room.
    [ ] Green Herb - On top of the pedestal to the left in front of the entrance 
    doors to the Ashford Mansion.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    When the characters move toward the bottom, THREE [ZOMBIES] will get up from 
    off to the right then the characters will turn toward the entrance doors as TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] walk toward them.  Blast the two zombies near the entrance then the 
    characters will turn back toward the last three zombies off to the left.  
    Before leaving, the characters will turn around and TWO [ZOMBIES] will walk 
    toward them from the left side of the stairs.  The characters will eventually 
    run through the front doors.
    
    == PATH TO THE ASHFORD MANSION ==
    
    Grab the **GRENADE PICKUP** by the stone head as the characters move down the 
    stairs.  The characters will hop over the busted pillar then run toward the 
    next set of stairs.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Lying in front of the stone head carving after the 
    characters move down the first set of stairs while moving away from the Ashford 
    Mansion.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    A [HUNTER II] will meet the characters at the top of the stairs and ANOTHER 
    [HUNTER II] will hop up onto the nearby stone wall then it will hop down and 
    join the other.  Take out the shotgun and spread fire among both of them to 
    keep them from attacking.  Be careful about reloading since the characters will 
    turn and face a [HUNTER II] then ANOTHER [HUNTER II] will jump toward the 
    characters from behind it.
    
    Take out the submachine gun and prepare to fire at the [BANDERSNATCH] that 
    steps into view from the bottom of the stairs near the mansion.  He will toss 
    rock debris at the characters.  The rock debris can be shot out of the air.  
    Blast him in the head with the submachine gun from a distance to finish him off 
    and shoot any rock debris that flies at the characters.
    
    Alfred will begin to sing Alexia's lullaby as the characters run down the 
    stairs. Pick up the **GREEN HERB** at the bottom of the stairs.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the floor to the left at the very bottom of the 
    stairs before getting to the bridge.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == BRIDGE ==
    
    The characters will run along the bridge as [ZOMBIES] move at them from the 
    other side of the bridge up ahead.  Take out the submachine gun as the 
    characters turn around since a [BANDERSNATCH] will be behind them and it will 
    toss rock debris at them.  Blast the Bandersnatch in the head to kill it then 
    the characters will turn back toward the FOUR [ZOMBIES] at the other end of the 
    bridge.  Try to go for critical headshots on all four of them.
    
    After running forward a bit more, a [BANDERSNATCH] will land in front of the 
    door at the end of the bridge then start to toss rock debris at the characters. 
    ANOTHER [BANDERSNATCH] will land on the bridge after the first dies.  The 
    second Bandersnatch will attack normally.  The characters will rush ahead and 
    open the door.
    
    == MUSIC BOX ROOM ==
    
    Claire and Steve will slow down and stare at a body on the floor as they pass 
    by.  They will walk toward the doorway up ahead then hop into the next room 
    cautiously.  Pick up the --GOLD-- off to the left and **FIRST AID SPRAY** on 
    the back desk then grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN** when the characters look toward 
    the body on the right side of the room.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> HUNK's Report                                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Back in the room with the Music Box that blocked the doorway earlier, the   |
    | characters will stare down at a body then move into the room.  Blast the    |
    | clock on the table near the fireplace to reveal this file.  The characters  |
    | will turn back and look toward it eventually if you don't hit it when the   |
    | characters first enter.                                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - On the back desk of the Music Box Room as the characters 
    first step through the doorway leading back to it.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying in the floor next to the dead body off to the 
    right near the fireplace.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After staring at the body on the right, the characters will look to the left as 
    a [ZOMBIE] attacks.  When the characters turn, TWO [ZOMBIES] will move toward 
    them from the doorway behind them and the body to the left will become a 
    [ZOMBIE] then rise up.  The characters will exit the room through the next 
    door.
    
    == FRONT LOBBY ==
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Alexander Ashford                                    |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the picture on the right side of the wall directly ahead as the       |
    | characters open the door after exiting the Music Box Room.  The room will   |
    | be very dark when the characters first enter, so blast the right wall and   |
    | you'll hit the picture.  Shoot it before the characters move down the       |
    | stairs.  This picture will be off to the left when the Black Windows        |
    | attack.                                                                     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** on the chair as the characters move into the 
    upstairs area then grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** as the characters look down the 
    stairs.  The characters will turn on a flashlight since the room is extremely 
    dark now. A [BLACK WIDOW] will drop from the ceiling off to the side.  Blast it 
    and the characters will look up and see TWO [BLACK WIDOWS] on the ceiling.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - On top of a chair as the characters reenter the Front Lobby 
    from the Music Box Room.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - At the bottom of the first set of stairs in the Front Lobby.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will move down the first set of stairs.  Grab the --GOLD-- at 
    the bottom of the lobby, near the front door.  Grab the **CROSSBOW AMMO** in 
    the back of the front desk.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - Lying on the floor behind the front desk.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Eventually, a sound will be heard behind the characters and a [HUNTER II] will 
    leap in front of the entrance doors as the characters stand near them.  ANOTHER 
    [HUNTER II] will leap near them and so will another.  The characters will face 
    three Hunters then quickly turn around and run up the staircase only to be 
    stopped by ANOTHER [HUNTER II].  The characters will leap off the railing of 
    the stairs and land behind the front desk.
    
    They will move toward the pillars and get behind them then survey the quiet 
    room.  Eventually a [HUNTER II] will dash in front of the characters so take 
    out the shotgun and blast him.  A [HUNTER II] will rush at the characters as 
    they turn to the right and ANOTHER [HUNTER II] will leap over the other as it 
    falls then jumps at the characters, so be prepared to fire at it.
    
    The characters will move toward the entrance doors while cautiously surveying 
    the room.  TWO [HUNTER II's] will fall from the top floor and land near the 
    characters.  Blast them and the characters will survey the room once again as 
    Alfred comes over the intercom and speaks of his doll that the characters have 
    now activated.  The characters will step outside.
    
    == OUTSIDE THE RESIDENCE ==
    
    After moving down the steps ahead, the characters will look to the left and 
    then to the right as they prepare to head for the airport.  A creature will 
    dash at them from off to the left so prepare to press the on-screen button 
    command that appears in order to dodge his attack.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> T-103 Tyrant
    
    Weak Point: Head
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Dashing Punch: Tyrant rushes toward the characters and tries to hit them with 
    his arm.  A button command will appear to dodge this attack.  He does it right 
    at the beginning of the fight
    
    Punch: Tyrant holds his right arm to the side and hits the characters with a 
    punch. Blast him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Uppercut: Tyrant holds his left arm back and performs an uppercut forward.  
    Blast him in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Jumping Overhead Smash: Tyrant jumps at the characters as they try to run and 
    tries to hit them overhead.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge this 
    attack.
    
    ---
    
    -- DEALING WITH ALFRED'S DOLL
    
    After the characters dodge the Tyrant's dashing punch, he will move toward them 
    as they get up while they are in front of the doors to the residence.  He will 
    perform one of two attacks now.  Either he will hold his right arm back and 
    perform a punch or he will hold his left arm back and perform an uppercut.  All 
    of his attacks can be cancelled by shooting him in the head.  Use either the 
    submachine gun or the shotgun to blast him in the head to cancel his attacks.  
    The shotgun takes off tons of damage per hit and will wear him down quickly.  
    It only takes one shotgun blast to the head right before each attack to cancel 
    his attacks also.
    
    He will eventually kneel after he has been hit a bit and the characters will 
    begin to move by him.  Blast him in the head as they move by to damage him.  
    The characters will look back as Tyrant recovers.  He will leap into the air 
    and try to perform an overhead smash on his way down, so press the on-screen 
    button in order to dodge the attack.
    
    -- YOU DON'T ESCAPE THAT EASY!
    
    The Tyrant will follow the characters to the gate.  Blast him in the head to 
    drain his health.  He will eventually charge toward the characters and try to 
    perform a dashing overhead, but the characters will automatically step to the 
    side and get behind him.  The Tyrant will turn and face them once again.  He 
    will go back to performing the same attacks that he started out with - punch 
    and uppercut - so cancel the attacks by shooting him in the head.  The battle 
    will end shortly after his health has been drained all the way.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    A cutscene will play after the battle as the character move past the gate.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> T-103 Tyrant
    
    Weak Point: Head
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Overhead Slash: Tyrant holds his right claw arm to the side then strikes 
    forward with an overhead slash.  Blast him in the head to cancel this attack. 
    Blast him with the grenade launcher!
    
    Punch: Tyrant holds his left arm to the side then punches forward.  Blast him 
    in the head to cancel this attack.  Blast him with the grenade launcher!
    
    Claw Thrust: Tyrant will hold his right claw arm to the side then thrust it 
    forward.  Blast him in the head to cancel this attack. It's best to use the 
    grenade launcher, but his head can be hit more easily with the shotgun before 
    this attack unlike his other.
    
    Hanging Punch: While the Tyrant holds onto the plane door, he will try to hit 
    the characters with a punch as they get near him.  Press the on-screen command 
    to dodge this attack.
    
    Downward Stab: If Tyrant knocks the characters off the side of the plane, they 
    will grab on and he will perform a downward stab with his claw arm.  Blast him 
    in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Stomp: If Tyrant knocks the characters off the side of the plane, they will 
    grab on and he will perform a stomp with his right foot.  Blast him in the head 
    to cancel this attack.
    
    ---
    
    Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** off the left metal crate as the characters 
    look in that direction.  They Tyrant will be in the center of the plane as the 
    back cargo door of the plane remains open.
    
    -- A STOWAWAY!
    
    The Tyrant will roar and the characters will survey the plain for something 
    useful to use against this big behemoth.  They will notice the cargo eject in 
    the back of them.  Tyrant will eventually hold his right arm and stare at the 
    characters then slap his hand to the side as claws move out of his hand.  The 
    Tyrant will roar then move toward the characters with both of his arms 
    outstretched.  The characters will back away as he moves toward them.
    
    Soon, the Tyrant will hold his right claw arm to the side and slash at the 
    characters with an overhead slash.  You'll have to blast him in the head to 
    cancel this attack - his head is revealed the moment before the claw hits the 
    characters over head.  He'll also hold his left arm to the side and try to hit 
    the characters with a punch.  Once again, blast him in the head to cancel this 
    attack.
    
    It's far better if you blast him with the grenade launcher to cancel his 
    attacks.  This boss can be a royal ass if you try to hit him in the head with a 
    submachine gun since you need precise hits to his head while the camera shakes 
    in order to cancel his attacks. The shotgun works well to cancel both of his 
    attacks, but your timing has to be good.  It's really best to cancel all of his 
    attacks with a quick shot from the grenade launcher - the grenade launcher 
    really requires no head aiming.
    
    -- THE CARGO EJECT
    
    Cancel his attacks a few times and he will kneel.  The characters will move to 
    the back of him.  The Tyrant will go back to the same two attacks as before - 
    an overhead slice and a side punch.  Cancel his attacks with gun blasts to the 
    head.  After the characters have stunned him, they will rush over to the switch 
    to the left and press it.  This will make the cargo eject hit the Tyrant and 
    shove him to the back of the plane.  He will nearly go out of the plane, but he 
    will stop the cargo eject and pick it up then toss it out of the plane.
    
    He will kneel down and the characters will rush over to him while he stands at 
    the back of the plane.  They will face him as he stands with his back to the 
    outside portion of the plane.  Tyrant will still attack with the same two 
    attacks as before, so cancel them with shots to the head.  He will perform a 
    new thrust attack where he will hold his left arm back and then thrust his claw 
    arm forward.  Blast him in the head to cancel this.
    
    Eventually, the Tyrant will fall out of the plane as one of his attacks are 
    cancelled, but he will grab onto the back door and hold on.  The characters 
    will walk to the edge of the plane and he will grab onto the side with his claw 
    arm then try to punch them from below.  Press the on-screen command to dodge 
    this attack.
    
    The characters will back away and Tyrant will hop back onto the plane.  He will 
    prepare a thrust attack and move toward the characters, but they will 
    automatically dodge it by stepping behind him.  Now the characters have their 
    backs to the outside of the plane as the Tyrant stands in front of them.  If he 
    hits them at this point, they will fall off the side then grab on.  He will 
    perform a claw stab and stomp to hit the characters as they hang on.  Blast him 
    in the head as he performs these attacks to cancel them.
    
    -- UNBEATABLE!
    
    Eventually, he will kneel again then the characters will run back into the 
    plane.  The characters will spot a wooden box with a missile inside of it.  The 
    characters will turn back around as the Tyrant leaps toward them and tries to 
    perform an overhead strike.  They will quickly run to the side to avoid this as 
    he crashes into the wooden box and causes it to fall apart revealing a missile. 
    The Tyrant will face them and go back to his usual attacks once again.
    
    Cancel his attacks until he falls down to his knees.  The characters will rush 
    over to the missile.  Blast the two red metal straps that hold the missile in 
    place - blast them with the submachine gun!  The missile will activate once the 
    red metal straps are destroyed then the missile will plow into the Tyrant and 
    knock him out of the back of the train.  The missile will blow up as it sends 
    him further out of the plane.
    
    If you don't destroy the red metal straps fast enough, then prepare to cancel 
    some more of the Tyrant's attacks until he is stunned once again.  The 
    characters will face the missile once again and you'll have a chance to destroy 
    the red metal straps again.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |*********** Resident Evil: Code Veronica - The Antarctic Facility ***********|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  6                [GO06] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |"Till one day strolling in his court, an arrow pierced the kind King's heart.|
    |                    He lost his life and his lady's love."                   |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Steve
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Crash (Easy), Awakening (Easy), Researcher 
    Zombie (Normal), Worker Zombie (Normal), Moth (Normal), Parasites (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Nosferatu, Alfred's Ring
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Alexander's Earring
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Game of Oblivion" Chapter 7
    Unlockable Files: Alfred's Diary, Alfred and Alexia 1, Worker's Diary
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == PLATFORM AREA ==
    
    Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the bottom platform near the slumped over 
    body below as the characters survey the area.  Eventually the characters will 
    turn around toward the nearby doors as THREE [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  All 
    of the zombies have hard hats that need to be shot off in order to hit the head 
    portion.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the walkway with the dead body slumped 
    against the door.  The characters will look down at this from the beginning and 
    it can be picked up later.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Alfred's Diary                                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the light above the door with the slumped over body in front of it    |
    | near the steps toward the bottom of the platforms to reveal this file. This |
    | light can be seen from several areas.  It can be shot well after the        |
    | characters move down the ladder.                                            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will run toward the ladder up ahead and TWO [ZOMBIES] will 
    follow behind them.  The partner will stay behind and shoot at the zombies a 
    bit before joining up with your main character.
    
    After the partner climbs down the ladder, the characters will turn toward the 
    double doors to the right and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will attack.  All of them wear 
    hard hats.  The characters will survey the area then decide to head through the 
    double doors to the side.  They will hear a very loud yell from some creature 
    that comes from a room nearby.
    
    == CONVEYOR BELT ROOM (SECOND FLOOR) ==
    
    As the characters open the doors to the conveyor belt room, grab the **GRENADE 
    PICKUP** along the conveyor belt on the bottom floor and the **GREEN HERB** on 
    the other side of the gap in the walkway to the right.  After turning on the 
    flashlight, the characters will survey the room then move along the walkway to 
    the right.  The door near the gap in the walkway is locked.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Lying along the bottom floor conveyor belt as the 
    characters step through the double doors on the second floor of the conveyor 
    belt room.
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the other side of the gap in the walkway on the 
    second floor of the conveyor belt room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will hear something below then look down to the conveyor belt 
    and see a Hunter run by the other side of it.  While the characters back away 
    from the door, they will eventually turn around and fight a [SWEEPER].  A 
    Sweeper is a reddish colored Hunter that can poison with its claws.  
    Thankfully, it can't poison a player in Darkside Chronicles.  Blast the 
    Sweepers with the shotgun or submachine gun.
    
    Another [SWEEPER] will leap onto the conveyor belt then leap in front of the 
    characters' path as they rush toward the exit doors.  After shooting the second 
    Sweeper, ANOTHER [SWEEPER] will jump onto the walkway behind the characters as 
    they turn to face it.  As the third Sweeper dies, ANOTHER [SWEEPER] will land 
    on the walkway next to it as it jumps from below.  The characters will turn and 
    run then TWO [SWEEPERS] will dash toward them from the door on the left side of 
    the room as they rush toward the double doors.
    
    == PLATFORM AREA ==
    
    TWO [ZOMBIES] will walk toward the characters as they move through the double 
    doors then TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will join the other two.  They all have hard hats 
    once again.  The characters will eventually turn to the left while stepping 
    forward as a [SWEEPER] jumps at them and slashes from the nearby walkway.  Be 
    ready to shoot the Sweeper when the characters turn to avoid taking damage.
    
    As the characters face the double doors once again, a [SWEEPER] will attack, so 
    take out the shotgun and blast him.  The characters will eventually look up 
    toward the ladder to their left and a [SWEEPER] will hop down from the overhead 
    walkway then attack.  TWO [SWEEPERS] will move through the double doors of the 
    room that the characters just exited from.
    
    The same type of loud creature yell from before will get the characters' 
    attention as they look to the right. The characters will move along the walkway 
    ahead and stare down at the dead body near the door as they move by it.  Be 
    prepared to slash with the knife as a [PARASITE] jumps out of the dead body - 
    start knife slashing right after the body moves to avoid taking damage.
    
    The characters will move over to the nearby stairs.  Collect the --GOLD-- along 
    the staircase as the characters move down them.  They will enter a hall that 
    has been turned into a nest.  A dead body lies along the left wall encased with 
    webbing.  The characters will turn and face the right wall then turn around as 
    a [MOTH] attacks.  Take out the submachine gun and blast the moth while it 
    hovers in the air.  The [MOTH] that is clinging to the back wall can be shot 
    and killed as well.  The characters will open the door to the office and step 
    inside.
    
    == ALEXANDER'S OFFICE ==
    
    Grab the **GREEN HERB** lying on the right side of the desk as the characters 
    enter the office.  When the characters look down to the left, collect the 
    **GRENADE LAUNCHER AMMO** from the small table then take the **FIRST AID 
    SPRAY** off the dresser as the characters turn to the right.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the right side of the desk in the office.
    [ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Lying on the table to the left as the characters 
    survey the office.
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on the dresser to the right as the characters enter 
    the office.  They will look toward this after staring down at the Grenade 
    Launcher ammo.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Alfred and Alexia 1  (Hard mode)                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Once the characters enter, Alexander's Office, they will look to the left   |
    | and see a bear head hanging on the wall.  Shoot the bear head to reveal     |
    | this file.                                                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Yells of a creature somewhere nearby will cause the characters to enter the 
    corridor behind the desk.  They will turn on the flashlight as they step toward 
    the grated floor in the back of the corridor.  They will look down at a 
    creature imprisoned in a room below.  The characters will leave the corridor 
    eventually and step back into the office area.  They will spot a picture of a 
    younger Alexia and Alfred with their father Alexander.  The creature imprisoned 
    below the corridor is likely Alexander Ashford it seems.  The characters will 
    step back outside.
    
    == PLATFORM AREA ==
    
    Take out the submachine gun or the shotgun and blast the TWO [MOTHS] as they 
    hover in front of the characters.  When the characters turn to the right TWO 
    [MOTHS] will attack from that corridor as well.  The second moth in the second 
    group will be on the back wall at first.  The characters will move by a 
    pulsating body strapped to the wall on the left side and a dead body off to the 
    right.
    
    After staring down at the dead body, the characters will turn as TWO [ZOMBIES] 
    rush at them from the back corridor.  The dead body they were watching will 
    become a [ZOMBIE] and stand up then attack as well.  After finishing the 
    zombies off, your controlled characters will turn back around and see a 
    [ZOMBIE] attacking your partner, so prepare to shoot the zombie off. The 
    characters will step through the nearby doors and enter the conveyor belt room.
    
    == CONVEYOR BELT ROOM (FIRST FLOOR) ==
    
    Grab the **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the turned over shelf off to the left and pick up 
    the --GOLD-- behind the box on the floor.  There is a [ZOMBIE] roaming the area 
    behind the conveyor belts.  The characters will turn to the right as FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  After finishing off the zombies, the characters 
    will move further around the side of the room and look up under the conveyor 
    belts then see a [ZOMBIE] moving around on the other side.  The characters will 
    eventually step up onto the conveyor belt.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Worker's Diary                                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters get on the conveyor belt, look to the right and shoot   |
    | the small box on top of the bigger box on the left side of the cage.  There |
    | are two big boxes inside of the cage and this small box is on top of the    |
    | left box.                                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying on top of the turned over shelf to the left as the 
    characters enter the first floor of the conveyor belt room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After the characters hop back off the conveyor belt, they will move to the far 
    side of the room then look around the corner.  Grab the **MAGNUM AMMO** on the 
    shelf in the distance as they look around the left corner.  Sounds of something 
    jumping around up above will be heard.  A [SWEEPER] will fall from above then 
    TWO MORE [SWEEPERS] will move toward the characters from the path under the 
    conveyor belt.  A grenade can be tossed at them while they are still at a 
    distance to save gun ammo.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - Lying on the shelf in the distance after the characters reach 
    the far end of the room after hopping off the conveyor belt.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will survey the top of the conveyor belt while moving ahead then 
    they will round the left corner at the end.  Eventually, a [SWEEPER] will jump 
    in the distance and then ANOTHER [SWEEPER] will leap toward the characters 
    after falling to the floor.  Be ready to shoot the Sweeper out of the air with 
    gunfire.  The second Sweeper will move out of the left area.
    
    After turning back around, a [SWEEPER] will appear in the distance then it will 
    jump above and a second [SWEEPER] will move toward the characters while the 
    first Sweeper prepares to drop from above the conveyor belt.  A grenade can be 
    tossed here while the Sweepers are still at a distance.
    
    The characters will watch the dead bodies around the area closely as they move 
    toward the stairs in the back. They will turn while near the stairs and look 
    back at the conveyor belt as a body falls from above then THREE [ZOMBIES] get 
    up nearby.  ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from off to the left then THREE 
    [ZOMBIES] will start moving toward the characters when they turn to the right. 
    The characters will move up the stairs and open the door.
    
    == MINING AREA ==
    
    As the characters enter the Mining Area, grab the **GREEN HERB** on the ground 
    to the left.  When the characters turn to the right, pick up the --GOLD-- and 
    the **SHOTGUN AMMO** lying against the back stairs.  The characters will look 
    into the pit in the middle of the room while the partner heads toward the 
    double doors off to the left.  The partner will check the double doors, but 
    they are locked.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - On the ground in front of the locked set of double doors to 
    the left as the characters enter the mining area.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Off to the right near the bottom of the stairs as the 
    characters enter the mining area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After spotting a door on the second floor, the characters will move toward the 
    stairs up ahead.  As they begin to climb the stairs, they will look at a crane 
    to the left.  The crane will eventually move toward them and a button prompt 
    command will appear so the characters can dodge the crane and avoid taking 
    damage.  The crane will damage the railing and hit the pipe on the wall behind 
    the characters as they move out of the way.
    
    Alfred will talk to the characters as he hides up above.  The characters will 
    step up to the walkway.  Alfred will step out from behind the railing up ahead 
    and try to fire his rifle at the characters.  Quickly switch to the submachine 
    gun and shoot him to make him hide behind the railing again.  The characters 
    will rush toward the railing that he is hiding behind.  They will look to the 
    left as the crane rushes toward them again, so be prepared to press the on-
    screen command in order to dodge the crane one again.
    
    The characters will take cover behind the railing as the crane backs away then 
    look toward the railing on the opposite side.  Alfred will rise up and fire at 
    them as the camera zooms in toward the railing.  Shoot him with the submachine 
    gun when he rises.  The characters will dash toward the railing then step 
    around the side of it at the far end.
    
    Alfred will be aiming at the characters with his rifle as they look around the 
    corner of the railing, so they will move back behind the railing.  The 
    characters will notice that the crane is positioned right up above Alfred, so 
    aim toward the rope that holds up the grappling piece on the bottom of the 
    crane arm and blast it.  The characters will eventually step out from around 
    the side of the railing while Alfred aims at them, so switch to the submachine 
    gun and blast the crane extension up above the grapple at that time.  The crane 
    will fall and hit the walkway beside Alfred then cause him to lose his balance 
    and fall over the side of the railing and into the pit in the middle of the 
    room.  The characters will rush toward the door at the end and open it 
    afterwards.
    
    == STORAGE ROOM ==
    
    Claire and Steve will secure the area as they step inside.  There are only a 
    few dead bodies and some stacked crates lying around the room.  After the 
    characters look toward the ladder and platform above, TWO [ZOMBIES] will dash 
    into the room from the prior room then ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from near 
    the doorway.  Be prepared to shoot the two zombies that dash toward the 
    characters.
    
    After a few moans are heard, the characters will look to the left as FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  After climbing the ladder to the walkway above, 
    the characters will move toward the next ladder, but a [SWEEPER] will hop down 
    to their right and attack.  The partner will go first then your character will 
    follow the partner up the next ladder.  Once the next door is checked (it's 
    locked), the characters will climb yet another ladder off to the left.
    
    Pick up the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** from near the dead body on the top platform 
    as the characters survey the platform from the ladder.  As the characters 
    prepare to open the door to the side, a [SWEEPER] will bust through the door 
    and attack.  When the characters back off, ANOTHER [SWEEPER] will move through 
    the doorway and attack as well.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** before the 
    characters open the door in the corridor ahead and move outside.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying near the dead body on the top platform in the 
    storage room.
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying near the door that leads outside on the third floor of 
    the storage room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == OUTSIDE THE FACILITY ==
    
    The characters will step out into a heavy snowstorm.  As they look off the top 
    walkway, they will notice a snowmobile below.  The characters will move to the 
    right then slide down the ladder.  It's almost as if you can hear some creature 
    breathing really heavy, isn't it?
    
    After sliding down the snow hill, the characters will look off to the right 
    then try to move ahead, but an enemy will fall from above and land to the left 
    of them.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Nosferatu (Alexander Ashford)
    
    Weak Point: Exposed heart on front chest
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Acid Spit: Nosferatu will lean his head back then lead forward and spit acid 
    from his mouth.  Blast his heart to cancel this attack.
    
    Stab: Nosferatu will lean his right shoulder appendage back then thrust it 
    forward and try to stab the characters.  Blast his heart to cancel this attack.
    Shoot him with the shotgun.
    
    Jumping Slash: While the characters are near the building, Nosferatu will leap 
    into the air then fall down and try to slash them.  Shoot him in the body while 
    he falls.  A button command for stepping closer to him in order to shoot his 
    heart will appear once the characters dodge the attack.
    
    Explosive Barrel Toss: When Nosferatu leaps on top of the building, he will 
    throw explosive barrels at the characters.  Blast the barrels out of the air to 
    avoid taking damage.
    
    Three Slash Attack: After Nosferatu's blades appear on the ends of his 
    appendages, he will lean back his top right appendage then strike forward with 
    it followed by his left appendage then bottom right.  Blast him in the heart or 
    the body to cancel this attack.
    
    Ice Block Toss: Nosferatu will leap to the back of the snow field near a gas 
    tank then toss a large ice block at the characters.  Blast him in his body to 
    make him slump over and the ice block will fall on him.  Blast the gas tank 
    behind him afterwards.
    
    Blade Appendage Toss: While Nosferatu hangs from the metal pole, he will send 
    three blades toward the characters as he whips his appendages forward.  Blast 
    the blades out of the air to avoid taking damage.
    
    Hanging Blade Slice: While Nosferatu hangs on the metal pipe and the characters 
    swing back and forth on the rope, he will swing his top right appendage at the 
    characters when they move toward him.  Blast him in his chest to cancel this 
    attack right when the characters swing near him.  Use the shotgun for the best 
    results.
    
    ---
    
    -- NOSFERATU UNLEASHED
    
    This enemy's name is Nosferatu, or you can refer to him as the late Alexander 
    Ashford that now has the T-Veronica virus coursing through his veins.  Much 
    like his Code Veronica X appearance, Nosferatu's weak point is his exposed 
    heart.  This heart can be shot at certain times to weaken him, but a player 
    does not want to focus solely on shooting his heart all the time.  In order to 
    cancel some of his attacks, his appendages must be shot.  His body can be shot 
    to damage him, but the gunshots will not take off as much off.  Sometimes, 
    shooting him in the body is really the only option though.
    
    Nosferatu will begin right in front of the characters after he hits the ground 
    from above.  He will attack with either an acid spit or try to stab the 
    characters with his top right appendage.  Blast him in the heart when he moves 
    his head back and prepares to spit or when he is about to thrust forward with 
    his right appendage.  The game is kind of lenient here and actually allows the 
    player to cancel his attacks with just about any type of body shot.  Use the 
    submachine gun or shotgun to cancel his attacks.  It's best to shoot him with 
    the shotgun to cancel his appendage attack.
    
    Nosferatu will eventually kneel down and his life gauge will disappear off the 
    screen.  Don't shoot him at this time - allow the characters to move away from 
    him.  Nosferatu will be gone when the characters turn back to stare at him.  He 
    will land in front of the characters once again.  Nosferatu will perform the 
    same attacks once again, so prepare to cancel them with gunshots.  When he 
    kneels again, stop hitting him and allow the characters to pass by him.
    
    The characters will turn as Nosferatu gets up then charges at them.  He will 
    leap behind them.  He will still perform the same attacks, but he will also 
    jump into the air and fall down toward the characters with a jumping slash.  
    Shoot him with the submachine gun as he falls.  If the characters cancel this 
    attack, a button command will appear on the screen.  Press the button command 
    and the characters will move right next to Nosferatu's chest and his exposed 
    heart will be in view.  Take out the shotgun or the magnum and blast him in the 
    heart to damage him badly.  The shotgun is really the best to use since you 
    don't have to be as precise with your aiming.
    
    -- HIS BLADE APPENDAGES EMERGE
    
    Noseferatu will stand and yell at the characters after taking more damage and 
    his appendages will sprout blades on the ends of them.  He will leap on top of 
    the nearby building then toss three explosive barrels down at the characters. 
    Blast the explosive barrels while they move toward the characters to avoid 
    taking damage.  When he leaps off the building, shoot him as he falls to avoid 
    his jumping slash.  He will start a new type of slash attack where he will 
    slash with all three appendages one by one.  When he holds his top right 
    appendage to the side, blast him in the body or heart to cancel this attack.
    
    He will eventually fall once again and the characters will move by him.  The 
    characters will look back as Nosferatu uses his appendages to crawl along the 
    ground then leap up ahead.  Nosferatu will pick up an ice block from the snow 
    field then hold it above his head with his appendages.  He will toss it at the 
    characters shortly.  Blast him in the body to make him drop the ice block on 
    himself.  The characters will notice the gas tank behind him afterwards, so 
    blast the gas tank.  This will knock him out.
    
    The characters' path is now blocked by flames, so they must head to the left. 
    They will move toward an overhead wire.  When the camera zooms into the wire, 
    shoot the joint in the middle that connects the wires to make the hooked wire 
    fall.  Nosferatu will be climbing along the metal pole to the right and will 
    climb over toward the area in front of the characters then face them.  His only 
    attack from long range is to whip each of his appendages forward and send three 
    blades at the characters.  Blast the blades out of the air to avoid damage.
    
    -- ON THE ROPE
    
    Shoot him in the body to damage him while he hangs and shoot his blade 
    appendages if one of them flies toward the characters.  Eventually the 
    characters will turn to the side and prepare to jump on the swinging rope.  
    Enter the on-screen command as the characters face the rope and they will hop 
    onto the rope.
    
    The rope will swing back and forth toward Nosferatu while he hangs on the metal 
    pipe.  As the rope swings toward Nosferatu from the second time onward, he will 
    swing his top right appendage at the characters.  Take out the shotgun and 
    blast him in his chest to cancel the attack.  You'll have to aim upwards as the 
    characters approach him.  Once he has 25% life remaining, he will fall off the 
    metal pipe.  The characters will leap toward him then land on his chest.  Blast 
    his exposed heart at this time to drain the rest of his life bar.
    
    -- WE'VE GOT YOU NOW!
    
    It's not over yet though.  He will get up and try to attack the characters some 
    more.  Cancel his attacks by blasting him in the chest to finish him off for 
    good.  A cutscene will play and the chapter will end eventually.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |************* Resident Evil: Code Veronica - The Queen Awakens **************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      G A M E  O F  O B L I V I O N  7                [GO07] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |            "It is almost time you genetically inferior siblings!"           |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Claire and Chris
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Reunion (Easy), Metamorphosis (Easy), Last 
    Words (Easy), Queen (Easy), Atonement (Easy), Old Foe (Easy), Tentacle 
    (Normal), Chris Redfield (Normal), Ants (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Steve Monster, First Form Alexia, Second Form 
    Alexia, Third Form Alexia, Alexia's Choker
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Golden Dragonfly
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 3
    Unlockable Files: Alexia Ashford, Queen Ant Report, Virus Research Report, Code 
    Veronica Report, Alfred and Alexia 2, Wesker's Message, T-Veronica, Linear 
    Launcher, Alexander's Memo
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == FRONT ROOM ==
    
    As Chris and Claire look to the left after staring up at the second floor, FIVE 
    [ZOMBIES] will walk toward them.  A few of them have hard hats.  Try for some 
    headshots on them before the characters move up the stairs.  Pick up the 
    --GOLD-- off to the right near the left side of the stairs.  As the characters 
    rush up the stairs, they will turn back around as a [TENTACLE] attacks.  
    Another [TENTACLE] is on the wall behind it.
    
    A tentacle can be shot normally anywhere on the tentacle or you can aim down at 
    the reddish portions on its bottom side and shoot it.  The reddish portions 
    along the side of a tentacle is a tentacle's actual weak point, but it's 
    sometimes hard to hit as the tentacle moves.  Shoot the tentacle with the 
    handgun to save ammo.  Once the tentacle falls, the characters will stare down 
    at THREE [ZOMBIES] on the floor below before moving up the remainder of the 
    stairs.
    
    When the characters reach the top of the stairs, their path will be blocked off 
    by TWO [TENTACLES] as they rise from the left and right near the railings of 
    the second floor.  Blast the reddish portion on the tentacles or just shoot 
    them normally.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Alexia Ashford (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters' path are blocked off by two tentacles once they reach  |
    | the top of the stairs in the front room, shoot the light on the left wall   |
    | above the middle portion of the stairs to reveal this file.                 |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ANOTHER [TENTACLE] will emerge from the bottom floor off to the left as the 
    characters prepare to hop over the gap along the second floor walkway.  They 
    will hop over the gap then turn and face the tentacle, so blast it in the 
    reddish portion along its side at that time.  TWO [TENTACLES] will be on the 
    wall to the characters' left as they turn, but the characters will quickly rush 
    through the door in the back of them before too long.
    
    == LIVING ROOM ==
    
    As the characters enter a **FIRST AID SPRAY** and some **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** 
    will be on the table.  When they turn to look back toward the door, pick up the 
    **GREEN HERB** on the floor to the right of the door.  Eventually the 
    characters will stare at the fireplace.  Shoot the stone statue head bust on 
    top of the fireplace to reveal a **GRENADE PICKUP**.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Queen Ant Report                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the small picture on the far right side of the top of the fireplace   |
    | when the characters turn toward the fireplace in the second floor living    |
    | room to reveal this file.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying on the table as the characters enter the second 
    floor living room.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the table as the characters enter the second 
    floor living room.
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying on the floor to the right of the entrance door to the 
    living room as the characters look back at it.
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - Shoot the stone statue head bust on top of the fireplace 
    in the living room of the second floor to reveal this.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will look to the right after staring at the fireplace.  Shoot 
    the TWO [ZOMBIES] that will attack near the bookcase.  Grab the --GOLD-- off 
    the top of the bookcase.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Virus Research Report                                |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the characters stare at the fireplace in the living room on the       |
    | second floor, they will turn to the right and fight two zombies.  Shoot the |
    | painting beside the open door behind the two zombies to reveal this file.   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** hanging on the mantel along the wall to the right 
    after the characters finish off the two zombies.  The characters will exit the 
    room eventually as a moan is heard in the outside hallway.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - This is hanging on the mantel near the bookcase in the 
    second floor living room.  The characters will turn and face it after finishing 
    off the two zombies in the living room.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == HALLWAY ==
    
    A [ZOMBIE] stands in the hallway outside and ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will get up from 
    behind him after the first notices the characters.  Grab the --GOLD-- in the 
    cabinet next to the last cabinet along the left side of the hallway.  Chris 
    will begin to mention how this palace is modeled after the one in Raccoon City 
    - he means the Spencer Estate from RE1 for those that don't know.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Code Veronica Report (Hard mode)                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters first enter the hallway a zombie will stand in the      |
    | middle of the hallway and another zombie will get up from the back of the   |
    | corridor.  Eventually the characters will move ahead then at the second     |
    | cabinet off to the left.  Blast the glass on the cabinet then shoot the     |
    | right dish on the top shelf of the cabinet to reveal this file.             |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    As the characters come upon the corner of the hallway ahead, TWO [ZOMBIES] will 
    rush at them from around the right corner.  Eventually debris will fall from 
    the ceiling and the ceiling above them will crumble then [ANTS] will crawl 
    through the hole in the ceiling.  Shoot the swarm with the handgun and slash at 
    them with the knife when they hop onto the characters.
    
    The characters will turn back around as TWO [ZOMBIES] move through the doorway 
    they just came through.  They will turn back around and continue down the 
    corridor.  They will try to unlock the door to the left then turn right and 
    rush down the corridor as the zombies begin to dash into the hallway from 
    behind them then the characters will open the door at the end.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  5 --> Alfred and Alexia 2 (Hard mode)                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | After the characters fight off the Ants in the hallway, they will rush down |
    | the corridor then try to open a door to the left.  When they turn back to   |
    | the right, shoot the first light on the top portion of the left wall.  This |
    | can also be seen while the characters stand in the beginning hallway just   |
    | barely as well.                                                             |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    == COLISEUM CORRIDOR ==
    
    When your partner closes the door as your main character turns back around, 
    grab the **GREEN HERB** off the left side of the floor near the door.  Pick up 
    the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** near the dead body as your controlled character 
    steps away from the entrance door and looks down a corridor with another closed 
    door.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - This is lying near the door as the partner shuts the door to 
    the hallway when the characters first enter the Coliseum Corridor.
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying near a dead body as your controlled character 
    turns away from the entrance door and looks to the left in the Coliseum 
    Corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn and face the hallway ahead as THREE [ZOMBIES] move 
    toward them.  TWO MORE [ZOMBIES] will get up from behind the first group as the 
    first three zombies fall.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  6 --> Wesker's Message                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters face the corridor with zombies in the Coliseum          |
    | Corridor, shoot the second to last light that is hanging from ceiling to    |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    After the zombies are all defeated, your controlled character will turn as a 
    [ZOMBIE] attacks your partner, so prepare to blast the zombie off.  The 
    characters will spot Steve strapped to a chair through the barred Coliseum 
    doorway at the end of the corridor then they will rush toward him.
    
    == COLISEUM ==
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Steve Monster
    
    Weak Point: Exposed heart on the right side of chest (Steve's left)
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Axe Slice: Steve holds his axe to the side with both hands then swings it 
    forward.  Blast him in the heart to stop this attack.
    
    Upward Slice: Steve holds his axe downward and to the side with both hands then 
    swings his axe upward.  Blast him in the heart to stop this attack.
    
    Overhead Slice: Steve holds his axe behind his back and performs an overhead 
    swing.  Blast him in the heart to stop this attack.
    
    Jumping Slice 1: Steve will leap toward the characters and try to hit them with 
    his axe when they move for the second time.  Press the on-screen button command 
    to dodge this attack.
    
    Axe Toss: After the characters run from Steve for the third time, he will toss 
    his axe at them.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge this attack.
    
    Jumping Slice 2: While the characters climb the ramps along the middle pillar 
    of the coliseum, Steve will leap onto a nearby wall then hop off the wall and 
    try to hit the characters with his axe.  Blast him anywhere on his body while 
    he is still on the wall to make him fall off.  He will perform this attack 
    three times.
    
    Jumping Overhead Slice: After canceling Steve's third jumping slice while 
    climbing the middle pillar, he will fall onto a nearby set of stairs then jump 
    toward the characters and try to hit them overhead with his axe.  Press the on-
    screen button command in order to dodge this attack.
    
    ---
    
    -- YOUR KNIGHT IN SHINING ARMOR HAS MUTATED!
    
    The characters will be face to face with Steve in his T-Veronica mutated state 
    as the battle begins.  He will try to hit the characters with his axe by 
    holding it toward his right side then he will strike forward.  Steve's weak 
    spot is the exposed heart on his upper left chest.  Blast him in the heart to 
    cancel his axe swing attack.  Blast him with either the shotgun or the 
    submachine gun.  The shotgun works the best.
    
    NOTE: Steve really cannot be defeated.  This battle has to finish a full 
    sequence before it will end.  Damaging him will make the characters move faster 
    and speed up the entire battle a bit.
    
    Eventually the characters will turn and dash to the left.  A suit of armor will 
    be on the wall ahead of them as they dash.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  7 --> T-Veronica                                           |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | During the fight with the Steve monster in the Coliseum, the characters     |
    | will eventually run away from Steve.  While they run away (to the left),    |
    | shoot the suit of armor against the wall that they first look toward to     |
    | reveal this file.  When they turn as Steve attacks, the suit of armor will  |
    | be behind the characters.  It can be retrieved as they move around the      |
    | room.                                                                       |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    -- RUNNING FROM STEVE
    
    The characters will turn and face Steve as he leaps toward them.  He will now 
    perform an overhead axe attack that be cancelled the same way as his other 
    attack.  Simply shoot him in the heart to cancel all of his attacks.  The 
    characters will run from Steve once again then turn and face him eventually.  
    Steve will leap toward the characters and a button command will appear on the 
    screen for the characters to dodge his jumping attack.
    
    A **GREEN HERB** can be seen in the background behind Steve, so try to grab it. 
    It can also be seen better later in the battle.  The characters will turn and 
    run once again.  They will look back and Steve will toss his axe at them.  
    Press the button command that appears on the screen in order to dodge the axe. 
    Steve will pick up his axe as the characters prepare to rush behind the pillar 
    in the center of the room.
    
    As the characters rush around the other side of the pillar, they will stare at 
    the pillar as two axes are thrown toward it and sink into the pillar, barring 
    their path to the left and right.  When they turn around, Steve will be in the 
    back of them preparing to toss a third axe.  The green herb will be in the back 
    and off to his right now if you still need to grab it.  As he prepares his 
    toss, the characters will leap onto the axe to the left and then begin to climb 
    the ramps along the side of the middle pillar.  As they look back down, Steve 
    will not be in sight.  The green herb pickup will be on the floor below if you 
    still need to collect it.
    
    -- SCALING THE RAMPS
    
    The characters will look up and see the barred exit door to the coliseum on the 
    ceiling above.  They will turn and start to climb up the ramps along the side 
    of the middle pillar.  Steve will appear three times as they climb and he will 
    try to attack from a side wall.  He will leap onto the side wall then hop off 
    of it and try to hit the characters with a jumping axe swing.  Shoot him with 
    the submachine gun or blast him with the shotgun while he clings to the wall.  
    Any hit will be enough to cancel his attack.
    
    Don't worry about damaging him at this point.  Just shoot him enough to cancel 
    his attacks.  This whole portion has to play out in a sequence anyway.  Once 
    the characters reach the top portion near the exit, Steve will leap onto the 
    wall for the third time and try to attack so blast him to cancel the attack. 
    Instead of falling back below, he will fall and land on the stairway along the 
    sidewall.  He will leap into the air and perform an overhead slice on his way 
    down.  Press the on-screen button command in order to dodge this attack.
    
    The force of Steve's axe pound will cause the ramp to crumble and the 
    characters will fall down below.  When they hit the ground, they will quickly 
    search the area for Steve.  Steve fell too... and his axe is now buried into 
    the side of the his chest.  Steve will pull the axe out of the left side of his 
    chest then stand up and fall to his knees while facing the characters.  I dub 
    thee stupid to mess with a pair of Redfields, mah boy!
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    A cutscene will play as the battle ends.
    
    Chris and Claire will rush through the open corridor outside the coliseum and 
    move toward the doors ahead.  SEVERAL [ANTS] will be swarming along the walls, 
    ceiling and floor of the corridor ahead.  Slash with the knife to keep them 
    from jumping onto the characters.  Toss a grenade to get rid of the majority of 
    them.  The characters will turn back around and SEVERAL MORE [ANTS] will be 
    entering the corridor from the coliseum.  Your controlled character will rush 
    toward the doors up ahead.
    
    Another cutscene will play as the characters enter the room ahead.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> First Form Alexia
    
    Weak Point: Head
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Fire Stream: Alexia will wave her hand and send a fire trail toward the 
    characters.  Press the on-screen button command in order to dodge this attack.
    
    Fireballs: Alexia will leap to an overhead platform then shoot fireballs from 
    her hands.  Blast the fireballs with gunfire to destroy them in mid-air.  If a 
    fireball hits a character, wave the nunchuk to extinguish the flames and keep 
    from taking tons of damage.
    
    Ground Fireball: Alexia will point her hand at the characters then a fireball 
    will shoot out from her hand.  Quickly shoot the fireball to avoid taking 
    damage.
    
    Grab and Burn: Alexia will move to the front of the characters then pick them 
    up.  She will try to set them on fire with her hand.  Blast her in the head 
    with the shotgun to make her drop the characters early.  They'll suffer some 
    damage however.
    
    ---
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  8 --> Linear Launcher                                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | During any fight with Alexia, find the shotgun ammo on the platform along   |
    | the back left side of the room.  Shoot the light above the door that is     |
    | near the shotgun ammo to reveal this file.                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    There is some **SHOTGUN AMMO** on the back left platform as the characters face 
    Alexia.
    
    Alexia will start the battle by sealing off the doors in the back of the room 
    with two tentacles.  She will wave her hand and send a fire trail toward the 
    characters.  Press the on-screen button command in order to dodge this attack. 
    These fire trails will remain on the ground and will trap the characters in 
    between flames.  In order to avoid being trapped, find the valve handles along 
    the floor and shoot the valve handles to extinguish the flames.
    
    NOTE: If Alexia damages a character with one of her fire attacks, quickly shake 
    the nunchuk to avoid receiving extra damage from flames.  The characters will 
    put out the fire.
    
    When she leaps to an overhead platform along the side of the room, prepare to 
    blast her fireballs out of the air as she shoots fire projectiles down at the 
    characters.  If a fireball hits the characters, quickly wave the nunchuk to 
    extinguish the flame.  She will leap back down to the floor eventually.
    
    Sometimes, she will move right beside the characters then grab them and hold 
    them up.  She will set them on fire with her hands if this attack is not 
    canceled.  Blast her in the head with the shotgun to make her drop the 
    characters.  If she sets them on fire then wave the nunchuk to extinguish the 
    flames.  Canceling this attack is one of the best ways to damage her.  Take out 
    the shotgun and blast her head continuously to drain her health fast!
    
    She will sometimes point her hand at the characters and shoot a fireball at 
    them while she is on the same floor with them.  Watch for her to hold her hand 
    up for a few seconds then quickly blast the fire that moves toward the screen 
    with a weapon.  She may actually start the battle with this move.
    
    Don't waste secondary weapon ammo during this battle by trying to hit her in 
    the head while she is far away.  Blast her in the head with the handgun then 
    dodge and cancel her attacks until she performs her grab attack then lay down 
    fire upon her head with the shotgun to drain her health considerably!  So long 
    as you watch for her attacks and react quickly by dodging or canceling the 
    attack, this battle isn't that tough.  Knowing what to watch for in her 
    attacks, is the key to getting through this battle without harm.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    After Alexia falls and she speaks a bit, a cutscene will play.  Afterwards, 
    another boss battle will start.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Second Form Alexia
    
    Weak Point:
    
    1) Head
    2) Large sac below body
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Arm Strike: Alexia holds her right set of arms back and prepares to hit the 
    characters.  Blast her in the head to cancel this attack.
    
    Blade Appendage Thrust: As a blade appendage moves out of her body, it will 
    eventually thrust forward and try to impale the characters.  Press the on-
    screen button command to dodge this attack.
    
    Fireball Rain: Alexia sends two groups of fireballs into the air and they fall 
    down on the characters.  Blast the fireballs as they fall.  It's really best to 
    use the submachine gun since the fireballs are grouped on each side.  This move 
    can be cancelled by blasting Alexia in the head right as her sides start to 
    flame up.
    
    Grab and Bite: Alexia will hold up all of her arms into the air above her then 
    strike forward and try to grab the characters.  Blast her in her head before 
    the grab to cancel this with the submachine gun.  If she grabs the characters, 
    blast her in the head with the shotgun to make her drop them.
    
    Tentacle Grab: A tentacle moves out from the left side of the screen and 
    attempts to grab the characters.  Blast the tentacle with the submachine gun to 
    make it move back to the side of the screen.  If it grabs the characters, blast 
    Alexia's head to make the tentacle drop the characters.
    
    ---
    
    The characters will begin the battle near the doors as Alexia remains in the 
    background.  Two tentacles will emerge from the side of the floors.  Blast the 
    tentacles with the submachine gun until they both move beneath the floor - pick 
    one and focus only on that one and both will move beneath the floor.  Aim for 
    the red portions of each tentacle.  As the characters move toward Alexia, her 
    tentacles will try to hit the characters.  Press the on-screen dodge command as 
    the tentacles try to strike the characters to dodge the attack.  Sometimes, 
    Ants will attack the characters at the beginning of the battle as well.  Slash 
    them off with the knife.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  9 --> Alexander's Memo                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | During the fight with Second Form Alexia, shoot the green light on the wall |
    | to the right behind Alexia to reveal this file.  The light is small and     |
    | rectangular shaped.  Use the submachine gun to blast it.                    |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    While face to face with Alexia, know that she has two weak points.  Her head is 
    one weak point and the sac below her body is another weak point.  The sac 
    starts out with yellow coating along its sides that can be shot off to reveal a 
    reddish portion underneath.  The reddish portion can be shot to damage her 
    greatly.  Blast the reddish portion of her sac with the shotgun or the grenade 
    launcher to take her health down very quickly.  You can also pick out a red 
    spot and blast it with the submachine gun or even toss grenades at the sac.  
    Grenades damage Alexia no matter if the sac is out of her body or not!
    
    Keep a close eye on her top body.  If she holds one set of arms to the side, 
    quickly take out the submachine gun and blast her in the head or her bottom sac 
    to cancel her arm strike.  Sometimes the characters will step to the side of 
    her and she will perform the same attack - you'll have to blast her head to 
    cancel it at that time.  She also has a fireball attack and a grab.  Both can 
    be cancelled by shooting her in the head or her bottom sac before the attacks. 
    If she shoots her fireballs into the air then take out the submachine gun and 
    blast them as they fall.
    
    Alexia's head should only be shot to cancel her side attacks.  Since her head 
    is at a distance, take out the submachine gun and blast her head or her bottom 
    sac when she does an attack.  Her only other attack for now is to try to hit 
    the characters with a blade appendage after her sac moves into her body.  Press 
    the on-screen dodge command to avoid taking damage.
    
    Once her life is drained to about 25%, she will start to regenerate as the 
    Linear Launcher moves out of the wall in the background.  The characters will 
    fight her a bit more, so blast her sac and cancel her attacks some more.  They 
    will move toward the ladder off to the left.  Ants or tentacles will attack the 
    characters while they look back at Alexia before climbing the ladder, so blast 
    the tentacles (focus fire on one) slash off the ants.  Toss hand grenades at 
    Alexia's sac.
    
    The characters will climb the ladder and face Alexia.  During the ladder climb, 
    some more Ants will attack.  While on top, Alexia will attack with her 
    tentacles and launch fireballs at the characters.  Blast the tentacles (focus 
    on one) and the fireballs with the submachine gun to avoid damage.  Her 
    fireballs can be cancelled by focusing fire on her sac before she fires them 
    into the air.  Toss hand grenades down toward Alexia's sac.  If all of her life 
    is drained then don't try to damage her anymore.  The rest of this battle must 
    play out in a sequence.  The characters will move down the steps and move 
    toward the door at the end of the walkway.
    
    They will turn a bit to fight Alexia.  The two tentacles that appear toward the 
    end of the walkway must BOTH be shot to make them retract - not just one.  Once 
    the characters have drained all of Alexia's life, they will eventually hop off 
    the end of the walkway and grab the linear launcher.
    
    NOTE: The linear launcher must be equipped, so pause the game and go to the 
    inventory menu then equip it.
    
    A tentacle will grab the characters after they collect the linear launcher.  
    Alexia will hold them upside-down in front of her.  Equip the linear launcher 
    then aim toward Alexia's bottom sac then fire the linear launcher at her sac. 
    The sac has to be hit precisely.  If you fail to hit it then the gun will have 
    to recharge the whole time that Alexia slowly drains the characters' health 
    with her tentacles.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    The characters will rush toward the door once Alexia falls, but they will turn 
    as her top body separates from her lower body.  She basically becomes a mutated 
    dragonfly that can fly around the area.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Third Form Alexia
    
    Weak Point:
    
    1) Head
    2) Reddish portion that connects her body to her tail (center core)
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Stinger Impale: Alexia dives down toward the characters then impales them with 
    her stinger and tries to toss them to the platform.  I don't think you can 
    cancel the impale, but press the on-screen command after the impale to fall 
    safely back on the platform.
    
    Needle Shot: Alexia sends needles out of her tail and launches them into the 
    air then they will shower the characters.  Blast the needle group with the 
    submachine gun or shotgun.  Sometimes one shot with the shotgun can hit the 
    entire group of needles.
    
    Tail Sting: Alexia moves close to the characters then holds up her tail and 
    tries to sting the characters with her stinger.  Press the on-screen button 
    command to dodge this attack.
    
    ---
    
    Oh, my dear Alexia, what a bitch you were to hit with the linear launcher in 
    the original CVX!  Oh, my dear Alexia, what a bitch you can STILL be to hit 
    with that linear launcher in the CVX segment of Darkside Chronicles... if 
    you're not reading Berserker's guide.
    
    The linear launcher will be recharging from the last shot as the battle begins. 
    Alexia will be hovering in the background as the characters watch from near the 
    door.  Her weak points are her head and reddish glowing portion in between her 
    body and her tail - her center core.
    
    Notice how she constantly swoops to the sides.  There is a pattern though.  All 
    of her movements are random when she moves quickly to the sides, but she will 
    always return to the middle to perform an attack and she must hover in the air 
    for a few seconds before that attack.
    
    Her attacks are an impale grab, a needle shot and a tail sting.  Both the 
    impale and the tail sting can be escaped through an on-screen button dodge 
    command.  The impale will damage the characters a bit.  I don't think it is 
    escapable or at least very hard to time the shot.
    
    When she fires needles into the air, take out the submachine gun and blast the 
    group of needles to avoid damage.  One shotgun blast can hit the entire group, 
    but this is not always guaranteed.
    
    Her needle shot attack is her downfall.  As I mentioned earlier, she will swoop 
    to the sides and then move back toward the middle of the screen eventually. She 
    will sometimes perform a needle attack right after she moves to the middle.  
    Blast her in the center red glowing portion of the bottom of her chest with the 
    submachine gun as the camera quickly zooms in on her to cancel her needle shot 
    and make her stagger in the air for a brief second.  At that moment, switch to 
    the linear launcher then shoot her to end the battle.
    
    She can be stunned at any time right as she performs her needle attack, but you 
    have to keep the gun cursor in the middle of the screen and you have to be 
    ready to fire at her with the submachine gun at that precise second when the 
    camera zooms in as she performs her needle attack.  She will pause and then 
    laugh right before she shoots the needles into the air.  Blast her in her 
    center core to stun her then shoot her with the linear launcher.
    
    Alexia MUST be shot with the linear launcher to end the battle.  It doesn't 
    matter if you stun her or not, but the linear launcher blast must make contact 
    with her body in whatever way you choose in order to end this battle.  The 
    linear launcher must recharge for about 30 seconds after every shot, but it has 
    infinite ammo.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    The characters will watch as Alexia dies battle after shooting her with the 
    Linear Launcher. The ending cutscene to this scenario will play once the battle 
    ends.
    
    ------------- P R E - R E S I D E N T  E V I L  4  S C E N A R I O ------------
    
                                J U L Y  2 3,  2 0 0 2
    
                  ___                            _    _               
                 / _ \  _ __    ___  _ __  __ _ | |_ (_)  ___   _ __  
                | | | || '_ \  / _ \| '__|/ _` || __|| | / _ \ | '_ \ 
                | |_| || |_) ||  __/| |  | (_| || |_ | || (_) || | | |
                 \___/ | .__/  \___||_|   \__,_| \__||_| \___/ |_| |_|
                       |_|                                            
                              _                _             
    LEON                     | |  __ _ __   __(_)  ___  _ __                   JACK
                          _  | | / _` |\ \ / /| | / _ \| '__|
    KENNEDY              | |_| || (_| | \ V / | ||  __/| |                  KRAUSER
                          \___/  \__,_|  \_/  |_| \___||_|   
    
                                                                             [SC21]
    
    |**************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - The T-Veronica Carrier ***************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  3               [OJ03] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    | "How does she maintain it without transforming into something horrific...?  |
    |                             ...like Steve."                                 |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Scarred (Easy), Plague Crawler (Normal), South 
    American Bat (Normal), Jaberwock S3 (Normal), Ivy +XY (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Battery Pack
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Mining Room Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 4
    Unlockable Files: Javier Hidalgo, Get-Well Card, Communication from Krauser 2 
    (HARD mode only), Javier's Private Messages
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    The enemies in this chapter are much more aggressive when compared to chapters 
    1 and 2 of Operation Javier.  Zombies can get incredibly aggressive at times 
    and Hunter Gammas will attack quicker, so the player needs to respond more 
    aggressively as well.  It's not always wise to go for headshots on a group of 
    zombies in this chapter.  Shooting them to cancel their dashes toward the 
    characters should be the first priority when they are grouped from now on.
    
    == WATER AREA ==
    
    Your partner will wake up your controlled character while the two recover on 
    the catwalks from the fall above.  Leon and Krauser will move past the dead 
    bodies along the catwalk to the right eventually.  Your controlled character 
    will trip and then turn around and look toward a crawling [ZOMBIE].  Quickly 
    get a headshot on him or blast him before he attacks - you don't have much 
    time.
    
    As the character gets up, he will look out toward the [PIRANHA} in the water 
    shortly before turning to the right as TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] attack.  Once the 
    Hunter Gammas are defeated, the characters will turn to the left and look out 
    into the water as TWO MORE [HUNTER GAMMAS] prepare to attack.  Use the 
    submachine gun to blast the two out in the water as they swim toward the 
    characters.
    
    Pick up the --GOLD-- along the catwalk as the characters move toward the 
    doorway up ahead.  The characters will eventually open the door and step into 
    the corridor.
    
    == CORRIDOR NEAR WATER AREA ==
    
    Quickly grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** behind the door to the right as the 
    characters back away from the door to the water area and turn their light on in 
    the dark corridor.  The characters will begin to talk about Javier then they 
    will turn and move around the corner.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Javier Hidalgo (Normal mode)                         |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters look around the corner of the corridor they enter from    |
    | the Water Area, shoot the second light on the left wall as they round the   |
    | corner to reveal this file.                                                 |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - As your controlled character looks back into the Water 
    Area from the corridor that the two characters enter after opening the door, 
    this first aid spray will be behind the door as the characters turn to the 
    right.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will stare down at a dead body as the two move down the 
    corridor. Before long, an [ANUBIS] will hop in view as the characters stare at 
    the dead body.  After surveying the dead body and the dark corridor behind them 
    once again, the characters will open the door at the end of the dark corridor.
    
    == WATER BRIDGE ==
    
    Their attention will be caught by a [HUNTER GAMMA] on the platform up above 
    shortly before the characters turn to the right as a [HUNTER GAMMA] prepares to 
    hop out of the water and attack them.  Have the submachine gun ready to blast 
    the Hunter Gamma in the water as it leaps toward the characters.  The Hunter 
    Gamma on the high platform will leap down to the bridge then attack.  The 
    characters will enter the next room after the second Hunter Gamma is defeated.
    
    == CORRIDOR NEAR WATER BRIDGE ==
    
    The characters will look down the left path straight ahead and the right path. 
    You'll have a choice of paths here:
    
    == GO RIGHT ==
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Get-Well Card                                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters look down the right pathway or move down the pathway when |
    | the choice of paths is given, shoot the light on the wall at the end near   |
    | the door to reveal this file.                                               |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will move down the right corridor then step through the door. 
    Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** on the outside platform.  They will look to 
    the right and see THREE [ZOMBIES] move along the bridge that leads to the dark 
    corridor that they just exited from.  Try to get a headshot on one of the 
    zombies before the characters turn to the left as [HUNTER GAMMA] jumps out of 
    the water and lands on the platform with them.  Blast the Hunter Gamma and the 
    characters will reenter the corridor.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Lying on the platform that the characters will step 
    out onto if they choose the right path once a choice of paths is given in the 
    corridor near the water bridge.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Use the handgun to shoot the THREE [ZOMBIES] as they approach the characters in 
    the tunnel to stop their dashes then blast them in the head.  The characters 
    will move back to the area with branching corridors and you can once again 
    choose a direction.
    
    == GO LEFT (Go Straight if coming back from right path) ==
    
    Pick up the **CROSSBOW AMMO** as the characters turn the right corner up ahead. 
    They will be attacked by TWO [IVY +XY's] as they turn the corner.  These are 
    basically just like the Ivys fought in the Memory of a Lost City scenario, but 
    they are a bit more aggressive.  Don't rely on just your handgun to shoot these 
    enemies if they are in a group and close to your character like they are here 
    or the character might suffer damage.  Pull out the shotgun or the submachine 
    gun and blast them in their mouth area.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - Lying along the right corridor if the left path is chosen 
    in the set of branching paths.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will walk toward the door at the end of the corner ahead.
    
    == GO STRAIGHT (Go right if coming back from right path) ==
    
    As the characters move ahead, FIVE [ZOMBIES] will move around the corner. Grab 
    the **CROSSBOW AMMO** from off to the left as the characters walk toward the 
    door.  Your controlled character will look down the hall to the left as your 
    partner checks the door.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - Lying along the left corridor as the characters walk toward 
    the door off to the left if the straight path is chosen from the beginning.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == ALL PATHS MEET ==
    
    The door won't open, so the characters will move down the corridor ahead, but 
    something will hop by as it heads to the left.  When the characters turn the 
    left corner an [ANUBIS] will knock your controlled character down then attack. 
    The characters will open the door at the end of the hall then step outside.
    
    == OUTSIDE STAIRCASE ==
    
    Immediately pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** near the railing ahead before the 
    characters move too far toward the railing.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying along the walkway below the set of stairs when the 
    characters step out to the staircase area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Leon and Krauser will survey the area alongside the river below as they move up 
    the stairs.  They will stare toward the catwalk up above them then enter the 
    dark corridor beyond the next door.
    
    == CORRIDOR NEAR OUTSIDE STAIRCASE ==
    
    Pick up the --GOLD-- along the right alcove as the characters move toward left 
    corner up ahead.  The characters will eventually turn as TWO [PLAGUE CRAWLERS] 
    prepare to attack from behind them.  These insect creatures are much like the 
    enemies from Resident Evil Outbreak.  Blast them with the shotgun.  The 
    characters will turn and look down the corridor to the left, so grab the 
    **GRENADE PICKUP** at the end.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Pickup - After the characters fight the group of plague crawlers in 
    the dark corridor past the outside staircase, this will be at the end of the 
    hall as they turn to the left.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    While the characters continue down the corridor, ONE [ZOMBIE] will appear up 
    ahead.  These reddish mercenary zombies are much more aggressive than normal 
    zombies, so be prepared to fire at them to stop their dashing.  Gunshots to 
    halt their dashing is the most important part when fighting mercenary zombies. 
    ANOTHER [ZOMBIE] will dash out from the right corridor as the characters back 
    away from the first.  Their aggression can be quite a surprise to a player that 
    is not ready for them.  DO NOT reload as the characters turn.
    
    The characters will turn around as TWO MORE MERCENARY [ZOMBIES] rush toward 
    them, so be prepared to blast them.  Always shoot them to stop their dashes 
    then go for headshots.  The characters will look down both corridors ahead as a 
    choice of paths is given:
    
    == GO STRAIGHT ==
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will be down the corridor to the right and TWO [ZOMBIES] will 
    get up as the first three fall then ONE FINAL [ZOMBIE] will get up eventually. 
    The characters will continue to the door at the end of the corridor and open 
    it.
    
    == GO RIGHT ==
    
    The characters will move down the right corridor.  They will notice the sound 
    of some creature moving in the area.  As they turn around to check, TWO 
    [JUMPING MANEATERS] will move out from the left corridor behind them.  One will 
    be on the floor and one will move out from the left ceiling.  Blast them then 
    the characters will turn back toward the corridor ahead and see THREE [ZOMBIES] 
    rising then they will quickly open the door and step into the next area.
    
    == WATER PLATFORM ==
    
    SEVERAL [PIRANHA] will be swimming in the water past the railing.  They won't 
    attack but the characters can toss a grenade into the water or blast them for 
    some extra kills.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** to the right as the characters 
    turn.  The characters will open the elevator doors and enter the elevator.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Along the water platform to the right after the characters 
    exit the dark corridor past the outside staircase.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == WATERWAY ==
    
    The characters will exit back out to the waterway area where they were 
    previously at during the last chapter.  There is some **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** 
    along the left walkway and some **SHOTGUN AMMO** along the right walkway as the 
    characters step away from the elevator and look to the left.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Along the left side of the walkway as the characters 
    look to the left after exiting the elevator in the waterway area.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Along the right side of the walkway as the characters look 
    to the left after exiting the elevator in the waterway area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    While stepping across the catwalk that is hanging over the rushing water, 
    SEVERAL [BATS] will fly toward the characters and a few of them will attack.  
    Slash at them with the knife to rack up on kills.  The ones that attack can be 
    shot with the handgun as they hover in the air.  The characters will rush down 
    the right walkway along the side of the waterway.
    
    The characters will turn around as a [HUNTER GAMMA] dashes toward them followed 
    by ANOTHER [HUNTER GAMMA] after the first.  After the Hunters are finished, the 
    characters will turn back around as an [ANUBIS] hops on the walls near them 
    shortly before attacking.  [BATS] will fly by to the right as the Anubis 
    attacks.  As the characters turn back around, slash the [BATS] with the knife. 
    The characters will turn back around and spot THREE [JUMPING MANEATERS] below 
    the ramp.  They will open the door to the Gear Room then step inside.
    
    == MACHINE ROOM ==
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Communication from Krauser 2 (Hard mode)             |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Shoot the bulletin board near the entrance door to the machine room. This   |
    | is on the left wall as the characters enter the room.  It can be shot while |
    | Manuela tries to unlock the door to the room on the other side also.        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    The characters will step by all the dead bodies in the room and move toward the 
    door on the other side of the room.  The door has water leaking out of it from 
    the water build up that has flooded the room on the other side.  It's locked, 
    needless to say.  Manuela will meet up with the characters eventually.
    
    The pressure of the water will start to push against the door and make a 
    racket. The characters will spot the valve handles to lower the water pressure 
    beyond the pipes along the side of the room.  Manuela will quickly crawl 
    underneath the pipes to get to the valve handles.
    
    A total of THREE [ZOMBIES] will stand up and attack from the dead bodies to the 
    left as Manuela moves toward the valve handles.  As Manuela rushes toward the 
    third valve handle a [ZOMBIE] will get up from the area behind the pipes and 
    rush toward her as the characters move around the left side of the pipes.  
    Shoot the zombie while it grapples Manuela when the characters look back toward 
    her. TWO MERCENARY [ZOMBIES] will get up from off to the left and attack.  
    Don't worry about headshots that much, just shoot them to kill them since they 
    are very aggressive.
    
    The characters will look back toward Manuela as she moves to another valve then 
    will turn back and face TWO [ZOMBIES].  Shoot the TWO [ZOMBIES] that try to 
    attack Manuela as she rotates the final valve when the characters look toward 
    her from behind a rotating gear.  The gear will get in the way just a bit while 
    trying to shoot the zombies.  Javier will speak over the intercom and order his 
    guards to bring Manuela back to him.
    
    Something will start to pound at the nearby door.  The characters will rejoin 
    Manuela in front of the locked door.  The door will unlock right before the 
    door in the back is broken down then the characters will run into the tunnel 
    ahead.
    
    == WATERWAY TUNNEL ==
    
    Grab the **GREEN HERB** off to the left at the end of the ramp once the 
    characters turn to face it.  An [ANUBIS] will hop down toward the characters 
    from off to the right then attack after hopping off several walls.  The 
    characters will run through the water then move up the ladder.  While halfway 
    up the ladder, take out the shotgun or the submachine gun and blast the [HUNTER 
    GAMMAS] in the water below as the characters turn around.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying along the left side near the water at the end of the 
    ramp. Grab this when the characters turn away from looking back at the door, 
    before the Anubis attacks.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will step onto the walkway up above.  Grab the --GOLD-- at the 
    end of the walkway right before the characters look below and spot the 
    [JABBERWOCK S3] that was banging on the door earlier.  This creature looks 
    ferocious, but he isn't all that bad.  Blast him with the handgun while the 
    characters stare toward him.  Hit him in his exposed heart on the right (his 
    left) side of his chest.  The characters will step into the elevator and take 
    it to the top floor.
    
    == TOP OF THE DAM ==
    
    After the characters step out of the elevator, they will look down the left 
    corridor and THREE [IVY +XY's] will be moving toward them from the back of the 
    corridor.  Take out the handgun and blast them in their mouths one by one.  
    There is no reason to use the shotgun or submachine gun since they are at quite 
    a distance from the characters.
    
    After surveying the area below from the outside catwalk, the characters will 
    move up the stairs.  As they approach the top of the second set of stairs, try 
    to pick up the **GREEN HERB** as the characters reach the top.  If you miss it, 
    you can grab this later.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Javier's Private Messages                            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters step off the second set of stairs and reach the top of  |
    | the dam, they will look to the right and four red cones will be in the      |
    | distance.  Shoot the third red cone from the left to reveal this file.      |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying at the top of the second set of stairs as the characters 
    reach the top of the dam.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After the characters survey the area, a [JABBERWOCK S3] will jump down and 
    attack.  A Jabberwock's weak point is its exposed heart on the left side of 
    it's chest.  Blast it in the heart with the handgun or submachine gun.  If your 
    handgun is powered up enough, it will make a fine weapon to defeat Jabberwocks 
    with.  The Jabberwock will try to cover its front half by shielding itself with 
    its arms, but keep shooting its arms to break its shielding then shoot it in 
    the heart.
    
    As the camera zooms in, one Jabberwock will hop over the crate in the distance 
    and then the characters will turn as another Jabberwock appears behind them.  
    The characters will run toward the stairs then turn and face the TWO 
    [JABBERWOCK S3's].  Take out the submachine gun and kill one of them with rapid 
    fire to the heart then finish the other off with the handgun.  The characters 
    will begin to talk with Manuela after finishing off the Jabberwocks and then a 
    cutscene will trigger and the chapter will end.
    
    |**************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Suppressing the Virus ****************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  4               [OJ04] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |              "It helps with the pain, keeping the virus at bay."            |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Conviction (Easy), What Really Happened 
    (Easy), Sorrow (Easy), South American Ant (Normal), Mercenary Zombie (Normal)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: Second Form Hilda, Duralumin Case
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Small Keys
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 5
    Unlockable Files: The Sacred Serpent's Crime Syndicate, Veronica Plant, 
    Javier's Mansion, Communication from Krauser 3, Javier's Memorandum (1991)
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    NOTE: All of the zombies fought in this chapter are Mercenary zombies that have 
    increased aggression compared to the zombies in other chapters.  You might have 
    to switch to the submachine gun at times while fighting a normal zombie group. 
    Keep in mind that a few handgun shots to any portion of the body will stop a 
    zombie that is trying to attack.  It's a good idea to have the stopping power 
    of your handgun upgraded above default level to have a better chance at 
    stopping their dashes.
    
    Javier will begin to speak to Manuela as the characters survey the base camp in 
    front of the front gates to his mansion.  Several [ZOMBIES] will start to group 
    up ahead.  All of the zombies fought in this chapter are Mercenary zombies with 
    increased aggression.
    
    The characters will move ahead as the zombies gather up ahead.  As they turn to 
    the left TWO [ZOMBIES] will dash at them.  Your partner will help to blast 
    them.  Use handgun shots to the body to stop their dashing.  The characters 
    will turn to the right and THREE SPITTER [ZOMBIES] will be behind some 
    sandbags.  All three of them have grenades strapped to their chest portion.  
    Take out the handgun or submachine gun and blast the middle zombie in his 
    grenade strap to make it explode and defeat all three of them.  Kill them 
    quickly and don't worry about headshots.  Fire at their vomit if they happen to 
    attack.
    
    As the characters turn and run to the right, FOUR [ZOMBIES] will move out of a 
    military truck and attack.  The partner will help out a bit with this battle as 
    well.  Use the handgun and shoot the zombies in the chest if they ever start to 
    dash. The characters will move ahead then turn back and look to the left as 
    THREE [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  Two of them will climb out of metal crate. 
    Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** to the right of the crate (be quick!) before 
    the characters turn and face the FOUR [ZOMBIES] near the truck.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - This will be lying to the right of the crate that the 
    characters turn toward after fighting the spitter zombies.  There will be a 
    zombie crawling out of the crate.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will quickly move in between some large crates, but they will 
    stop as TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] hop along the crates above them.  Take out the 
    submachine gun or shotgun and blast the Hunter Gammas as they land.  Quickly 
    grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** that can be seen through the doorway of the 
    building up ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - Lying inside of the building in the distance as the two 
    characters step in between two large crates.  Two Hunter Gammas will attack as 
    the characters approach the building.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After moving in between the crates, the characters will turn to the left and 
    face FOUR [ZOMBIES] that move out from inside the left crate.  Your partner 
    will help out during this fight as well.  THREE [ZOMBIES] can be seen behind 
    the left crate door as the characters prepare to turn and run to the right side 
    of the crate.  They will run along the right side as zombies chase them from 
    behind.
    
    Take out the shotgun when the TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] hop in front of the 
    characters then blast them.  The characters will look toward the front gate of 
    the mansion that has FOUR [ZOMBIES] behind it then turn back around as FOUR 
    [ZOMBIES] move out of a crate behind them.  The partner will help shoot the 
    four in the crate.
    
    Manuela will lead the characters to the entrance doors of an underground 
    passage.  The entrance doors will open and FOUR [ZOMBIES] will attack.  Be 
    ready to shoot one of the zombies on the right side that rushes at the 
    characters as the doors open.  THREE [ZOMBIES] will move out of the crate to 
    the left but the characters will rush through the open doors and move down the 
    stairs.
    
    == PRISON CORRIDOR 1 ==
    
    Pick up the **GREEN HERB** off to the left at the bottom of the stairs.  
    Manuela will close the doors behind the characters.  Zombie moans can be heard 
    in the distance as the characters move down the stairs up ahead.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying to the left of the doorway at the bottom of the stairs 
    in the Prison Corridor area.  This is right after the characters escape from 
    the zombies in the camp outside of Javier's Mansion.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will turn on the light then move down the stairs and enter a 
    corridor with holding cells.  Several zombies will be inside the holding cells 
    as the characters look to the left while moving down the corridor.  The door in 
    the back of the characters and the corridor ahead will seal off eventually then 
    the characters will turn as the cell doors open and SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] rush 
    toward the characters.
    
    Toss a grenade right as the characters turn to left and see the zombies break 
    out the first cell and this will kill off many of the close range zombies.  Use 
    the handgun to shoot and cancel any dashing that the rest of the zombies might 
    do.  You can get some easy headshots on the zombies in the back of the group.
    
    Manuela will search the room for a way out and then push a metal insignia on 
    the door.  The wall will move inward then slide to the side and reveal a hidden 
    page covered in blood and organs.
    
    == BLOODY CORRIDOR ==
    
    A choice of two paths will be given as the characters enter the corridor.
    
    == LEFT PATH ==
    
    The characters will walk toward a cell up ahead.  Pick up the **GREEN HERB** 
    inside as the characters open the cell door.  The wooden crates inside can be 
    shot to reveal --GOLD-- among other items.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> Veronica Plant                                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left when a     |
    | choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell eventually. |
    | Blast open the left wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to reveal    |
    | this file.                                                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> The Sacred Serpent's Crime Syndicate                 |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left when a     |
    | choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell eventually. |
    | Blast open the top middle wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to     |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Lying in the cell with the wooden crates in the bloody 
    corridor when the left path is chosen.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    TWO [PLAGUE CRAWLERS] will attack from behind as the characters exit the cell. 
    Take out the shotgun and blast them.  TWO [ZOMBIES] will rush at the characters 
    as they move down the left path after fighting the plague crawlers.
    
    == RIGHT PATH ==
    
    The characters will move to the right then look into a closed cell.  They will 
    turn and TWO [ZOMBIES] will attack.  Blast the zombies then the characters will 
    turn back around and open the cell door.  Shoot the left crate for some 
    **CROSSBOW AMMO** and shoot the middle crate to reveal some **GRENADE LAUNCHER 
    AMMO**.  [ANTS] will eventually dive off the ceiling inside the cell and attack 
    the characters, so knife slash them off.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - Shoot the left crate inside the cell down the right path.
    [ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Shoot the middle crate inside the cell down the 
    right path.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After facing the ants, the characters will turn around and walk down the 
    corridor behind them.  A [PLAGUE CRAWLER] will attack from off to the left as 
    they step near the door with the insignia toward the end.
    
    ** BOTH PATHS MEET HERE **
    
    When the characters reach the next door with an insignia, that door will move 
    into the wall then slide aside to reveal another corridor with cells.
    
    == PRISON CORRIDOR 2 ==
    
    After the characters survey the room, THREE [ZOMBIES] will rush out of the 
    right cell as the characters turn to the right.  Be ready to shoot the zombies 
    in front to keep them from dashing.  The doorway to the right will seal off 
    eventually then the corridor to the left will begin to seal off but the 
    characters will rush toward it and slide underneath the metal door as it 
    closes.
    
    As the characters turn to the right in the next corridor, grab the **SUBMACHINE 
    GUN AMMO**.  They will move toward the ladder to the right and climb it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - Beside the ladder to the right as the characters 
    slide under the metal door as it closes in the second Prison Corridor.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    == OUTDOOR AREA ==
    
    The characters will climb up to an outside area.  Pick up the **SHOTGUN AMMO** 
    lying against the wall to the left as the characters examine the dead bodies.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Javier's Mansion                                     |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters step off the ladder that they climb to reach the Outdoor  |
    | Area, shoot the first overhead lantern to their right along the pillars.    |
    | This lantern faces the characters.  NOT the one that faces to the left.     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Lying to the left as the characters step away from the 
    ladder that they climb to reach the outside area.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    There is a **GREEN HERB** off to the left as the characters turn to the right 
    and move down the right path.  This can be grabbed later, but its best to get 
    it as soon as you can to avoid trying to grab it amongst the chaos that is 
    about to ensue.
    
    Soon yells of a nearby Anubis will be heard from behind.  The characters will 
    turn toward the water and look around.  They will turn around and an [ANUBIS] 
    will hop out from around the side of the pillars and move toward him.  Try to 
    defeat him with the handgun if possible but switch to the submachine gun or 
    shotgun instead of reloading if you have to.
    
    An Anubis will fall to the right and another Anubis will fall from behind.  The 
    characters will rush to the other side of the outside area.  Be ready to shoot 
    rapidly with the handgun as THREE [ZOMBIES] rush at the characters as soon as 
    they round the left pillar on the opposite side of the area.
    
    Directly after the zombies are finished, an [ANUBIS] will jump out from behind 
    the pillar behind the characters and ANOTHER [ANUBIS] will appear along with 
    him.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Communication from Krauser 3 (Hard mode only)        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters face off against a group of three zombies then turn and |
    | face two Anubis in the outside area of Javier's Mansion, shoot the second   |
    | hanging light to the right to reveal this file.  It's hanging off of a      |
    | pillar and is the last light that can be seen in the background.            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Take out the shotgun and blast the two Anubis.  Don't reload.  Switch to the 
    submachine gun if the shotgun runs out of shells.  The characters will begin to 
    talk then they will open the metal door up ahead.
    
    == GREENHOUSE ==
    
    After stepping into the greenhouse, the characters will examine the area then 
    turn to the right as a [JABBERWOCK S3] stands on the walkway above the path to 
    the side.  Blast the Jabberwock with the handgun as he falls and begins to walk 
    toward the characters and he'll fall shortly.
    
    The characters will spot a dead researcher from Umbrella to the right as they 
    walk along the path ahead.  Grab the **SUBMACHINE GUN AMMO** along the stairs 
    as they begin to step up to the walkway above.  When the characters reach the 
    top of the walkway, **CROSSBOW AMMO** can be seen to the far left on the other 
    side of the walkway.  Try to grab it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Submachine Gun Ammo - In the middle portion of the stairs in the greenhouse 
    after the characters fight the first Jabberwock.
    [ ] Crossbow Ammo - On the opposite end of the walkway near the stairs.  This 
    can be grabbed well before the characters reach it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    After looking toward some dead bodies below, the characters will turn around 
    and face a [HUNTER GAMMA] that leaps in front of them.  He can be finished off 
    with the handgun if it is powered enough, but the shotgun will work just as 
    well.  Eventually, the characters will turn once again as ANOTHER [HUNTER 
    GAMMA] leaps onto the walkway behind them.
    
    While they move along the walkway, a Jabberwock will fall onto the walkway as 
    the characters dash quickly ahead.  The characters will turn back around and 
    the [JABBERWOCK S3] will leap onto the walkway with them.  The characters will 
    run as the Jabberwock chases them then suddenly turn and fight it.  Grab the 
    crossbow ammo if you haven't already after the battle.
    
    The characters will move down the set of stairs at the end of the walkway. They 
    will turn and face TWO [IVY +XYs] as they reach the bottom.  Shoot the Ivys 
    with the shotgun since they are close.  As the characters move ahead, they will 
    have to turn back around as TWO [HUNTER GAMMAS] hop out of the water to the 
    side and attack.
    
    SEVERAL [ZOMBIES] will get up off the floor up ahead but a [JABBERWOCK S3] will 
    leap down and kill off all of the zombies but ONE [ZOMBIE].  The Jabberwock and 
    the single zombie will walk toward the characters.  Really, the handgun works 
    fine for this battle if you kill off the zombie quickly.  The characters will 
    open the door at the other end of the greenhouse then walk through the corridor 
    ahead and enter the elevator and take it to the top floor.
    
    == WAREHOUSE ==
    
    When they characters exit the elevator, they will turn to the left as TWO 
    [ZOMBIES] move toward them.  Try to for quick headshots with the handgun.  Grab 
    the **GREEN HERB** in the corner to the right while facing them.  The 
    characters will round the corner up ahead then open the doors to the warehouse.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Green Herb - Once the characters step out of the elevator after taking it 
    up from the greenhouse, this will be to the left as the characters fight two 
    zombies.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    There are several ammo pickups in the warehouse, but you need to blast the 
    crates to reveal them.  As the characters spot two Anubis on the ceiling above, 
    they will walk toward some shelves with crates on them to the right.  Blast the 
    wooden box to the left to reveal some **MAGNUM AMMO**.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - As the characters walk toward the shelves to the right in the 
    warehouse, blast the wooden crate on the left shelf to reveal this.  The wooden 
    crate has two green crates below it.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    THREE [ZOMBIES] will attack as the characters move in between the shelves.  Be 
    sure to shoot them in the chest with the handgun as they run to cancel their 
    aggressive dashing.  The characters will turn eventually and an [ANUBIS] will 
    be up above them then it will hop down toward the characters and attack.  The 
    characters will run past the shelves as two Anubis land on the shelves.  The 
    characters will dash out into the open area ahead.
    
    An [ANUBIS] will land near the crates to the left and then hop in front of the 
    characters and then ANOTHER [ANUBIS] will join the first.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  5 --> Javier's Memorandum (1991)                           |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters turn to fight the second group of Anubis in the         |
    | warehouse, shoot the left wooden crate on the right middle shelf in the     |
    | back to reveal this file.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    Blast the Anubis with the shotgun.  It's possible to toss a grenade at them 
    right as the second Anubis hops down to finish them off very quickly.  The 
    characters will turn back toward the shelves and TWO [ANUBIS] will leap onto 
    the shelves then fall in front of the characters and attack.  Like with the 
    first set, you can toss a grenade below them as they land to damage them badly.
    
    While the Anubis are in view, shoot the left crate on the bottom left shelf to 
    reveal some **GRENADE LAUNCHER AMMO**.  Shoot the left crate on the top right 
    shelf to find some **SHOTGUN AMMO**.  The characters will turn back around 
    eventually then walk toward a room with a plastic curtain covering it.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Grenade Launcher Ammo - Shoot the left wooden crate on the bottom left 
    shelf while fighting the second pair of Anubis in the Warehouse.
    [ ] Shotgun Ammo - Shoot the left wooden crate on the top right shelf after 
    fighting the second pair of Anubis in the Warehouse.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> Second Form Hilda
    
    Weak Point:
    
    1) Head (Portion above jaw)
    2) Brain (on backside)
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Acid Vomit: While Hilda is on the suspended platform above the characters, she 
    will vomit acid while they stand below her.  Press the on-screen button command 
    to dodge this attack.
    
    Acid Spit: Hilda looks downward then looks upward and spits acid toward the 
    characters.  Hit her in the head the moment that she starts to lower her head. 
    Use the shotgun since its spread has a greater chance of hitting her.
    
    Tail Spikes: Hilda will lean her head downward then raise her tail and shoot 
    spikes at the characters from her tail.  Blast her head when she moves her head 
    downward to cancel this attack.
    
    Pounce: Hilda leaps on top of the characters then bites them.  Shoot her in the 
    head to avoid the bite.
    
    ---
    
    --> HILDA ATTACKS
    
    NOTE: This battle can be a bit of problem if you don't know how to cancel 
    Hilda's attacks and it can still be a problem even if you do know how to cancel 
    her attacks.  A player must use precise timing when shooting her head to cancel 
    her attacks.  Once you get the timing down, Hilda really isn't that hard of a 
    boss since the battle plays out in a sequence and her health can drained fast 
    at one point in the battle.
    
    Hilda will land and crush the shelves in front of the characters as they try to 
    rush toward the exit door of the warehouse.  You can't take any damage from her 
    at this point so firing at her is pointless.  You can get a real good view of 
    her weak spots while she stands in front of the characters though.  The top 
    portion of her head is a weak spot (above the jaw) and her long brain on her 
    backside is another weak spot.
    
    She will eventually knock the characters to the floor with her jaw.  The 
    characters will get up and look around the room to find Hilda, but they will 
    not see her until they look up and find her on a suspended platform up above. 
    She will eventually vomit some acid down at the characters.  Press the on-
    screen command that displays on the screen to dodge the attack.
    
    --> HILDA GETS ON A PLATFORM
    
    The characters will dodge out of the way then step to the side and stare up at 
    Hilda while she remains on the platform above.  Her attacks must be cancelled 
    here for the characters to move on.  She will either lower her head and prepare 
    to spit acid at the character or she will lower her head then fire needles at 
    them from her tail.  Take out the shotgun and shoot her in the head whenever 
    she lowers her head.  Canceling the attacks is all about timing - it really 
    looks as if you don't cancel the attack when you actually do cancel it since 
    she pauses shortly after the shot.  It's best to fire at her with the shotgun 
    because its spread has a much greater chance of hitting her in a weak spot.  
    The submachine gun can work just as well but you'll have to be more precise.
    
    If she manages to complete an attack, it cannot be canceled at this point.  The 
    characters will eventually run over to the stack of green crates and leap on 
    top of them.  Hilda will perform the same attacks as before, but this time, the 
    acid spit can be shot out of the air.  Fire at the acid with the submachine gun 
    to avoid taking damage.  You'll only have to worry about firing if you fail to 
    cancel her attack though.  One of her attacks must be canceled for the 
    characters to hop up to the next platform.
    
    The characters will eventually leap over to the platform near the crates then 
    face Hilda again.  This is when the characters can damage her greatly.  Fire at 
    her head or the brain on her back side with the submachine gun and cancel her 
    attacks with the shotgun.  Hilda will leap off the top of the platform 
    eventually then try to walk underneath the platform that the characters are on. 
    Press the on-screen button command to leap onto her back.  While the characters 
    are on her back, they will have full view of her back brain.  Take out the 
    shotgun and blast her in the brain.  She will shake while the characters are on 
    her back so shooting her with precise shots to the brain can be a problem.
    
    --> SOOTHING THE SAVAGE BEAST
    
    If Hilda knocks the characters off the platform or if they leap on top of her 
    and then leap off, they will move away then face her again as she turns a 
    reddish color.  Her life can still be drained at this point all up until she 
    looks to the right when Manuela begins to sing.  A sequence will take place 
    where Manuela will sing as Hilda looks toward her.  Manuela will sing until she 
    collapses then Hilda will walk toward her and the characters will step in front 
    of Manuela then the battle will begin once again.
    
    Hilda will now attempt to knock the characters to the floor and bite them.  
    Shoot at her head the whole time to cancel her attacks.  The characters will 
    eventually turn to the right and climb the crates then step up on the platform. 
    Hilda will immediately move below the platform, so the characters will move 
    higher this time.  They will climb up to a catwalk up above then hop onto 
    another platform.  She will continue her acid spit and needle attack throughout 
    the rest of the battle.  If the characters linger on the platform for too long 
    then she will hop on the platform and the characters will leap to another 
    platform.
    
    At this point of the battle, all you need to do is drain her health the rest of 
    the way and the battle will end.  The battle is basically already over once 
    Manuela begins to sing since Hilda's life can be drained with little effort 
    afterwards.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |************* Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Another Pawn of T-Veronica **************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  5               [OJ05] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                       "The virus continues to grow..."                      |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: The Abyss (Easy), Desperation (Easy), End 
    Credits (Easy)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: V Complex, Sterilization Key
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Machine Room Key
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 6 *
    Unlockable Files: End of the Road, Return
    
    * In order to unlock Chapter 6 of Operation Javier, the characters must defeat 
    the V Complex before Manuela can burn the boss with a lot of her blood. There 
    are some scripted burnings that will always happen, but defeat the boss as 
    quickly as possible with a high-powered magnum, shotgun and submachine gun to 
    unlock Chapter 6.
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    == Warehouse ==
    
    Leon, Krauser and Manuela will begin in the warehouse from the last chapter.  A 
    rumbling sound of some creature can be heard as the room shakes and debris 
    falls from the ceiling.  The characters will eventually turn to their right and 
    see a new enemy.
    
    ===============================================================================
    ---------------------------- B O S S  B A T T L E -----------------------------
    
    --> V Complex
    
    Weak Point:
    
    1) Red glowing eyes on midsection.
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Tentacle Whip: A left tentacle rises then falls down and strikes the 
    characters.  Blast the tentacle as it is about to fall.  Sometimes one of the 
    right tentacles will try to strike the characters directly after canceling the 
    first tentacle whip.
    
    Tentacle Acid: The right tentacle rises then shoots an acid ball toward the 
    characters.  Blast the acid ball in mid-air to stop it.
    
    Tentacle Thrust: A left tentacle rises a bit then thrusts toward the 
    characters. Blast the tentacle as it is about to move forward.
    
    Tentacles Slap: A left tentacle will move to the left then rush forward and try 
    to knock the characters away.  Press the on-screen button command to avoid 
    taking damage.
    
    Complex Crush: A tentacle will grab the characters as the Complex rises then it 
    will try to fall on top of them.  Press the on-screen button command to avoid 
    taking damage.
    
    Tentacle Acid x3: After the Complex Crush attack, a tentacle will be above the 
    characters as they look up.  Blast the acid balls that the Complex shoots to 
    avoid damage.  It will shoot three.
    
    ---
    
    --> NEAR THE DOOR
    
    This battle is pretty easy overall.  The V Complex's main weakness are the red 
    glowing eyes in the center.  It will attack with its tentacles.  From the 
    viewpoint at the starting, the left tentacle will rise and then whip toward the 
    characters and the right tentacle will rise and shoot acid at the characters.  
    The left tentacle can be shot to cancel the whip attack and the player can 
    shoot the acid shots from the right tentacle before they hit the characters.
    
    Sometimes the right tentacle will attempt to whip the characters after the left 
    tentacle whip is canceled so be ready to blast it and cancel that attack as 
    well.  It will sometimes hold its left tentacle to the side then try to slap 
    the characters away from it.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge this 
    attack.
    
    --> MOVING TO THE SIDE
    
    Eventually the characters will step to the left of the Complex.  It's left 
    tentacle will perform a thrust attack.  Cancel the attack by shooting the front 
    of the tentacle as it moves toward the characters.  The right tentacle (which 
    used to be left) will now fire acid at the characters.  The Complex may grab 
    the characters with it's right tentacles eventually then rise into the air and 
    hold them underneath.  It will try to fall on the characters.  Press the on-
    screen button command in order to dodge its attack.
    
    After the Complex tries to crush the characters, you'll get a perfect view of 
    the eyes on its mid-section.  Blast them with the shotgun.  A tentacle will be 
    above the characters after dodging the crush and it will spit acid at the 
    characters three times in a row.  Blast the acid shots to avoid taking damage.
    
    --> BLAST THE HELL OUT IT
    
    There's really not much more advice that I can give you while fighting this 
    boss except for aiming for its weak center and spamming the hell out of it with 
    shots from the submachine gun, shotgun or magnum.  Its life will drain pretty 
    quickly.  This boss is only a prelude to what awaits ahead.  Try to avoid 
    getting damaged as much as possible.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    Once all of its health is drained, the top portion will separate from the 
    bottom portion and move back through the ceiling.  Grab the **FIRST AID SPRAY** 
    beside the hole in the wall that the characters will move toward.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] First Aid Spray - After the first battle with the V Complex, this will be 
    to the left of the hole in the wall that the characters head toward.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    Grab the --GOLD-- down the left corridor as the characters step into the 
    hallway behind the hole in the wall.  The characters will move into a tunnel. 
    There is some --GOLD-- at the end of the tunnel as well, so be sure to grab it. 
    A tentacle will eventually move out of the wall behind the characters.  They 
    will race down the corridor and another tentacle will bust out of the wall near 
    the end.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge the second tentacle.
    
    Grab the **MAGNUM AMMO** and the --GOLD-- off the shelf to the left as the 
    characters enter the cell corridor from the tunnel.  They will turn back around 
    and stare toward the opening in the corridor so you can grab the items to the 
    right then as well.
    
    ---------------------------------- ITEM(S) ------------------------------------
    [ ] Magnum Ammo - This is on a shelf to the left as the characters race into 
    the cell corridor after avoiding two tentacles in the tunnel.  The characters 
    will turn back around then the shelf will be on the right.
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    The characters will run down the corridor ahead.  Manuela will begin to stagger 
    a bit.  After opening the doors at the top, the characters will survey the base 
    camp area.
    
    A giant foot from a creature will hit the ground in front of them then the 
    characters will race toward a large metal crate to the side.  The creature will 
    stomp crates as the characters run. It will begin to stomp the sandbags and 
    knock the characters down eventually.
    
    Once they turn around, the characters will get a full view of the V Complex.
    
    ===============================================================================
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    
    --> V Complex
    
    Weak Point:
    
    1) Head
    2) Joints on each leg
    
    ---
    
    Attacks:
    
    Blade Swipe: The Complex will hold one of its blade appendages to the side then 
    try to slash the characters.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge this.
    
    Arm Crush: The Complex will hold up one of its arms and then try to smash the 
    characters.  Press the on-screen button command to dodge this.
    
    Bite: The Complex will roar and moves its head toward the characters and snap 
    at them.  Blast the Complex in the mouth as it moves its head toward the 
    characters to cancel the attack.  The handgun will do just fine.
    
    Tentacle Strike: A tentacle will burrow under the ground and move toward the 
    characters then surface and try to attack them.  Press the on-screen button 
    command that appears to dodge its attack.
    
    Sphere Release: The characters will look toward the bottom side of the Complex 
    and it will release spheres with a red and blue inner glow.  Blast the red 
    spheres to make them explode and destroy the surrounding spheres.  Only blast 
    the blue spheres when there are no nearby red spheres - these will release blue 
    fireballs that can be shot out of the air.
    
    Leg Smash: The Complex will lift one of its legs into the air then try to smash 
    the characters.  Press the on-screen button commands to dodge this.
    
    Tentacle Thrust: A tentacle will surface from the ground then move a bit 
    shortly before trying to stab the characters.  Blast the front portion of the 
    tentacle when it prepares to stab the characters.
    
    Acid Spit: The Complex will hold its head upward and open its mouth then look 
    at the characters and shoot acid at them.  Blast the Complex in the head while 
    its mouth is beginning to open while it looks upward.
    
    Feeler Grab: The Complex will grab the characters with its feelers then hold 
    them up as it open its mouth and prepares to shoot acid at them.  Blast the 
    Complex in the mouth while the characters are in the air in front of it to 
    cancel the attack.
    
    Feeler Strike: The Complex will slam its hand into the ground then lift its 
    head upward and strike the characters with its front head feelers.
    
    Ground Tentacle Acid Spit: If the characters move close to the Complex toward 
    the end of the battle, a tentacle will eventually move up from the ground and 
    try to shoot acid at them.  Blast the top portion of the tentacle to cancel 
    this attack.
    
    ---
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> End of the Road                                      |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Allow Manuela to use her blood to burn the Complex a bunch during the final |
    | boss battle.  Literally stop shooting the boss toward the end and allow her |
    | to toss her blood at the boss to burn it.                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Return                                               |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | Do not allow Manuela to use much of her blood during the final boss battle. |
    | Use high powered weapons such as the magnum, shotgun and submachine gun to  |
    | quickly dispose of the Complex before Manuela uses a bunch of her blood to  |
    | burn the boss.                                                              |
    |                                                                             |
    | Performing this task will also unlock Chapter 6 of Operation Javier.        |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    --> THE V COMPLEX
    
    The V Complex will stand and roar at the beginning of this battle shortly 
    before Javier speaks to the characters.  Take out the handgun and fire at the V 
    Complex's head to drain its health a bit.  Don't use a secondary weapon just 
    yet since it won't take that much damage from it.
    
    Eventually the Complex will hold one of its blade appendages to the side and 
    try to slash the characters.  Press the on-screen button command to avoid 
    taking damage.  It will eventually hold up one of its arms and try to crush the 
    characters, so press the on-screen button command in order to dodge the attack. 
    The Complex will eventually roar then move its head toward the characters to 
    bite them.  Blast it in its mouth to cancel the attack - the handgun works 
    perfectly.  Keep blasting the Complex in the head for the most part at the 
    beginning of this battle.
    
    A scripted event will occur eventually where the Complex will knock the 
    characters down with its blade appendage then try to smash them with its hand. 
    The characters will fall to the ground then dodge its arm and a blade 
    appendage.  A cutscene will play afterwards then the battle will continue.
    
    --> A CONTROLLED VERONICA
    
    There is a **GREEN HERB** near a building off to the right as the characters 
    rush to the side.  They will look back at it eventually.  Manuela will rush 
    toward one of the Complex's legs as the characters stand beside it and she will 
    burn the joint with some of her flaming blood.  Manuela will fall to the ground 
    while holding her right arm.  The characters will look back up at the leg then 
    turn around as something burrows under the ground and moves toward them.
    
    Press the on-screen button command when the tentacle emerges from the ground to 
    dodge its attack.  The characters will look back up at the joint on the leg.  
    Blast the joint with the magnum or the shotgun.  Try to blast it as much as 
    possible before the characters turn.  Manuela will toss her flaming blood at 
    the joint as the characters damage it.  Her blood will damage the Complex as 
    well.  The leg will sometimes rise and attempt to smash the characters.  Press 
    the on-screen button command to dodge the attack.
    
    Eventually the characters will look toward the bottom side of the Complex and 
    glowing spheres will move out from its bottom side.  The spheres have a red or 
    blue glow coming from the center.  Blasting the blue spheres will make them 
    explode into two blue fireballs that will move toward the characters - the 
    fireballs can be shot out of the air.  The red spheres will automatically 
    explode once shot and they will destroy any other spheres around them.  Find 
    the red spheres in the group and blast them to destroy both them and the 
    surrounding blue spheres.  You'll eventually have to shoot some of the blue 
    spheres though.  Use the handgun to destroy the spheres.
    
    The characters will look under the Complex soon and a tentacle will move out of 
    the ground.  Fire at the top portion of the tentacle before it does a forward 
    thrust toward the characters.  Use the submachine gun to blast the top portion 
    of the tentacle.
    
    Once one leg joint has been destroyed, the Complex will collapse.  The 
    characters will rush over to the next leg.  A **GREEN HERB** can be seen near 
    the doorway to the underground while damaging this leg.  Blast the joint on the 
    leg whenever the characters stare up at it.  When the second leg joint is 
    destroyed, the Complex will fall to the ground.  Javier will start to talk to 
    the characters and mention that he will simply regenerate and that he will 
    consume them all, even Manuela.  The characters will rush to the front of the 
    Complex.
    
    --> FACE TO FACE
    
    The characters will turn and face the front side of the Complex. The Complex 
    will open its mouth and showcase Javier.  He will speak with the characters but 
    suddenly the virus will start to take him over and the Complex will consume him 
    as he moves back into its mouth, making him another puppet of T-Veronica just 
    like Alexia and Steve before him.
    
    The life bar for the boss will appear again meaning that you can damage him 
    once more.  The Complex can be finished off for good now.  Take out the magnum 
    if you have it and blast the head of the Complex.  It will attack with its 
    blade appendage slice and the usual tentacle that will burrow under the ground, 
    all of which can be avoided through button commands.
    
    It will also raise its head up then open its mouth and face the characters with 
    its mouth open then fire acid at them.  Blast the Complex while it opens its 
    mouth while holding its head back to cancel this attack.  The Complex will grab 
    the characters with its tentacles at times and hold them in the air then bring 
    them toward its open mouth and spit acid at them.  Blast the open mouth of the 
    Complex while it brings the characters toward its mouth to make it drop them.
    
    Manuela will help the characters out eventually and toss blood at the Complex's 
    mouth as it opens its mouth to attack.
    
    Once the Complex's life has been fully drained, prepared to blast it one more 
    time after it falls to end the battle.  The characters will move toward it then 
    stare down at its head.  Blast its head with a weapon to finish it off and end 
    the battle.
    
    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    ===============================================================================
    
    |***************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - A Darkside Awakens ******************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  6               [OJ06] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                        "There's nothing left to say."                       |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Reserve (Easy), In-depth (Easy), Distress 
    (Easy)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: ---
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Hemostatic
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: "Operation Javier" Chapter 7
    Unlockable Files: CODE: Remnants, Communication from Wesker (Faxed Document), 
    Manuela Veronica, Manuela's Lullaby, Albert Wesker
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    Chapter 6 of Operation Javier is basically Chapter 4 of Operation Javier on a 
    harder difficulty with added dialogue from Jack Krauser.  The walkthrough for 
    Operation Javier Chapter 4 will help you for completing Chapter 6.
    
    Keep in mind that Enemies take off twice as much damage per hit and Green Herbs 
    heal only a fraction of what they do in Normal mode.
    
    You REALLY need to go back to previous chapters and stock up on submachine gun 
    ammo and a bit of shotgun ammo.  Begin this chapter with around 1000 submachine 
    gun bullets and a fully maxed submachine gun, handgun and shotgun to make 
    things easier.
    
    This chapter has files hidden in it in the exact same locations as chapter 4 of 
    Operation Javier.  If you need further detail then look back at the walkthrough 
    for chapter 4 and match up the location to the walkthrough text for a more 
    exact location.
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  1 --> CODE: Remnants                                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left when a     |
    | choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell eventually. |
    | Blast open the left wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to reveal    |
    | this file.                                                                  |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  2 --> Communication from Wesker                            |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left when a     |
    | choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell eventually. |
    | Blast open the top middle wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to     |
    | reveal this file.                                                           |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  3 --> Manuela Veronica (Normal mode)                       |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | As the characters step off the ladder that they climb to reach the Outdoor  |
    | Area, shoot the first overhead lantern to their right along the pillars.    |
    | This lantern faces the characters.  NOT the one that faces to the left.     |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  4 --> Manuela's Lullaby (Hard mode only)                   |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters face off against a group of three zombies then turn and |
    | face two Anubis in the outside area of Javier's Mansion, shoot the second   |
    | hanging light to the right to reveal this file.  It's hanging off of a      |
    | pillar and is the last light that can be seen in the background.            |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    / - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
    |   \ /                                                                   [ ] |
    |  ) o (  F I L E  5 --> Albert Wesker                                        |
    |   / \                                                                       |
    |                                                                             |
    | When the characters turn to fight the second group of Anubis in the         |
    | warehouse, shoot the left wooden crate on the right middle shelf in the     |
    | back to reveal this file.                                                   |
    \ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - /
    
    |************** Pre-Resident Evil 4 - Inner Darkness Unleashed ***************|
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                      O P E R A T I O N  J A V I E R  7               [OJ07] |
    |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
    |                           "For you and I, Leon...                           |
    |                We're merely different sides of the same coin."              |
    |*****************************************************************************|
    
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CHAPTER  INFO = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    Characters: Leon and Krauser
    
    Item/File for finishing Chapter: Stake (Easy), Turning Point (Easy)
    S Rank Item/File on Normal Mode: ---
    S Rank Item/File on Hard Mode  : Virgin Heart
    
    Unlockable Weapon: --
    Unlockable Scenario/Chapter: --
    Unlockable Files: --
    = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
    
    Chapter 7 of Operation Javier is basically Chapter 5 of Operation Javier on a 
    harder difficulty with added dialogue from Jack Krauser.  The walkthrough for 
    Operation Javier Chapter 5 will help you for completing Chapter 7.
    
    Keep in mind that the two bosses take off twice as much damage per hit and 
    Green Herbs heal only a fraction of what they do in Normal mode.
    
    You REALLY need to go back to previous chapters and stock up on submachine gun 
    ammo, shotgun ammo and magnum ammo.  Begin this chapter with around 1000 
    submachine gun bullets, 30 - 40 magnum bullets and around 30 shotgun shells 
    (just in case) and a fully maxed submachine gun, handgun and shotgun to make 
    things easier.
    
    This chapter is really not as hard as chapter 6 since the characters only have 
    to fight two bosses with fairly simple patterns.
    
    
               T H E R E  I S  N O  E N D  T O  T H E  D A R K N E S S.
    
    
    [AR00]
    ===============================================================================
                 _     ____    ____  _   _  ___ __     __ _____  ____  
                / \   |  _ \  / ___|| | | ||_ _|\ \   / /| ____|/ ___| 
               / _ \  | |_) || |    | |_| | | |  \ \ / / |  _|  \___ \ 
              / ___ \ |  _ < | |___ |  _  | | |   \ V /  | |___  ___) |
             /_/   \_\|_| \_\ \____||_| |_||___|   \_/   |_____||____/ 
                                                              
                          F U L L  A R C H I V E  L I S T
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    This section has a full list of all archive items in the game.  On the main 
    menu, go to "Archives" to choose from a variety of categories that contains 
    information about the Resident Evil series.  All archive items are listed in 
    order and there is a listing with each section to show the reader the exact 
    order that they will appear in on-screen.
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    NOTE: I still do not have all the characters listed at this point.  I'm still 
    in the process of getting all S-ranks for the chapter - time constraints. ;)
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                      CHARACTERS
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10]
    
    
    01 - Leon S. Kennedy
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario with at least an A-rank on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Jack Krauser
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario with at least an A-rank on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Guide
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: After the body of the guide is dragged up under the water in the 
    building where the characters meet up with him, shoot the laptop on the table 
    to reveal this file.
    
    04 - Manuela Hidalgo
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Shoot the third light off to the left after the characters turn the 
    first right corner after speaking with Manuela in the corridor area after the 
    water area.  Two zombies will attack right before the characters move down the 
    corridor.  This light is nearly above a dead body that is slumped over against 
    the left wall.  The light is lit up. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    05 - Javier Hidalgo
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: As the characters look around the corner of the corridor they enter 
    from the Water Area, shoot the second light on the left wall as they round the 
    corner to reveal this file.
    
    06 - Manuela Veronica
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: As the characters step off the ladder that they climb to reach the 
    Outdoor Area, shoot the first overhead lantern to their right along the 
    pillars. This lantern faces the characters.  NOT the one that faces to the 
    left.
    
    07 -
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    08 -
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    09 - Jack Krauser
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    10 - 
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
    
    
    01 - Leon S. Kennedy
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario with at least an A-rank on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Claire Redfield
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario with at least an A-rank on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Robert Kendo
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: While in front of the police station and facing the double door 
    entrance, shoot the light on the right to reveal this file.  This is best shot 
    around the time that the zombie dogs attack. (Must be on at least Normal 
    difficulty)
    
    04 - Marvin Branagh
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: After the characters step into the Reception Room, shoot the picture 
    hanging on the wall in the back of room as the characters move toward the 
    corridor on the other side of the room. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    05 - Brian Irons
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Once the characters step out of the elevator in the basement 
    corridor, they will round the corner to the right up ahead.  Shoot the back 
    hanging light as they look down the corridor to reveal this file.  Sherry will 
    move under this light when the Licker attacks. (Must be on at least Normal 
    difficulty)
    
    06 - Ben Bertolucci
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters step around the right corner in the Cell 
    Corridor, shoot the light above the door to the right as Ben screams, "No! Get 
    away from me!" from the cell area ahead to reveal this file. (Must be on at 
    least Normal difficulty)
    
    07 - Sherry Birkin
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the group of two Lickers attack after the characters turn from 
    facing the first Licker in the Control Panel Corridor, look to the right and 
    shoot the barely-visible control panel on the wall to reveal this file. You 
    might actually have to get hit in order to shoot it since there won't be much 
    of a chance to shoot it after the Lickers have been killed.  It's the first 
    control panel in view. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    08 - HUNK
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the 
    tunnel, it will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file 
    will be on the back right. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    09 - Ada Wong
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Near the exit door of the Control Panel Corridor, a single Licker 
    will attack followed by two Lickers.  The characters will turn and two more 
    Lickers will drop from the ceiling behind them.  Shoot the furthest control 
    panel on the right wall to reveal this file.  Don't shoot this while the 
    Lickers are in the area.  Wait until they are killed then shoot the control 
    panel as Mr. X walks into view from the right hallway up ahead. (Must be on at 
    least Normal difficulty)
    
    10 - Annette Birkin
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Shoot the top light on the right wall as the first two zombies 
    attack in the Emergency Corridor that the characters step into after climbing 
    down the outer walkway ladders. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    11 - William Birkin
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: While the characters move down the corridor that leads to the 
    elevator in the Underground Elevator Corridor, shoot the second to last light 
    on the ceiling to reveal this file. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    12 - Leon S. Kennedy
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    13 -
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    14 -
    
    Scenario: 
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09]
    
    
    01 - Steve Burnside
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Claire Redfield (Rockfort)
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Alfred Ashford
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: In Alfred's mansion, there is a small vase on a table in the front 
    lobby that must be shot to reveal this file.  The vase is lying against the 
    wall behind the front desk. It can be seen much more easily as the characters 
    move toward the locked door off to the left behind the front desk.  It's pretty 
    hard to hit since it's so small and thin.
    
    This vase can be shot during the fight with Alfred also. While the characters 
    take cover behind the first pillar at the beginning of the fight, you can see 
    the vase against the wall. (Must be on at least Normal difficulty)
    
    04 - Alexia Ashford
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: When the characters' path is blocked off by two tentacles once they 
    reach the top of the stairs in the front room, shoot the light on the left wall 
    above the middle portion of the stairs to reveal this file.
    
    05 - Chris Redfield
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    06 -
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    07 -
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    08 - Chris Redfield
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    09 -
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 
    Condition:
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        ENEMIES
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    
    01 - Villager Zombies
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Javier Zombies
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Jumping Maneater
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    04 - Hilda
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode with an S-rank.
    
    05 - Plague Crawler
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    06 - Hunter Gamma
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    07 - Dam Worker Zombies
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    08 - South American Bat
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    09 - Anubis
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    10 - Jabberwock S3
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    11 - Ivy +YX
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    12 - South American Ant
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    13 - Piranha
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    14 - Mercenary Zombie
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    15 - Second Form Hilda
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    16 - V Complex
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]
    
    
    01 - Town Zombie
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Zombie Dogs
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Crow
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    04 - Police Zombie
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    05 - Licker
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    06 - G Adult Body
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    07 - G Young Bodies
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    08 - Giant Spiders
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    09 - Little Spiders
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    10 - First Form G
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    11 - Large Roach
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    12 - Lurker
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    13 - Alligator
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    14 - Ivy
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    15 - Tyrant T-103
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    16 - Evolved Licker
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    17 - Giant Moth
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode
    
    18 - Baby Moth
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode
    
    19 - Second Form G
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    20 - Third Form G
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    21 - Fourth Form G
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    22 - Fifth Form G
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    23 - Super Tyrant
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22]
    
    
    01 - Graveyard Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Prisoner Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    03 - Guard Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    04 - Bat
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    05 - Trainee Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    06 - Black Widow
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    07 - Father Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    08 - Gulp Worm
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    09 - Hunter II
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    10 - Bandersnatch
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Normal mode.
    
    11 - Tyrant (T-103 Mass Produced Type)
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    12 - Researcher Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    13 - Worker Zombie
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    14 - Moth
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    15 - Parasites
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    16 - Nasferatu
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    17 - Ants
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    18 - Tentacle
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario on Normal mode.
    
    19 - Steve Monster
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    20 - First Form Alexia
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    21 - Second Form Alexia
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    22 - Third Form Alexia
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the scenario with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        ITEMS
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12]
    
    
    01 - Lighter
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Ink Ribbon
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    03 - Valve Handle
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    04 - Factory Key
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    05 - Battery Pack
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    06 - Mining Room Key
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    07 - Duralumin Case
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    08 - Small Keys
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    09 - Sterilization Key
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    10 - Machine Room Key
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    11 - Hemostatic
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    12 - Virgin Heart
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    
    01 - Lockpick
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Locker Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    03 - Blue Card Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    04 - Spade Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    05 - Unicorn Medal
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    06 - Golden Cog
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    07 - Manhole Opener
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    08 - Knight Plug
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    09 - Picture (Sherry's Family)
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    10 - Wolf Medal
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    11 - Picture (Ada and Jon)
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    12 - Power Room Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    13 - Main Fuse
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    14 - MO Disk
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    15 - Master Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    16 - Platform Key
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
    
    
    01 - Family Picture
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    02 - Special Alloy Emblem
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    03 - Ceramic Vase
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    04 - ID Card
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    05 - Door Knob
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    06 - King Ant Object
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    07 - Queen Ant Object
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    08 - Music Box Record
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    09 - Airport Key
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    10 - Control Lever
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    11 - Alfred's Ring
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    12 - Alexander's Earring
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    13 - Alexia's Choker
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Normal mode.
    
    14 - Golden Dragonfly
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter with an S-rank on Hard mode.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        TEXT
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12]
    
    
    01 - The Sacred Serpents Crime Syndicate
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left 
    when a choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell 
    eventually.  Blast open the top middle wooden crate in the group of wooden 
    crates to reveal this file.
    
    02 - Written Orders
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Once the characters round the corner after running from the zombies 
    at the beginning, there will be a few baskets of fruit on the table to the 
    left.  Shoot the first fruit basket with yellow fruit inside of it to reveal 
    this file.
    
    03 - The Waterside Village
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: After or before your partner is attacked, while your controlled 
    character looks down the street to the left, shoot the first fruit bag on the 
    floor to the left to reveal this file.
    
    04 - Javier Dam
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: After the characters fight four zombies in the stairway corridor, 
    they will turn and fight two Hunter Gammas.  They will pass down the corridor 
    then turn to the left and see a green herb in front of door.  As they turn the 
    right corner a light will be on the wall.  Shoot the light to reveal this file. 
    It will be on the right wall as they pass by it.  Hit it quick!
    
    05 - Get-Well Card
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: As the characters look down the right pathway or move down the 
    pathway when the choice of paths is given, shoot the light on the wall at the 
    end near the door to reveal this file.
    
    06 - Javier's Private Messages
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: When the characters step off the second set of stairs and reach the 
    top of the dam, they will look to the right and four red cones will be in the 
    distance.  Shoot the third red cone from the left to reveal this file.
    
    07 - Note (Manuela's Realization)
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: In the corridor where the Hunter Gammas bust through a door off to 
    the left, the characters will pass by the door and look to the outside walkway 
    and see two zombies and a grenade pickup along that walkway. The characters 
    will turn and look down a long hallway with a door at the end. Shoot the light 
    above the door to reveal this file.
    
    08 - Javier's Mansion
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: As the characters step off the ladder that they climb to reach the 
    Outdoor Area, shoot the first overhead lantern to their right along the 
    pillars.  This lantern faces the characters.  NOT the one that faces to the 
    left.
    
    09 - Javier's Memorandum (1991)
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters turn to fight the second group of Anubis in the 
    warehouse, shoot the left wooden crate on the right middle shelf in the back to 
    reveal this file.
    
    10 - Veronica Plant
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left 
    when a choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell 
    eventually.  Blast open the left wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to 
    reveal this file.
    
    11 - Communications from Wesker (Faxed Documents)
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left 
    when a choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell 
    eventually.  Blast open the top middle wooden crate in the group of wooden 
    crates to reveal this file.
    
    12 - CODE: Remnants
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: In the Bloody Corridor past the Cell Corridor, choose to go left 
    when a choice of paths is given.  The characters will walk into a cell 
    eventually.  Blast open the left wooden crate in the group of wooden crates to 
    reveal this file.
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    [17] [18] [19] [20]
    
    
    01 - Raccoon City September 9, 1998
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Once the characters enter Kendo's Gun Shop after escaping the first 
    street shoot the left suitcase on the counter with the cash register after both 
    characters look over Kendo's body.  Facing the suitcases when the characters 
    first enter the shop, this is the second suitcase from the left.
    
    02 - Raccoon City Police Department
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Once the characters enter the Stairway Corridor, they will fight off 
    a few zombies at the bottom of the stairs.  Shoot the light on the left corner 
    wall as the characters move up the first set of stairs.  This is NOT the light 
    in between the set of stairs, but the one on the left wall in the middle of the 
    first set of stairs.
    
    03 - The Umbrella Corporation
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: After the pair of two zombies attack shortly after the characters 
    enter the Chief's Room, shoot the phone on the desk when the characters turn 
    toward it to reveal this file.  Facing the desk, the phone is on the left side.
    
    04 - Ben Bertolucci's Expose
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters first enter the area with the two cells or as 
    they walk toward the second cell, shoot the overhead light outside of the 
    second cell to reveal this file.  When the characters first enter the cell 
    area, this light will be in the very back.
    
    05 - G-virus
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the characters turn to the right to face the group of four 
    zombies at the beginning of this chapter, shoot the first light on the ceiling 
    to reveal this file.
    
    06 - Underground Research Facility
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: When the characters round the left corner after running from the 
    zombies in the Control Panel Corridor, three zombies will block the way and the 
    elevator door can be seen in the distance.  Shoot the first control panel on 
    the wall to the right to reveal this file.
    
    07 - Memo to Leon
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: In the Stairway Corridor, after the characters climb the stairs, 
    they will begin to move down the corridor at the top.  Shoot the first light on 
    the left wall as the characters turn to the right to look down the hall.
    
    08 - Evacuation Order
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: When the characters turn back toward the two display cases on the 
    wall in Kendo's Gun Shop after they step near the counter, they will have the 
    front counter to their left.  Shoot the red display rack inside the display 
    case in the back of room and to the left next to the display case that holds 
    the grenade pickup to reveal this file.
    
    09 - Film B
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: When given the choice of two paths, choose to go underground.  After 
    your controlled character is knocked down, shoot the zombies then the character 
    will get up and look to the right as two zombies walk toward the characters.  
    Shoot the first light on the right wall as the characters look toward the two 
    zombies.  This is the second to last light in the group of lights on the right 
    wall.
    
    10 - Operation Report 1
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: After the characters move past the barricaded windows that the 
    zombie hands reach through in the Barricaded Hallway, they will be attacked by 
    a group of three zombies.  When the characters turn to face the zombies, shoot 
    the bottom portion of the barricade on the first boarded up window to the left 
    to reveal this file.  This boarded up window is actually the window in the 
    middle of the corridor.
    
    11 - Patrol Report
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: When the characters face off against the two zombies in the second 
    floor hallway after rounding the first right corner, shoot the first light on 
    the ceiling to reveal this file.  The characters will turn down this corridor 
    shortly after they see a picture on the left wall.
    
    12 - Marvin's Memo
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: When the characters first enter the Police Office, shoot the phone 
    on the desk off to the left as they look directly ahead to reveal this file. 
    Facing the desk, the phone is on the right corner.
    
    13 - Sewer Manager's Diary 1
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: In the Sewer Tunnel, shoot the second overhead light in back of the 
    tunnel as the characters look down the sewer tunnel after defeating the first 
    pair of Giant Spiders to reveal this file.
    
    14 - Operation Report 2
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters look into the kennel area from the Cell 
    Corridor, shoot the overhead light to the right to reveal this file.  This 
    light is to the right of a first aid spray pickup.  Only half of it can be seen 
    around the side of the right corner.
    
    15 - United States Federal Police Department Internal Investigation Report
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: While the characters walk toward the corner and prepare to turn to 
    the right after confronting two Lickers in the Control Panel Corridor, shoot 
    the furthest control panel on the left wall.
    
    16 - Chris's Diary
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: After exiting the Furnace Room, the characters will step back into 
    the Control Panel Corridor.  Once they round the right corner, two dead bodies 
    will be lying near the sidewalls.  Shoot the lower left wall control panel that 
    is partially behind the left dead body to reveal this file. You might have to 
    wait until the characters look down toward the left dead body in order to get a 
    better view of the control panel.
    
    17 - Sewer Manger's Fax
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the 
    tunnel, it will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file 
    will be on the front right.
    
    18 - Sewer Manager's Diary 2
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Once the alligator chases the characters further back into the 
    tunnel, it will break several boxes along the side of the tunnel.  This file 
    will be on the left.
    
    19 - Laboratory Security Manual
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Quickly shoot the final overhead light at the end of the Underground 
    Elevator Corridor as the characters rush down the hallway after exiting the 
    elevator to reveal this file.
    
    20 - G-Virus Antigen
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Shoot the control panel (computer) to the left of the shutter door 
    in the Emergency Corridor to reveal this file.
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22]
    
    
    01 - Rockfort Island
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: After the cutscene in the control room of the mess hall, your 
    partner will eventually get grabbed by a zombie as your controlled characters 
    turns around.  Quickly shoot the bulletin board off to the left behind the 
    zombie to reveal this file.
    
    02 - The Ashford Family
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Shoot the only light on the left wall of the Music Box Room to 
    reveal this file.  The light will be off to the right and in perfect view while 
    the characters watch the film reel of Alexia and Alfred as they torture a 
    dragonfly.
    
    03 - Veronica Ashford
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Shoot the control panel on the wall in the back of the dark front 
    lobby of the Training Facility.  It's off to the right on the back wall as 
    three Black Widow spiders attack the characters.
    
    04 - Alexander Ashford
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Shoot the picture on the right side of the wall directly ahead as 
    the characters open the door after exiting the Music Box Room.  The room will 
    be very dark when the characters first enter, so blast the right wall and 
    you'll hit the picture.  Shoot it before the characters move down the stairs. 
    This picture will be off to the left when the Black Windows attack.
    
    05 - Linear Launcher
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: During any fight with Alexia, find the shotgun ammo on the platform 
    along the back left side of the room.  Shoot the light above the door that is 
    near the shotgun ammo to reveal this file.
    
    06 - T-Veronica
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: During the fight with the Steve monster in the Coliseum, the 
    characters will eventually run away from Steve.  While they run away (to the 
    left), shoot the suit of armor against the wall that they first look toward to 
    reveal this file.  When they turn as Steve attacks, the suit of armor will be 
    behind the characters.  It can be retrieved as they move around the room.
    
    07 - Wesker's Message
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: When the characters face the corridor with zombies in the Coliseum 
    Corridor, shoot the second to last light that is hanging from ceiling to reveal 
    this file.
    
    08 - Prisoner's Diary
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: As the characters enter the area with the bunk beds, look ahead and 
    shoot the pillow of the last bottom bed on the left to reveal this file.  There 
    is a body lying on the bed that is hanging halfway off of it.
    
    09 - Message to the New Family
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: This can be done in several areas since the upper middle area is 
    constantly visible.  Shoot the hanging light to the left of the picture of 
    Alexia on the second floor walkway in the front lobby to reveal this file.
    
    10 - Confession Letter
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: When the characters look off to the right or as they climb the steps 
    to the right after examining the picture of Alexia on the second floor, shoot 
    the second painting on the right wall at the top of the steps to reveal this 
    file.  Facing the right wall, the painting is to the left.
    
    11 - Secretary's Note
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Shoot the light above the double doors that lead inside of the 
    Training Facility to reveal this file.
    
    12 - Message Written on a Wall in the Training Facility
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: As the characters look off the top wooden walkway and stare down 
    toward the jeep in the area with the jeep, shoot the green case on the table 
    next to the jeep to reveal this file.  It can be shot after the characters fall 
    from the walkway also.  You can shoot it while the characters face off against 
    the final wave of four zombies if you shoot to the immediate left while 
    fighting them.
    
    13 - HUNK's Report
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Back in the room with the Music Box that blocked the doorway 
    earlier, the characters will stare down at a body then move into the room.  
    Blast the clock on the table near the fireplace to reveal this file.  The 
    characters will turn back and look toward it eventually if you don't hit it 
    when the characters first enter.
    
    14 - Secret Passage Note
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: As the characters step toward the end of the bridge, a Bandersnatch 
    will leap in front of them.  Notice the six stone lion heads on the right and 
    left walls behind the Bandersnatch.  Shoot the first lion head on the left side 
    to reveal this file.
    
    15 - Newspaper Clipping
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters look down the left corridor after stepping 
    through the door on the top floor of the Ashford Estate, shoot the stack of 
    books next to the candle on the table against the left wall.  The characters 
    will give you plenty of time to do this after the three zombies attack from the 
    right side of the corridor.
    
    16 - Butler's Letter
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Shoot the last stone gargoyle at the end of the walkway where the 
    Hunter II attacks right before moving down the last set of stairs in the Front 
    Room of the Ashford Estate to reveal this file.  It's best to shoot this when 
    the first two Hunter II's attack.  It will be on the back wall to the left.
    
    17 - Worker's Diary
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the characters get on the conveyor belt, look to the right and 
    shoot the small box on top of the bigger box on the left side of the cage.  
    There are two big boxes inside of the cage and this small box is on top of the 
    left box.
    
    18 - Alfred's Diary
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Shoot the light above the door with the slumped over body in front 
    of it near the steps toward the bottom of the platforms to reveal this file. 
    This light can be seen from several areas.  It can be shot well after the 
    characters move down the ladder.
    
    19 - Alexander's Memo
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: During the fight with Second Form Alexia, shoot the green light on 
    the wall to the right behind Alexia to reveal this file.  The light is small 
    and rectangular shaped.  Use the submachine gun to blast it.
    
    20 - Queen Ant Report
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Shoot the small picture on the far right side of the top of the 
    fireplace when the characters turn toward the fireplace in the second floor 
    living room to reveal this file.
    
    21 - Virus Research Report
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: After the characters stare at the fireplace in the living room on 
    the second floor, they will turn to the right and fight two zombies.  Shoot the 
    painting beside the open door behind the two zombies to reveal this file.
    
    22 - Code Veronica Report
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: When the characters first enter the hallway a zombie will stand in 
    the middle of the hallway and another zombie will get up from the back of the 
    corridor.  Eventually the characters will move ahead then at the second cabinet 
    off to the left.  Blast the glass on the cabinet then shoot the right dish on 
    the top shelf of the cabinet to reveal this file. (Hard mode)
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        MOVIES
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    [17] [18]
    
    
    01 - Overture
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    02 - Girl
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    03 - Infiltration
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    04 - Torrent
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    05 - Scarred
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    06 - Conviction
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    07 - Reserve
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    08 - What Really Happened
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    09 - In-depth
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    10 - Sorrow
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    11 - Distress
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    12 - The Abyss
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    13 - Desperation
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    14 - Stake
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    15 - End of the Road
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Allow Manuela to use a bunch of her blood to help defeat the Complex 
    during the final boss battle.
    
    16 - The Return
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Do not allow Manuela to use much of her blood during the final boss 
    fight with the Complex.  Defeat the Complex quickly.
    
    17 - Turning Point
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    18 - End Credits
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13]
    
    
    01 - Encounter
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    02 - Devil
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    03 - The Woman
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    04 - The Fall
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    05 - Girl Fight
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    06 - Paths Cross
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    07 - From the Beginning
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    08 - Promise
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    09 - Hesitation
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    10 - Death Match
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    11 - Dying Wish
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    12 - G Train
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    13 - Survivors
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 8
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
    
    
    01 - Lonely Island
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    02 - Face to Face
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    03 - Mistrust
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    04 - Mad
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 2
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    05 - Father and Son
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    06 - The Truth
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    07 - Pursuit
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 5
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    08 - Crash
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    09 - Awakening
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    10 - Reunion
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    11 - Metamorphosis
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    12 - Last Words
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    13 - Queen
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    14 - Atonement
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    15 - Old Foe
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: Finish the chapter on Easy mode.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        VOICE
    *******************************************************************************
    
    ----------------
    Operation Javier
    ----------------
    
    [1] [2] [3] [4]
    
    
    01 - Communications from Krauser 1
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: Once the characters leap through the window of the building to 
    escape the zombies outside, blast the chair next to the table that they will 
    stare at while they are still on the floor of the building to reveal this file. 
    (Hard mode)
    
    02 - Communications from Krauser 2
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 3
    Condition: Shoot the bulletin board near the entrance door to the machine room. 
    This is on the left wall as the characters enter the room.  It can be shot 
    while Manuela tries to unlock the door to the room on the other side also. 
    (Hard mode)
    
    03 - Communications from Krauser 3
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters face off against a group of three zombies then 
    turn and face two Anubis in the outside area of Javier's Mansion, shoot the 
    second hanging light to the right to reveal this file.  It's hanging off of a 
    pillar and is the last light that can be seen in the background.
    
    04 - Manuela's Lullaby
    
    Scenario: Operation Javier
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the characters face off against a group of three zombies then 
    turn and face two Anubis in the outside area of Javier's Mansion, shoot the 
    second hanging light to the right to reveal this file.  It's hanging off of a 
    pillar and is the last light that can be seen in the background.
    
    ---------------------
    Memory of a Lost City
    ---------------------
    
    [1] [2] [3]
    
    
    01 - Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 1
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the elevator doors open and the single Ivy is facing the 
    characters, look on the right wall and shoot the second lower control panel on 
    the bottom portion of the right wall to reveal this file. (Hard mode)
    
    02 - Phone Call from Annette to Sherry 2
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: When the two Ivys attack in the corridor outside the elevator, shoot 
    the big control panel on the back wall behind them to reveal this file. (Hard 
    mode)
    
    03 - Phone Call from Sherry to Annette
    
    Scenario: Memory of a Lost City
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: As the characters look through the doorway of the Vaccine Room in 
    the P-4 Level Lab area, shoot the mixer on the right table inside the room to 
    reveal this file.  The mixer has a plastic cylinder on top of it. (Hard mode)
    
    ----------------
    Game of Oblivion
    ----------------
    
    [1] [2] [3] [4]
    
    
    01 - Alexia's Song
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 1
    Condition: After the cutscene where Alexia sings while at the top of the 
    stairs, shoot the ceiling light furthest away from the gate in the small tunnel 
    in front of the gate that the characters just moved through.  This light can 
    ONLY be shot after the cutscene where Alexia sings.  It's easy to miss the 
    light while near it since the characters rarely look up at it.
    
    It can be pinpointed and shot any time while the characters step past the jeep. 
    While the characters stare at the jeep and prepare to shoot the jeep, this 
    light can be shot at that time too - the screen will zoom in a bit allowing for 
    better aim eventually.  Blast it with the rocket launcher or linear launcher if 
    needed and the explosion will stand a better chance at hitting it.
    
    The light that must be shot is NOT the spotlight on the guard tower. The light 
    that must be shot is the furthest ceiling light away from the gate in the small 
    tunnel area below the guard tower. (Hard mode)
    
    02 - Music Box
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 4
    Condition: When the characters look toward the music box while searching for 
    the hidden passage in Alexia's Room, shoot the record in the music box to 
    reveal this file. (Hard mode)
    
    03 - Alfred and Alexia 1
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 6
    Condition: Once the characters enter, Alexander's Office, they will look to the 
    left and see a bear head hanging on the wall.  Shoot the bear head to reveal 
    this file. (Hard mode)
    
    04 - Alfred and Alexia 2
    
    Scenario: Game of Oblivion
    Chapter: 7
    Condition: After the characters fight off the Ants in the hallway, they will 
    rush down the corridor then try to open a door to the left.  When they turn 
    back to the right, shoot the first light on the top portion of the left wall.  
    This can also be seen while the characters stand in the beginning hallway just 
    barely as well. (Hard mode)
    
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                        TITLES
    *******************************************************************************
    
    
    [01] [02] [03] [04] [05] [06] [07] [08]
    
    [09] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
    
    
    01 - Game Cleared (EASY)
    
    All chapters cleared on EASY MODE.
    
    02 - Game Cleared (NORMAL)
    
    All chapters cleared on NORMAL MODE.
    
    03 - Game Cleared (HARD)
    
    All chapters cleared on HARD MODE.
    
    04 - Don't Give Up
    
    Very Easy mode has been unlocked (Die 10 times in a row on Easy mode)
    
    05 - Resident Evil Master
    
    All chapters cleared on VERY HARD MODE.
    
    06 - S.T.A.R.S. Mission
    
    You have cleared the Secret Chapter.
    
    07 - Story Completed
    
    You have cleared the game using all characters.
    
    08 - Thanks You for Playing
    
    You have played for 50 hours.
    
    09 - Character Collector
    
    You have collected all character archives.
    
    10 - Enemy Collector
    
    You have collected all enemy archives.
    
    11 - Item Collector
    
    You have collected all item archives.
    
    12 - Document Collector
    
    You have collected all document archives.
    
    13 - Movie Collector
    
    You have collected all movie archives.
    
    14 - Sound Collector
    
    You have collected all sound archives.
    
    15 - Extreme Collector
    
    You have collected all archive items.
    
    16 - Zombie Shooter
    
    You have killed 100 zombies.
    
    
    [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]
    
    [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32]
    
    
    17 - Zombie Hunter
    
    You have killed 500 zombies.
    
    18 - Zombie Killer
    
    You have killed 1000 zombies.
    
    19 - Hunter Killer
    
    You have killed 100 Hunters.
    
    20 - Licker Killer
    
    You have killed 50 Lickers.
    
    21 - Jabberwock Killer
    
    You have killed 30 Jabberwock S3s.
    
    22 - Indomitable Spirit
    
    You have continued 5 times (in a row).
    
    23 - You Could be a Zombie
    
    You have died 15 times (in a row).
    
    24 - Well-Off
    
    You have collected 50000 coins.
    
    25 - Wealthy
    
    You have collected 100000 coins.
    
    26 - Ultra-Rich
    
    You have collected 150000 coins.
    
    27 - Weapon Master
    
    You have fully customized all of your weapons.
    
    28 - Take it Back
    
    You have successfully countered 10 times.
    
    29 - Head Shooter
    
    You have pulled off 50 headshots.
    
    30 - Head Hunter
    
    You have pulled off 100 headshots.
    
    31 - Executioner
    
    You have pulled off 200 headshots.
    
    32 - Bomber
    
    You have used 50 grenades.
    
    
    [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40]
    
    [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48]
    
    
    33 - Mad Skillz
    
    You have cleared all chapters with an S Rank.
    
    34 - Speedster
    
    You have cleared all chapters in under 5 hours.
    
    35 - Trigger Happy
    
    You have fired more than 10,000 rounds.
    
    36 - Vegetarian
    
    You have used 50 herbs.
    
    37 - Pinhead
    
    You have cleared one chapter with only the Bowgun.
    
    38 - Put Your Trust In Others
    
    Your partner has killed 30 enemies.
    
    39 - Memory of a Lost City 1 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 1 without dying once.
    
    40 - Memory of a Lost City 2 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 2 without dying once.
    
    41 - Memory of a Lost City 3 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 3 without dying once.
    
    42 - Memory of a Lost City 4 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 4 without dying once.
    
    43 - Memory of a Lost City 5 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 5 without dying once.
    
    44 - Memory of a Lost City 6 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 6 without dying once.
    
    45 - Memory of a Lost City 7 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 7 without dying once.
    
    46 - Memory of a Lost City 8 Expert
    
    You have cleared Memory of a Lost City 8 without dying once.
    
    47 - Game of Oblivion 1 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 1 without dying once.
    
    48 - Game of Oblivion 2 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 2 without dying once.
    
    
    [49] [50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56]
    
    [57] [58] [59] [60] [61] [62]
    
    
    49 - Game of Oblivion 3 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 3 without dying once.
    
    50 - Game of Oblivion 4 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 4 without dying once.
    
    51 - Game of Oblivion 5 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 5 without dying once.
    
    52 - Game of Oblivion 6 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 6 without dying once.
    
    53 - Game of Oblivion 7 Expert
    
    You have cleared Game of Oblivion 7 without dying once.
    
    54 - Operation Javier 1 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 1 without dying once.
    
    55 - Operation Javier 2 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 2 without dying once.
    
    56 - Operation Javier 3 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 3 without dying once.
    
    57 - Operation Javier 4 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 4 without dying once.
    
    58 - Operation Javier 5 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 5 without dying once.
    
    59 - Operation Javier 6 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 6 without dying once.
    
    60 - Operation Javier 7 Expert
    
    You have cleared Operation Javier 7 without dying once.
    
    61 - Partner You Can Count On
    
    In 2P mode, you partner has helped you more than 5 times.
    
    62 - Friendly Play
    
    You have cleared all chapters in 2P mode.
    
    ---
    Big thanks to Resident Evil Saga to Resident Evil Saga for helping me to figure 
    out some of these:
    
    http://www.residentevilsaga.it/walkthrough.php?page=redc&walkthrough=titles
    ---
    
    
    [UN00]
    ===============================================================================
                             ____  _______  __    _    __ 
                            /__\ \/ /__   \/__\  /_\  / _\
                           /_\  \  /  / /\/ \// //_\\ \ \ 
                          //__  /  \ / / / _  \/  _  \_\ \
                          \__/ /_/\_\\/  \/ \_/\_/ \_/\__/
                       U N L O C K A B L E S  &  E X T R A S
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    This section contains a list of all the extra unlockables in RE:DSC besides 
    Archive items.
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    ======================================
    Operation Javier Chapter 6 & Chapter 7
    ======================================
    
    During the final fight with the V Complex in Chapter 5 of Operation Jaiver, 
    finish the boss as quickly as possible and do not allow Manuela to burn the 
    Complex with too much of her blood.  Some burns will occur because they are 
    scripted, but beat the Complex as quickly as possible and do not allow Manuela 
    to use her blood to help out very often.
    
    ==============
    Very Easy Mode
    ==============
    
    Successfully die and continue a total of 15 times in one chapter on Easy mode 
    and this mode will be unlocked.
    
    ==============
    Very Hard Mode
    ==============
    
    Complete all chapters on Hard mode.
    
    ===============
    Linear Launcher
    ===============
    
    Complete all chapters on Hard mode.
    
    =========
    Tofu Mode
    =========
    
    Complete Operation Javier 5.
    
    NOTE: This will appear on the main menu as "SECRET" under "OPTIONS".
    
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                    EXTRA COSTUMES
    *******************************************************************************
    
    The following bonus costumes can be unlocked by performing the tasks listed. An 
    option to select the costume will appear on the character select screen before 
    starting each chapters once the costume has been unlocked.
    
    =======================
    Chris' Caucasus costume
    =======================
    
    Successfully complete Operation Javier: Chapter 5 on Normal mode.
    
    ====================
    Chris' Mafia costume
    ====================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Game Of Oblivion: Chapter 7 (final) on Normal mode.
    
    ======================
    Claire's Biker costume
    ======================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Memory Of A Lost City: Chapters 1 through 8 on Normal mode.
    
    ========================
    Claire's Western costume
    ========================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Game Of Oblivion: Chapters 1 through 7 on Normal mode.
    
    ===========================
    Krauser's Detective costume
    ===========================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Operation Javier: Chapters 1 through 5 on Normal mode.
    
    ===========================
    Krauser's Mercenary costume
    ===========================
    
    Successfully complete Operation Javier: Chapter 5 on Normal mode.
    
    ====================
    Leon's Agent costume
    ====================
    
    Successfully complete Operation Javier Chapter 7 on Hard mode.
    
    ====================
    Leon's Biker costume
    ====================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Memory Of A Lost City: Chapters 1 through 8 on Normal mode.
    
    ========================
    Leon's Detective costume
    ========================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Operation Javier: Chapters 1 through 5 on Normal mode.
    
    =====================
    Leon's R.P.D. costume
    =====================
    
    Successfully complete Operation Javier: Chapter 7 on Hard mode.
    
    =======================
    Steve's Western costume
    =======================
    
    Get an "S" rank on Game Of Oblivion: Chapters 1 through 7 on Normal mode.
    
    
    [FA00]
    ===============================================================================
                                   ___  _      ____ 
                                  / __\/_\    /___ \
                                 / _\ //_\\  //  / /
                                / /  /  _  \/ \_/ / 
                                \/   \_/ \_/\___,_\
                   F R E Q U E N T L Y  A S K E D  Q U E S T I O N S
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    This section contains a few of the more frequently asked questions that need to 
    be addressed.  Of course there are a few fanboy rantings as well...
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    [01]
    
    Q: Whenever I quit a game, will it save any of my progress in the current 
    chapter?
    
    A: Yes, the game will automatically save your progress and you will start at 
    the last checkpoint that was reached.  If you start a new chapter then the game 
    will ask to delete your current progress from another chapter.  Progress from 
    another chapter must be deleted in order to start a new chapter or play a 
    different difficulty of the current chapter - the difficulty CANNOT be changed 
    while a checkpoint remains saved.
    
    [02]
    
    Q: Is there any other use for these collectible items other than simply viewing 
    them?
    
    A: They're just there for your viewing pleasure and to keep completionists 
    busy.
    
    [03]
    
    Q: How do I unlock Operation Javier Chapters 6 & 7
    
    A: Complete Operation Javier Chapter 5 as quickly as possible so that Manuela 
    does not burn the V Complex boss with much of her blood.  Power up your weapons 
    and you shouldn't have many problems performing this task.
    
    [04]
    
    Q: If I get an "S" rank on a chapter on Hard mode, will it unlock the Normal 
    mode "S" rank item along with the Hard mode "S" rank item if I haven't unlocked 
    the Normal mode item prior to that?
    
    A: Yes.  Simply beat Hard mode with an "S" to unlock both.
    
    [05]
    
    Q: What's the difference between the Easy, Normal, and Hard difficulties?
    
    A: Enemies are tougher and they take off damage from the characters as the 
    difficulty rises.  Green Herbs heal less on harder difficulties also.
    
    [06]
    
    Q: Do cutscenes or FMVs count toward my total completion time per chapter?  
    What about pause time?
    
    A: No, don't worry about skipping the cutscenes or FMVs.  Inventory time IS 
    factored into total completion time however, so whenever you enter the 
    inventory menu, all of that time is being counted toward total completion time.
    
    [07]
    
    Q: How do I change difficulties on my current game file?
    
    A: On the Main Menu, go to:
    
    Options --> Difficulty --> Second option
    
    NOTE: If a checkpoint save exist, you cannot change the difficulty.  You need 
    to load up a chapter and delete the checkpoint data then exit out in order to 
    change the difficulty.
    
    [08]
    
    Q: What gaming peripheral would you recommend for RE:UC?
    
    A: Well, I haven't tried the Zapper, so I can't comment on it.  I hear mixed 
    reviews about that gun.  The Nyko Perfect Shot, however, works extremely well!  
    Headshots are much easier to get off for me now with my faithful Perfect Shot.
    
    [09]
    
    Q: I've only played Resident Evil 4 and none of the others.  Will I still enjoy 
    RE:DSC?
    
    A: You'll still enjoy it, but you'll be missing out on quite a few details.  
    RE:UC simply summarizes most of the main plot of other RE games into a rush job 
    scenario per game.  You'll be spoiling each game with a quick recap of the 
    series.  In the case of Resident Evil 3, however, you won't spoil that much at 
    all since the RE3 scenario is so different from the actual game.
    
    Long story short, go out and buy the original RE's (0, 1, 2, 3, CVX) before 
    playing RE:DSC.  You can get them all on Gamecube (or backward compatible with 
    Wii), so what are you waiting for?
    
    [10]
    
    Q: Which version of the original Resident Evils would you recommend out of the 
    many versions available for each one?
    
    Resident Evil - Buy Resident Evil (REmake) for Gamecube for sure, but I 
    recommend picking up RE: Director's Cut or RE: Deadly Silence just for old 
    timesake and so you can appreciate REmake a bit more - see what has changed and 
    experience the original.  The PC version is a good pickup too - it actually has 
    the full colorized uncut opening complete with a bloody Joseph Frost death at 
    the beginning!  Oh, and Chris' smoking isn't covered up with a pick of him from 
    the opening.  There's a few other uncut aspects as well (Kenneth's half-eaten 
    head and Chris lights up yet again during his bad ending).
    
    Resident Evil 2 - Either the PC or Dreamcast version would be your best choice 
    - they're both basically the same.  The Gamecube version isn't bad, but it's 
    hard to find in a way.  The original PSX Dual Shock version is a real good 
    choice too.  The N64 version has some nice extra files, a new password for a 
    comp near the end, and an added dead Hunter in a room if that sort of thing 
    intrigues you like it does for me.
    
    Resident Evil 3 - Really the original PSX version is fine.  The Dreamcast and 
    Gamecube version have a slightly better look to them but it is only minor 
    enhancements.
    
    Resident Evil Code: Veronica - The Gamecube version.  It's based off Biohazard 
    Code: Veronica Complete for Dreamcast and even has that "added Wesker scene 
    intro" (or demo movie) present upon startup.  The PS2 version isn't as bright 
    as the normal Dreamcast release and it has an ugly intro that only showcases 
    clips from the opening FMV movie.  I'm really nitpicking here, but this is my 
    favorite RE, so I will continue to nitpick on brighter colors and intros when 
    asked about it.  Really the Dreamcast original Code Veronica has my favorite 
    intro out of all of them... okay, I'll quit now.
    
    
    [EI00]
    ===============================================================================
                   ____  _______  __    _      _____    __  ___  ___ 
                  /__\ \/ /__   \/__\  /_\     \_   \/\ \ \/ __\/___\
                 /_\  \  /  / /\/ \// //_\\     / /\/  \/ / _\ //  //
                //__  /  \ / / / _  \/  _  \ /\/ /_/ /\  / /  / \_// 
                \__/ /_/\_\\/  \/ \_/\_/ \_/ \____/\_\ \/\/   \___/  
    
            E X T R A   R E S I D E N T   E V I L   I N F O R M A T I O N
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    Here you will find a collection of some helpful web pages or sites that will 
    either help you gain more information for RE:DSC or the rest of the Resident 
    Evil series.
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    ------------ Resident Evil: Darkside Chronicles Extra Information -------------
    
    --> FILE LOCATION LIST
    
    ** author: Charming Tezza
    http://www.gamefaqs.com/console/wii/file/958780/58657
    
    --------------------- Resident Evil Series Information ------------------------
    
    --> GENERAL INFORMATION ON PAST RESIDENT EVIL GAMES, WESKER'S REPORT I, 
        WESKER'S REPORT II, FULL RESIDENT EVIL TIMELINE
    
    ** IGN RE Board Member's "Resident Evil Information Thread" **
    http://boards.ign.com/resident_evil/b5234/50229573/p1/?26
    
    -------------------------- Resident Evil Fansites -----------------------------
    
    (these are my personal favorites - there are tons more)
    
    --> THE HORROR IS ALIVE
    
    www.the-horror.com
    
    --> RESIDENT EVIL HORROR
    
    www.rehorror.net
    
    --> RESIDENT EVIL FAN
    
    www.residentevilfan.com
    
    ------------------ My Personal Favorite Resident Evil Artist ------------------
    
    --> Samuraijack's Gallery
    
    http://samuraijack.deviantart.com
    
    
    [EE00]
    ===============================================================================
                                     __  ___  _____ 
                                    /__\/ __\/__   \
                                   /_\ / /     / /\/
                                  //__/ /___  / / _ 
                                  \__/\____/  \/ (_)
                             E V E R Y T H I N G   E L S E
    ===============================================================================
    
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    Basically all the extra information that no one cares to read is found below - 
    Copyright, Special Thanks, Version History, details about me, my contact info, 
    details about my Featured Guides at Cheat Happens.
    
    To rephrase that, warnings and threats to help protect this guide from thieves, 
    gratitude for people that help me out, details about this guide's progress, my 
    boring life, youtube page and "website", my question box, and of course plugs. 
    Yeah, that about wraps it up...
    =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                      COPYRIGHT                              [CO00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
    This document Copyright 2010 - 2012 Kevin Hall (Berserker)
    
    Resident Evil: The Darkside Chronicles Copyright 2009 Capcom Ltd.
    
    This document is for private and personal use only.  Do not try to sell this 
    document for profit.  This is a free document and should remain free.  Do not 
    try to reproduce this document in any way, shape, or form.  Do not alter this 
    FAQ in any way.  Use of this guide on any other web site, besides the sites 
    that have contacted me, or as a part of any public display is strictly 
    prohibited, and a violation of copyright.
    
    If you want to use this FAQ on your site, then contact me for permission first.
    
    This FAQ can only be found on a few sites as of now and I am keeping a list of 
    those sites.  Contact me if you want to use it.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                   SPECIAL THANKS                            [ST00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
    - my parents.
    
    - SBAllen and Ceej from GameFAQs, Stephen from IGN FAQs, Chris and Peter from 
      Cheat Happens, Dennis from Supercheats, and the Neoseeker FAQ staff for 
      always accepting my guides.
    
    - Capcom for the Resident Evil series.
    
    - all of the friends that I have made because of Resident Evil 5.  Truly, too 
      many to list.
    
    - http://network-science.de/ascii/ for the ASCII art.
    
    - http://tinyurl.com for the tiny urls.
    
    - Mózsi and Kyle for the help with the Titles.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                   VERSION HISTORY                           [VH00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
    Version 1.0 - (February, 15 2010) - Well, here we are.  The first version of my 
    Darkside Chronicles in postable form, finally!  I'll probably be adding to this 
    guide a bit throughout the year, but right now, I'm probably going to take a 
    break from DSC for the moment.
    
    I still need to add many listings to the archives section.  If you can help me 
    then email me!
    
    Version 1.1 - (February 23, 2010) - All of the Titles are now listed in the 
    archives section!
    
    Version 1.2 - (September 8, 2013) - This is actually an older update that I 
    never released last year when the game was released for PS3.  I updated a few 
    of the listings in the Archives.  The "Characters" listing is still not 
    completely filled out.  If you can help with this in any way, it would be 
    greatly appreciated.  It's SO hard to find information for Darkside since it 
    didn't go over well.  Since I have a Move controller for the PS3 version, I'll 
    add in the Move controls in both my Darkside and Umbrella Chronicles guides 
    eventually.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                     CONTACT INFO                            [CI00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
    I can be reached at my email address, which is berserker_kev(at)yahoo.com, so 
    please contact me if you have any questions, comments, etc.  Replace the (at) 
    with @.  I don't mind receiving emails at all.  Don't add me to your Yahoo 
    Messenger though; I use Yahoo Messenger only for close friends.
    
    I do have a few guidelines however:
    
    1) Give me a subject in the email, preferably one including the name of the 
       game.  An actual subject looks damn sexy in my inbox compared to an 
       unattractive blank subject line.
    2) Read the guide over and make sure that your question is not already 
       answered.
    3) Please speak in English and attempt to use some correct grammar.  This is in
       no way meant to offend those that cannot speak English well.  I have spoken 
       with some readers that claim they cannot speak English when, in fact, they 
       speak better English then some Americans.  So basically if you "try" to talk
       to me then that is good enough. :)
    
    And last, but not least, if you found this walkthrough helpful, an email would 
    be most appreciated or you could sign the guestbook on my blog or add me to 
    your "Watched User List" on IGN (give me a WUL).
    
    http://club.ign.com/b/about?username=berserker_kev&which=boards
    
    It is very true that I write these guides as a hobby, but just that little 
    email that lets me know that I have helped someone always makes me feel special 
    for about five minutes.  Don't worry, I won't tell anyone on the gaming boards 
    that you used a guide. ;)
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                       ABOUT ME                              [AM00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
       "BRAVE BERSERKER, FAST BERSERKER, EFFECTIVE BERSERKER, GOOD BERSERKER."
    
                              - a gamer over PSN after playing an RE5 demo session.
    
    
    My name is Kevin Hall.  I'm 29 years old and live in the US, in a small town in 
    Mississippi.  Ever since I was really young, I have been a huge fan of video 
    games since I was first introduced to them via the Atari 2600 and NES 8-bit.  
    My favorite gaming series is the Resident Evil series followed closely by the 
    Castlevania series.  I'm a complete horror gaming junkie - survival horrors are 
    my main cup of tea.  Capcom is my favorite video game company.  They hardly 
    ever let me down when it comes to games with plenty of replay value.
    
    I enjoy being creative and hopefully that shows in my guides, specifically this 
    one, since I have been working hard on it ever since March 13, 2009.  Whenever 
    I sit down to write a guide, I truly get "in the zone" and my perfectionist 
    nature takes over.  My constant goal is to impress myself with my own work and 
    that is one very hard task to accomplish since, well... I am never satisfied.  
    
    I believe in making a guide as thorough as possible.  You're going to get your 
    left click's worth when opening a Berserker guide.  We're going to freaking 
    tear though that game and rip that sucker apart.
    
    Whenever I sit down to write a guide, I constantly think to myself "Now, is 
    that what I would want if I was reading this guide; if I was looking for that 
    item, would this description help me"?  I take reader comments and overall 
    responses to other guides that I view on the web very seriously when writing my 
    own and shape mine differently with those comments in mind.
    
    The reader knows best after all... well, most of the time.  There are some that 
    I'd like to Haymaker back to where they came from, but the majority of them 
    shape the way I write.  Overall, I write to help fellow gamers and if they can 
    find help in my work, whether I know it or not, then that right there makes it 
    all worthwhile!
    
    My known aliases are Berserker, berserker_kev, and Berserker93, though 
    "Berserker" or "Kev" is preferred.  If you ever surf the IGN Resident Evil 
    boards or the Arctic Nightfall boards then look for me!  I'm mainly only 
    dedicated to my blog now however, but I still move between those two boards 
    every now and then.
    
    Here are a few other bits of information about me:
    
    --> IGN FAQ Writer of the Month interviews:
    
    July 2005     - http://faqs.ign.com/articles/637/637797p1.html
    December 2008 - http://faqs.ign.com/articles/941/941068p1.html
    
    --> Berserker: Tear Through the Game (My Gaming Blog)
    
    My own site with game reviews, discussions of my guides (some), and random 
    thoughts about video games.  Feel free to post up some comments on the blog.  I
    don't bite... well not that much... and not too viciously...
    
    http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com
    
    --> My Youtube Page
    
    http://www.youtube.com/user/BerserkerSTARS
    
    I basically only have RE5 Mercs videos listed on my youtube page at the moment, 
    but I would like to add some Hard mode S-rank videos for DSC at a later date. 
    So far, only Chapter 1 of Operation Javier is listed.
    
    --> My other work can be found at both IGN and GameFAQs.
    
    IGN      - http://club.ign.com/b/contrib?username=berserker_kev&which=faqs
    GameFAQs - http://www.gamefaqs.com/features/recognition/21400.html?type=1
    
    *******************************************************************************
                                      DONATIONS                              [DO00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
                       Paypal Address: berserker_kev@yahoo.com
    
    I'm not going to bore you with a huge sermon or provide tons of reasons why you 
    should donate, but I would like to mention that I do take donations now.  If 
    you go to my site at http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com there is a Paypal 
    donation link on the right column if you look down the page that you can use as 
    well.
    
    All donations will be used to help make my future guides better as I am able to 
    afford better equipment.  A donation will never go toward personal gain items 
    such as a new game or any other personal commodity for myself.
    
    Here's more of an explanation:
    
    http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com/2008/12/donations.html
    
    Be sure to email me if you donate, so I can thank you personally!  Big thanks 
    to the readers that have donated so far.  You know who you are and you're some 
    very generous people.
    
    If you don't have a Paypal account, then check out my items on Half.com and see 
    if you can find anything that might interest you:
    
    http://shops.half.ebay.com/cadman-half_W0QQsellerZcadmanQ2dhalf
    
    I post up items on Half.com regularly and am constantly rolling back prices.  
    My father and I share an account on eBay, hence the username.
    
    *******************************************************************************
                            CHEAT HAPPENS FEATURED GUIDES                    [CH00]
    *******************************************************************************
    
    This is a list of HTML guides with pics that I have done for Cheat Happens.  If
    you like my work in my FAQs found around the various gaming sites then you will
    find that these guides are similar.
    
    --> Dead Space
    
    A guide that will keep you whole as you slice your enemies to pieces!
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/dead_space/ds_index.asp
    
    --> God of War: Chains of Olympus
    
    Before Kratos waged war on the gods, he was forced to serve them.
    
    www.cheathappens.com/features/god_of_war_chains_of_olympus/gowcoo_index.asp
    
    --> Lost Planet
    
    A frozen wasteland.  An alien menace.  An extreme soldier.  The battlefield is
    set!
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/lost_planet/lp_index.asp
    
    --> God Hand
    
    Have Fist Will Travel!
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/god_hand/gh_index.asp
    
    --> Dead Rising
    
    Freelance photojournalist Frank West + a mall full of zombies + tons of 
    stores where anything and everything is a weapon = the scoop of a lifetime!
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/dead_rising/dr_index.asp
    
    --> Tomb Raider: Legend
    
    Lady Croft's next big adventure crosses multiple platforms and delivers on all!
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/tomb_raider_legend/trl_index.asp
    
    --> Prince of Persia: The Two Thrones
    
    "Come, and I will tell you a tale like none you have ever heard..."
    
    http://www.cheathappens.com/features/two_thrones/poptt_index.asp
    
    
    /\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/
    .,                                                                           ,.
    \ '.            - -     http://berserkersblog.blogspot.com     - -         .' /
     '. '.          - - http://www.youtube.com/user/BerserkerSTARS - -       .' .'
       '. '.           ___    __  __  __    __  __          __  __         .' .'
         '.|          / __\  /__\/__\/ _\  /__\/__\  /\ /\ /__\/__\        |.'
      ..,            /__\// /_\ / \//\ \  /_\ / \// / //_//_\ / \//           ,..
     ( \ '.         / \/  \//__/ _  \_\ \//__/ _  \/ __ \//__/ _  \         .' / )
     '. \  '..      \_____/\__/\/ \_/\__/\__/\/ \_/\/  \/\__/\/ \_/      ..'  / .'
      '. \/\  '.                                                       .'  /\/ .'
        '.  \/\/'                                                     '\/\/  .'
          '.....'      T E A R   T H R O U G H   T H E   G A M E!     '.....'
    /\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/\/
    

    FAQ Display Options: Printable Version